TM

Introduction to Thickness Monitoring
Certain types of equipment in your plant may be particularly prone to corrosion. For
example, a pipe that transports corrosive liquid or a tank that stores corrosive material
may break down over time from exposure to the corrosive substances. As this equipment
deteriorates over time, the risk for a corrosion failure increases. Because corrosion
failures can be expensive and dangerous, you will want to inspect these pieces of
equipment regularly so that you can monitor the corrosion rate and repair or replace the
equipment before a failure occurs.
Meridium APM Thickness Monitoring (TM) is a tool that allows you to document,
manage, and analyze corrosion data for equipment. It provides the tools that you need to
monitor the corrosion of equipment in your plant, and take preventive actions that will
help you avoid the economic, environmental, and human costs of corrosion failures.
Conducting a corrosion analysis on equipment involves the following general procedure:
1. Determine which types of equipment in your plant need to be monitored. You will
want to select types of equipment that are likely to corrode over time.
2. For each type of equipment that will be monitored, identify one or more thickness
measurement locations (TMLs). A TML is a location on the piece of equipment
where you will periodically measure the thickness. In Meridium APM, the
information for each unique TML is stored in a Thickness Measurement Location
record.
3. After you have identified the TMLs, record thickness measurements for each
TML. The number of measurements that you record will depend upon the
inspection frequency and the life of the piece of equipment. Each piece of
equipment will have a base, or first, measurement, which can be taken physically
or might be determined based on a published standard, such as the manufacturer's
design specification for a new piece of equipment. In Meridium APM,
measurements are stored in Thickness Measurement records.
After you begin recording measurements for the TMLs, the Meridium APM system can
begin performing calculations based upon those measurements. Using the measurement
data, Meridium APM can calculate the corrosion rate for the equipment and additional
values. The calculations can help you decide when to repair or replace the equipment.
In addition to facilitating the basic analysis workflow described above, Meridium APM
Thickness Monitoring also provides other tools and features that help you manage your
corrosion data and monitor your equipment, including:
The Minimum Thickness (T-Min) Calculator, which is designed to calculate the

minimum thickness for certain types of components. The T-Min value is used to
determine the components corrosion rate, remaining life, and next inspection
date. The T-Min Calculator is available for piping, pressure vessels, and tanks and
is compliant with ANSI B31 (for piping), API 653 (for tanks), and ASME Section
VIII DIV 1 and NBIC NB23, API 510 (for pressure vessels).
An interface for handheld data recorders manufactured by Krautkramer Branson
and Panametrics. This allows measurement readings that have been recorded in
the field to be uploaded automatically to Meridium APM Thickness Monitoring.
In addition, data stored in Meridium APM can be downloaded to handheld
devices. D
IMPORTANT: With the exception of the section of the documentation on configuring

Thickness Monitoring, this documentation assumes that you are following the Thickness
Monitoring Best Practice.
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.
TM System Requirements
The Thickness Monitoring license is required to take advantage of TM functionality. In
addition, your system must contain the basic Meridium APM system architecture and the
files that support certain devices that you may use to collect and transfer data to the
Meridium APM system.
After you have installed and configured the basic architecture, you will need to perform
some configuration tasks specifically for the TM feature.
TM Data Model
The following diagram illustrates how families are related to one another within the TM
data model. In the following image, boxes represent entity families, and arrows represent
relationship families that are configured in the baseline database.
About Equipment and Locations in TM

The Thickness Monitoring Best Practice specifies that you will create TM Analyses for
equipment only. You will not create TM Analyses for locations. If you are following the
Meridium APM Best Practice, your equipment information will be stored in Equipment
records, which will serve as the root records for your TM Analyses.
Additionally, the TM Best Practice specifies that you can organize your equipment at a
level below the equipment to define components of the equipment. TML Group records
should be used to organize your equipment at this level. If you choose to include TML
Group records in your TM Analyses, it is important to understand what TML Group
records can represent.
What Is a TM Analysis?
As described in the Thickness Monitoring overview, to conduct a corrosion analysis on a
piece of equipment you must:
1. Identify a piece of equipment to analyze.
2. Establish TMLs on the piece of equipment.
3. Collect measurement data for those TMLs.
In the Meridium APM Thickness Monitoring module, you will complete these tasks by
creating records, populating them with the desired information, and linking them together
to establish relationships between them. As you complete these tasks, other records will
be created by the Meridium APM system automatically to store calculations based upon
the records that you created. Throughout this documentation, we refer to all these records
and links collectively as a TM Analysis.
The following topics provide illustrations of the two possible structures for a TM
Analysis:
TM Analyses That Include TML Group Records

TM Analyses That Exclude TML Group Records
TM Analyses That Include TML Group

Records
The following diagram illustrates the structure of TM Analyses that include TML Group
records. Specifically, this diagram illustrates the records and links that would exist if a
TM Analysis included one Equipment record, which is linked to three TML Group
records. The boxes in the diagram are labeled according to the records that they represent,
and the lines connecting the boxes represent the links between these records in a TM
Analysis.
The following table provides information on how the records that are illustrated in the
diagram are created manually or automatically.
Record
Notes
Manually for Equipment records.
-and-
Corrosion
Analysis Settings Automatically for TML Group records
that you create and link to those
Equipment records.
Asset Corrosion
Analysis
Automatically for Equipment and

TML Group records, but at different
points in the TM Analysis workflow.
Equipment
Manually.
Thickness
Measurement
Manually.
Thickness
Measurement
Location
Manually.
Thickness
Automatically (when a Corrosion
Monitoring Task
Analysis Settings record is created).
TML Corrosion
Analysis
Automatically (when a Thickness

Measurement Location record is
saved).
TM Analyses That Exclude TML Group

Records
The following diagram illustrates the structure of TM Analyses that do not include TML
Group records. The boxes in the diagram are labeled according to the records that they
represent, and the lines connecting the boxes represent links between these records in a
TM Analysis.
The following table provides information on how the records illustrated in the diagram
are created manually or automatically.
Record
Notes
Corrosion Analysis
Manually.
Settings
Asset Corrosion
Analysis

Analysis Settings record is created for
an Equipment record).
Equipment
Manually.
Thickness
Measurement
Manually.
Thickness
Measurement
Location
Manually.
Thickness
Monitoring Task

Analysis Settings record is created).
TML Corrosion
Analysis
Automatically (when a Thickness

saved).
Equipment and TML Groups

Each TM Analysis begins with a piece of equipment whose corrosion you want to
monitor. The pieces of equipment that you want to analyze may be standalone pieces of
equipment or pieces of equipment that are made up of components.
Before you can conduct a TM Analysis on a piece of equipment, an Equipment record
must exist in the Meridium APM database to represent the piece of equipment on which
you want to perform the corrosion analysis. The types of records that you create in your
TM Analyses will depend upon what your Equipment records represent.
Consider, for example, a piping circuit that contains three piping lines. You might want:
One Equipment record to store all of the information for the piping circuit and the
three piping lines.
One Equipment record to store information for the piping circuit and three TML
Group records to store information for the individual piping lines (one TML
Group record for each piping line). These TML Group records would be linked
directly to the Equipment record that stores information for the piping circuit.
-or-
To support these two options for organizing your equipment, the Thickness Monitoring
Best Practice provides two options for creating your TM Analyses:
All of your TM Analyses can contain TML Group records. You should use this
option if any of the equipment that you will analyze in TM contains components
or you want to analyze corrosion data for certain groups of TMLs on a piece of
equipment or component. What the TML Group records that you create represent
will depend upon whether the associated Equipment record represents a
standalone piece of equipment or a piece of equipment that contains components.
If you set your TM Analyses up in this way:

o
You must configure preferences for the Equipment family.

Each TML Group record that you create will be linked to an Equipment
record through the Has TML Group relationship.
All Thickness Measurement Location records that you create should be

linked directly to a TML Group record. Thickness Measurement Location
records should never be linked directly to an Equipment record in your
TM Analyses.
One Corrosion Analysis Settings record will be created and linked to the
Equipment record, and one Corrosion Analysis Settings record will be
created and linked to each TML Group record that is linked to that
Equipment record.
One Asset Corrosion Analysis record will be created and linked to the
Equipment record, and one Asset Corrosion Analysis record will be
created and linked to each TML Group record that is linked to that
Equipment record.
-or
None of your TM Analyses can contain TML Group records. You should use this
option if none of the equipment that you will analyze in TM contains components
or you do not want to analyze corrosion data for certain groups of TMLs on a
piece of equipment.
If you set your TM Analyses up in this way:

o
o
All Thickness Measurement Location records that you create should be

linked directly to an Equipment record.
One Corrosion Analysis Settings record will be created and linked to each
Equipment record in your TM Analyses.
One Asset Corrosion Analysis record will be created and linked to each
Equipment record in your TM Analyses.
You must create the necessary Equipment or TML Group records before you can begin
conducting corrosion analyses. Equipment records can be created manually via the
Meridium APM Record Manager, or they might be loaded into Meridium APM from
another data source (e.g., SAP). TML Group records can created in TM via the TM
TMLs/Measurements page.
Note: This documentation assumes that you will not use the Record Manager to create or
manage TML Group records.
Although this documentation assumes that you follow the Thickness Monitoring Best
Practice, and that you set up your TM Analyses in one of the two ways described above,
the section of the documentation that provides details on configuring Thickness
Monitoring provides information on configuring Thickness Monitoring using nonbaseline families that store equipment data and/or component data.
Overview of TML Groups

A TML Group is a group of TMLs that exist on a piece of equipment. TML Group records
are used to store information about groups of TMLs. If your TM Analyses are set up to
include TML Group records, it is important to understand the options for organizing
TMLs within TML Group records.
The following explanation provides information about the options for organizing TMLs
within TML Group records. The examples within the explanation assume that you have a
piece of equipment, Piping Circuit 101, which contains three components, Line A, Line B,
and Line C. On those components, there are multiple TMLs. The following image
illustrates this example, where the components are represented by blue, green, and orange
shaded regions, and the TMLs are represented by blue, green, and orange stars.
For a given piece of equipment, a TML Group record can represent:
All TMLs that exist on that piece of equipment. You would create a TML Group
record to represent all TMLs that exist on an entire piece of equipment if the piece
of equipment is a standalone piece of equipment. Using the previous Piping
Circuit 101 example, you would create one TML Group record to represent all of
the blue, green, and orange stars.
A subset of TMLs that exist on one or more components that belong to the piece
of equipment. Using this option, you could create:
o One TML Group record per component, where the TML Group record
represents all TMLs that exist on that component. In other words, if the
piece of equipment contains three components, you would create three
corresponding TML Group records. Using the previous Piping Circuit 101
example, you would create three TML Group records, where one
represents the blue stars, one represents the green stars, and one represents
the orange stars.
-oro
One TML Group record for multiple components, where the TML Group
record represents all TMLs that exist on those components. Using the
previous Piping Circuit 101 example, you could create two TML Group
records, where one represents the blue and green stars and one represents
the orange stars.
Additionally, throughout the course of your TM Analysis, you might identify one or more
groups of TMLs on one or more components that you want to analyze separately from
other TMLs. In this case, you can create additional TML Group records to represent any
subdivision of a group of TMLs.
For example, suppose that an Equipment record that you are analyzing in TM represents a
shell and tube heat exchanger. The shell and tube heat exchanger has two components,
the shell side and the tube side, each with its own process flow. Since the corrosion
environments of these components will differ, you might create the following TML
Group records:
TML Group - Shell Side
TML Group - Tube Side
When you first begin analysis on the shell and tube heat exchanger, you are not
sure what the TM corrosion data will show, (i.e., whether TML Group - Shell Side
or TML Group - Tube Side will have more aggressive corrosion). After you
completed some analysis on the shell and tube heat exchanger, you noticed that a
subset of TMLs on the shell side near the nozzle have very high corrosion rates. At
this point, you create a third TML Group record, TML Group - Shell Nozzle to
represent this component, and you move the Thickness Measurement Location
records associated with this component from TML Group - Shell Side to TML
Group - Shell Nozzle.
Regardless of what they represent, all TML Group records in a TM Analysis will be
linked directly to a single Equipment record. All Thickness Measurement Location
records in your TM Analyses should be linked directly to TML Group records (rather
than the Equipment record to which the TML Group record is linked).
You can create and manage TML Group records via the TM TMLs/Measurements page.
About Managing TML Group Records

If you include TML Group records in your TM Analyses, you should create and manage
those TML Group records using the TM module rather than the Record Manager. After
you have created TML Group records, you can perform the following tasks:
Modify TML Group records.

Delete TML Group records.
Specify a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record to which you want to link
a TML Group record.
Note: To perform this task, the Risk Based Inspection (RBI) license must also be active.
Thickness Measurement Locations

A thickness measurement location (TML) is a specific place on a piece of equipment or
component where thickness measurement readings will be taken and for which various
calculations, including minimum thickness, can be performed. In Meridium APM, each
thickness measurement location is recorded in a Thickness Measurement Location record.
Depending upon how you set up your TM Analyses, you will link Thickness
Measurement Location records to Equipment or TML Group records through the Has
Datapoints relationship. Each Equipment or TML Group record can have multiple
Thickness Measurement Location records associated with it.
Each Thickness Measurement Location record will store identifying information for a
given TML. Each Thickness Measurement Location record can, in turn, be linked to one
or more Thickness Measurement records, which record measurements taken at that
location.
Overview of Thickness Measurements

An Equipment or TML Group record can be linked to one or more Thickness
Measurement Location records, which identify the locations on the piece of equipment
where thickness measurements will be taken. A thickness measurement is a value that
quantifies the thickness in inches of a given TML at a specific point in time. Thickness
measurements and the properties associated with them are stored in Thickness
Measurement records.
Each TML will have various types of thickness measurements, including:
Base Measurement: The first measurement taken for a TML.

Near Measurement: The second-most-recently-recorded measurement for a TML.
Last Measurement: The most-recently-recorded measurement for a TML.
These measurement designations are not recorded in the Thickness Measurement records
themselves but rather are determined for the TML Corrosion Analysis by evaluating how
many Thickness Measurement records exist and when they were created. After you create
a new Thickness Measurement Location record, you will want to record the base
measurement, which represents the first thickness reading recorded for that TML.
Additional Thickness Measurement records will be created later, as measurement
readings are taken throughout the life of the equipment.
Three primary interfaces are available in the Meridium APM Framework for working
with Thickness Measurement records:
TM TMLs/Measurements page: Lets you view all the Thickness Measurement

Location records that are linked to an Equipment or TML Group record, along
with any Thickness Measurement records that are linked to those Thickness
Measurement Location records.
TM Measurement Data Entry page: Lets you create new Thickness Measurement
records for all the TMLs associated with a selected Equipment or TML Group
record.
TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page: Lets you record new Thickness
Measurement records for any Thickness Measurement Location records that are
not yet linked to a Thickness Measurement record.
In addition, you may want to use the Datalogger to upload readings that were collected
using a handheld data recorder.
IMPORTANT: Thickness Measurement records should be created and modified using
only the interfaces in the preceding list. New Thickness Measurement records cannot be
created via the Record Manager. Existing Thickness Measurement records should be
managed with Thickness Monitoring to ensure data integrity.
How Measurement Values are

Determined from Readings
The value associated with a specific thickness measurement is stored in the Measurement
Value field of a given Thickness Measurement record. Values are not, however, entered
directly into the Measurement Value field itself. Instead, values will be entered into the
Readings field.
To obtain the measurement value for a Thickness Measurement record, one or more
readings will be collected at a given thickness measurement location. A reading is a
single, numeric value that is obtained by measuring the thickness of a TML. To account
for the margin of error associated with user error, equipment malfunction, or
environmental conditions, you may wish to collect multiple readings for each thickness
measurement. The number of readings that you take for a measurement will depend upon
various factors, including your company's policies, the attributes of the TML, and the
method that you are using to collect the readings. The number of readings that you must
take for each measurement is determined by the value in the Number of Readings field in
Thickness Measurement Location records to which the Thickness Measurement record is
linked.
After you have determined how many readings you must take for a specific measurement
and you have collected those readings, you will create a Thickness Measurement record
and log the reading values in the Readings field. A calculation will be performed against
the values in the Readings field, based upon the settings that you have defined for
measurement readings. Then, the Uncorrected Measurement field will be populated with
the result of that calculation. Finally, the Measurement Value field will be populated with
the value in the Uncorrected Measurement field. The Measurement Value field will then
contain a value representing the final, corrected thickness measurement value.
Note: The Uncorrected Measurement field is meant to serve as an intermediate storage
location between the Readings and Measurement Value fields. In the baseline TM
product, the Measurement Value field is simply populated with the value in the
Uncorrected Measurement field. If desired, however, you can create custom rules for the
Measurement Value field so that the Uncorrected Measurement value is adjusted based
upon additional factors and the result of that calculation becomes the value in the
Measurement Value field.
Nominal Versus Actual Thickness

Measurements
Each thickness measurement can be classified as either nominal or actual via the
Nominal field in Thickness Measurement records.
A nominal measurement represents a reading that is not taken physically but is

recorded from some other source, such as a design specification. For nominal
measurements, the Nominal field in the Thickness Measurement record is set to
True.
An actual measurement represents a reading that is taken manually at the physical

thickness measurement location on the equipment. For actual measurements, the
Nominal field in the Thickness Measurement record is set to False.
Actual measurements are typically more accurate and result in calculations that are more
representative of the actual piece of equipment. Nominal measurements may not be as
accurate but provide an efficient mechanism for recording initial measurement data when
you are setting up a new TM Analysis.
Any Thickness Measurement record can be designated as a nominal measurement via the
Nominal field. Typically, however, nominal measurements are used only for the base
measurement (i.e., the first measurement). As such, nominal measurement for new or
newly renewed Thickness Measurement Location records should be created using the TM
Initial Measurement Data Entry page. Actual measurements can also be created via the
TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page, but the way in which they are created is
different. On the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page:
Measurement data will be populated automatically for Thickness Measurement

records that are linked to Thickness Measurement Location records configured for
nominal base measurements.
Measurement data must be entered manually for Thickness Measurement records
that are linked to Thickness Measurement Location records that are not
configured for nominal base measurements.
Note: If you create Thickness Measurement records via any interface other than the TM
Initial Measurement Data Entry page, the Readings field will not be populated
automatically with the Thickness Measurement Location record's Nominal Thickness
value, even if one exists. Instead, the Readings field will be populated with whatever
value you specify manually at creation time, and the Nominal field will be set to False by
default. You can specify any Thickness Measurement record created in this way as a
nominal measurement by manually setting the Nominal field to True.
The Meridium APM system will use all active thickness measurements for performing
TML Corrosion Analysis calculations; no distinction is made between nominal and actual
measurements. Nominal measurements, however, will become inactive measurement
automatically after two, subsequent actual measurements have been recorded. In other
words, if the Measurement Taken Date of any two actual measurements is after the
Measurement Taken Date of a nominal measurement, the nominal measurement will
become an inactive measurement.
TML Corrosion Analyses

A TML Corrosion Analysis record is created automatically and linked to a Thickness
Measurement Location record when the Thickness Measurement Location record is first
created. Each TML Corrosion Analysis record stores summary information and
calculations that are determined using the Thickness Measurement records that are linked
to the Thickness Measurement Location record.
Equipment or TML Group records will be linked indirectly to one or more TML
Corrosion Analysis records, one for each Thickness Measurement Location record that is
linked to the Equipment or TML Group record. Together, the TML Corrosion Analysis
records provide the information that is represented in the Asset Corrosion Analysis
record, which serves as an overview or summary of the corrosion information that has
been gathered for each Thickness Measurement Location record.
While the Asset Corrosion Analysis record provides a useful summary of the corrosion
status of a given piece of equipment, you will want to examine the individual TML
Corrosion Analysis records to get a more detailed perspective of the corrosion of the
equipment. In addition, because values in the Asset Corrosion Analysis are determined
directly using values stored in individual TML Corrosion Analysis records, you may need
to review the TML Corrosion Analyses in order to understand what you are seeing in the
Equipment record's Corrosion Analysis Summary.
About Asset Analysis Settings

Analysis settings let you choose certain options that will control how various values will
be calculated in Asset Corrosion Analysis and TML Corrosion Analysis records. You will
need to configure the analysis settings based upon your organization's preferences and to
ensure that the analysis yields results that are useful and meaningful to you and your
organization.
In a TM Analysis that includes both Equipment and TML Group records, analysis settings
must be defined for each Equipment and TML Group record and will be used for the
Asset Corrosion Analysis records that are linked to the Equipment and TML Group
records.
Analysis settings are stored in Corrosion Analysis Settings records that are linked the
Equipment and TML Group records in a TM Analysis. Different settings can be defined
for each TML Analysis Type and will be used for the Asset Corrosion Analysis records
that are associated with the appropriate type. This means that when you create or access
the analysis settings for an Equipment or TML Group record, you will need to choose the
TML Analysis Type for which you want to configure settings. You will first create
Corrosion Analysis Settings records manually for Equipment records. The analysis
settings that you create at the Equipment level can then be spread to the TML Group level
(i.e., a Corrosion Analysis Settings record is created and linked automatically to the TML
Group record) in the following scenarios:
When you create a new TML Group record for an Equipment record.
When you create for an Equipment record analysis settings of a TML Analysis
Type of which analysis settings do not yet exist for a TML Group record that is
linked to that Equipment record.
Asset Analysis Settings for TML Group records can be modified on an as-needed basis.
The analysis settings that are defined in a Corrosion Analysis Settings record will be used
to calculate fields in Asset Corrosion Analysis records that are linked to the same
Equipment or TML Group record. They are also used to populate fields in Thickness
Measurement Location records that are linked to the Equipment or TML Group record
and to determine values in the TML Corrosion Analysis records that are linked to those
Thickness Measurement Location records. Values that apply at the TML level can be
defined at the Equipment or TML Group level and customized at the TML level.
IMPORTANT: Analysis settings must be defined for each Equipment and TML Group
record before you can begin creating Thickness Measurement Location records of a given
TML Analysis Type and linking them to TML Group records.
About TML Analysis Settings

TML Analysis Settings let you choose options that will control how various values will
be calculated in the TML Corrosion Analysis record that is linked to a Thickness
Measurement Location record. TML Analysis Settings are stored in Corrosion Analysis
Settings records that are linked to Thickness Measurement Location records.
When you create a Thickness Measurement Location record, a Corrosion Analysis
Settings record is created automatically and linked to that Thickness Measurement
Location record. The Corrosion Analysis Settings record for a TML is created using the
analysis settings defined for the Equipment or TML Group record to which that
Thickness Measurement Location record is linked.
Most analysis settings are defined at the Equipment or TML Group level. A few settings,
however, can be defined at the TML level and apply to the specific Thickness
Measurement Location record for which they are defined. After a Corrosion Analysis
Settings record exists for a TML, you can modify the TML-specific analysis settings via
the TML Analysis Settings window.
Overview of Asset Corrosion Analyses

An Asset Corrosion Analysis record is created automatically and linked to an Equipment
record when you create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for that Equipment record.
In a TM Analysis that includes TML Group records, an Asset Corrosion Analysis record
will be created automatically and linked to any TML Group record that is included in the
TM Analysis. An Asset Corrosion Analysis record represents a summary of the
calculations that are stored in the TML Corrosion Analysis record for each Thickness
Measurement Location that is linked to that Equipment or TML Group record. By
viewing an Asset Corrosion Analysis record, you can analyze the overall corrosion of a
piece of equipment and make decisions about the actions that should be taken based upon
the analysis results.
An Asset Corrosion Analysis record represents:
An Equipment or TML Group record.

All the Thickness Measurement Location records of a given TML Analysis Type
(UT, RT, or TML) that are linked to the Equipment or TML Group record.
All the Thickness Measurement records that are linked to the Thickness
All the calculations that are performed based upon the values in the Thickness
Measurement Location records and the Thickness Measurement records.
Because the baseline Thickness Monitoring module supports the use of three TML
Analysis Types (UT, RT, and TML), each Equipment or TML Group record can have up
to three Asset Corrosion Analyses linked to it. The TML Analysis Types UT and RT are
provided for customers who want to classify TMLs according to measurement-collection
method (ultrasonic thickness or radiographic thickness) and then perform calculations on
each set of Thickness Measurement Location records. The TML Analysis Type TML is
provided for customers who do not want to classify Thickness Measurement Location
records according to measurement-collection method and instead prefer to analyze all
Thickness Measurement Location records together. Typically, you will use both UT and
RT or only TML; most customers will not use all three. Therefore, most Equipment or
TML Group records will have either one or two Asset Corrosion Analyses linked to them.
While you can view Asset Corrosion Analysis records in the Record Manager just like
you view any other record, Thickness Monitoring offers a customized view of analysis
records: the TM Analysis page. This page is designed to provide a summary of the
analysis and to provide access to other features associated with the analysis, such as plots.
We recommend that you use the Thickness Monitoring workflow to view and manage all
the records in a TM Analysis.
How Equipment-Level Analysis

Information Is Derived
In most cases, the values stored in the Asset Corrosion Analysis record represent
calculations that are performed for Thickness Measurement Location records (values that
are stored in the TML Corrosion Analysis record) that have been summarized for the
Equipment or TML Group record based upon settings defined for the analysis. For
example, you can specify in the Asset Analysis Settings whether you want the Asset
Controlling Corrosion Rate to be the maximum corrosion rate for all Thickness
Measurement Location records or an average of the corrosion rates that have been
calculated for the Thickness Measurement Location records.
In other words, Asset Corrosion Analysis values are typically not unique to the Asset
Corrosion Analysis itself but, rather, are representative of the calculations that have been
performed for the Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to that
Equipment or TML Group record.
In corrosion analyses that include both Equipment and TML Group records, the Asset
Corrosion Analysis record will contain information that is derived from the information
stored in the Asset Corrosion Analysis records for the Equipment records and the TML
Group record.
Consider, for example, a piping circuit that contains three piping lines where the
information for the piping circuit is stored in four records:
Equipment A - Piping Circuit

TML Group 1 - Piping Line 1
Additionally, assume that Thickness Measurement Location records exist for each TML
Group record, where each of those Thickness Measurement Location records has its own
TML Corrosion Analysis record. Each TML Group will have its own Asset Corrosion
Analysis record that stores summary information about the calculations stored in the
corresponding TML Corrosion Analysis records. In addition, the Equipment record will
also be linked to its own Asset Corrosion Analysis record that stores summary
information that is derived by evaluating the information in the Asset Corrosion Analysis
records that are linked to each TML Group record.
Accessing Thickness Monitoring

To access Thickness Monitoring:
On the Meridium APM Framework main menu, click Go To, point to Mechanical
Integrity, and then click Thickness Monitoring.
The Thickness Monitoring Functions page appears.
Aspects of the Thickness Monitoring

Functions Page
The Thickness Monitoring Functions page serves as the starting point for the tasks that
you can perform in Meridium APM Thickness Monitoring. You can access each task via a
link on the Thickness Monitoring Functions page. Note that the links on this page do not
suggest a recommended workflow but allow you to access certain features that you will
need to use as part of conducting a TM Analysis.
The following links are available on the Thickness Monitoring Functions page:
Corrosion Analysis Summary: Displays the Find Items window, where you can
perform a search to locate one or more Equipment or TML Group records and
view TM Analysis summary information on the TM Analysis page.
TMLs/Measurements: Displays the Find Items window, where you can perform a
search to locate one or more Equipment or TML Group records and view the
related Thickness Measurement Location and Thickness Measurement records on
the TM TMLs/Measurements page.
Measurement Data Entry: Displays the Find Items window, where you can
perform a search to locate one or more Equipment or TML Group records and
view the associated TM Measurement Data Entry page.
Bulk Analyze: Displays the Find Items window, where you can perform a search
to locate one or more Equipment or TML Group records for which you want to
perform a bulk analysis.
Datalogger: Displays the Select a Device and Properties dialog box, from which
you can send TM data to a device or receive TM data from a device.
Quick View: Displays the Find Items window, where you can perform a search to
locate one or more Equipment or TML Group records and open them on the TM
Quick View page.
T-min Calculator: Displays the Find Items window, where you can perform a
search to locate one or more Equipment or TML Group records and then open
them on the T-Min Calculations page.
Administrative Tasks: Displays the TM Administrative Tasks page, where you can
configure Thickness Monitoring preferences.
First-Time Deployment Workflow

Deploying and configuring the TM module for the first time includes completing multiple
steps, which are outlined in the table in this topic. The steps in this section of the
documentation provide all the information that you need to deploy and configure TM on
top of the basic Meridium APM system architecture.
Whether a step is required or optional is indicated in the Required/Optional cell. Steps
are marked as Required if you must perform the step to take advantage of TM
functionality.
The person responsible for completing each task may vary within your organization. We
recommend, however, that the steps be performed in relatively the same order in which
they are listed in the table.
Step Task
Required/Optional Notes
Install the supporting files for the
following devices on all of the
1
Optional
This step is necessary only if
Meridium APM Framework
you will use these devices to
machines that will connect to these
collect data that you transfer
devices:
to the Meridium APM
Krautkramer Branson DMS

Instrument
Krautkramer Branson
DMS2 Instrument
GE DMS Go
GE DMS Go+
Apply V3.6.0.4.0.
system.
Optional

you want to use the GE DMS
Go/DMS Go+ device to
collect data that you transfer
to the Meridium APM
system.
For more information, see
the V3.6.0.4.0 Release
Notes.
Review the TM data model to

determine which relationship
definitions you will need to modify
to include your custom equipment
families. Modify any relationship Optional
definitions as needed. Modify any
relationship definitions as needed
via the Configuration Manager
application.
This task is necessary only if

you store equipment
information in families other
than the baseline Equipment
and TML Group families.
Assign the desired Security Users

to one or more TM Security
Required
Groups via the Configuration
Manager application.
User must have permissions

to the TM families in order
to use the TM functionality.
Configure settings for the

Equipment and TML Group
families via the Meridium APM
Framework application.
Required
This task is necessary

regardless of whether or not
you follow the TM Best
Practice. If you do not follow
the TM Best Practice, you
must configure settings for
the families that will be used
to store equipment data in
Thickness Monitoring.
Configure global settings via the
Optional
Default reading preferences

application.
and Nominal T-Min

preferences exist in the
baseline Meridium APM
database. These will be used
if you do not define your
own. You can also define
additional, optional global
preferences that are not
defined in the baseline
Meridium APM database.
Configure the system to use

custom TML Types via the
Configuration Manager
application.
Optional
Default TML Types exist in

the baseline Meridium APM
database. You can define
additional TML Types to use
in your TM Analyses.
Grant the TM Technician role to

individuals responsible for taking
readings. You can accomplish this Optional
task using the Meridium APM
You can grant the TM

Technical role to individuals
for which Human Resource
records exist but Security
User records do not exists if
you want to specify their
names in the Measurement
Taken By field in Thickness
Modify the default color-coding

settings via the Meridium APM
Optional
Default color-coding settings

exist in the baseline
Meridium APM database.
These settings will be used if
you do not define your own.
10
Manage Thickness Monitoring

Rules Lookup records via the
application.
Optional
You can complete this task if

you want to view or modify
Thickness Monitoring Rules
Lookup records whose
values are used to perform
certain TM calculations.
11
Define additional fields that will Optional

be displayed in the header section
of the TM Measurement Data
Entry and TM Initial Measurement
Data Entry pages. You can
Default Thickness
Measurement fields are
displayed in the header
section of these pages in the
baseline Meridium APM
database. You can specify

that additional fields be
displayed in the header
section of these pages.
accomplish this task using the

application.
12
Disable the Auto Manage Tasks

setting via the Meridium APM
13
Assign additional fields to improve

bulk data measurement entry. You
can accomplish this task using the Optional
application.
None
Import PV Stress and Tank Stress

records using the Configuration
Optional
Manager application.
You can import the PV

Stress and Tank Stress
records that Meridium, Inc.
provides, or you can create
your own PV Stress and
Tank Stress records.
14
Optional

are using both the RBI and
the TM modules.
Upgrade Workflow
You can upgrade to V3.6.0.0.0 using the instructions that are provided in this section of
the documentation. To access these instructions, click the starting version from which you
are upgrading:
V3.5.1
V3.5.0 SP1 LP
V3.5.0
V3.4.5
Upgrading TM from V3.5.1 to V3.6.0.0.0

The following table lists the steps that are required to upgrade and configure Thickness
Monitoring for V3.6.0. These steps assume that you have completed the steps for
upgrading the components of the basic Meridium APM system architecture.
Step Task
Apply
V3.6.0.4.0.
This step is necessary only if you want to use the
GE DMS Go/DMS Go+ device to collect data that
you transfer to the Meridium APM system.
Optional
For more information, see the V3.6.0.4.0 Release
Notes.
Upgrading TM from V3.5.0 SP1 LP to

V3.6.0.0.0
Monitoring for V3.6.0. These steps assume that you have completed the steps for
upgrading the components of the basic Meridium APM system architecture.
Step Task
Apply
V3.6.0.4.0.
This step is necessary only if you want to use the
GE DMS Go/DMS Go+ device to collect data that
you transfer to the Meridium APM system.
Optional
For more information, see the V3.6.0.4.0 Release
Notes.
The following table lists the step that is required to upgrade and configure Thickness
Monitoring for V3.6.0.0.0. This step assumes that you have completed the steps for
upgrading the basic Meridium APM system architecture.
Step Task
Manually update TM Analyses for which you used
custom corrosion rates. To do so:
1
Optional
In previous
versions of
1. Locate the records that you will need to
Meridium
update by running the following query:
APM, if you
used custom
corrosion
SELECT [MI_EQUIP000].
rates in your
[MI_EQUIP000_EQUIP_ID_C] "Equipment ID",
TM
[MI_TMLGROUP].[MI_TMLGROUP_ID_C]
Analyses,
"TML Group ID", [MI Thickness Measurement
certain fields
Location].[MI_DP_ASSET_ID_CHR] "TML
in the
Asset ID", [MI Thickness Measurement Location].
associated
[MI_DP_ID_CHR] "TML ID", [MI TML
TML
Corrosion Analysis].[MI_TML_CA_A_CR_N]
Corrosion
"Custom Calculation A Corros", [MI TML
Analysis
Corrosion Analysis].[MI_TML_CA_B_CR_N]
records were
"Custom Calculation B Corros" FROM
populated
[MI_EQUIP000] JOIN_SUCC
with values
[MI_TMLGROUP] JOIN_SUCC [MI Thickness
using the unit
Measurement Location] JOIN_SUCC [MI TML
of measure
Corrosion Analysis] ON {MI Has Corrosion
(UOM)
Analyses} ON {MI Has Datapoints} ON
inches per
{MIR_HSTMLGP} WHERE ([MI TML
day instead
Corrosion Analysis].[MI_TML_CA_A_CR_N] >
of IN/YR
0 AND [MI TML Corrosion Analysis].
(TM) (i.e.,
[MI_TML_CA_B_CR_N] > 0)
inches per
year), which
is the UOM
that is
2. Use the Bulk Analyze tool to update TM
specified in
Analyses associated with the Equipment
the properties
and TML Group records returned by this
of the fields.
query.
In order to
correct this
Note that these instructions assume that you are
issue in
using the baseline Equipment and TML Group
existing
families. If you use custom equipment families,
records, you
you must replace the following values before
must perform
running the query in order to identify the records
this step to
requiring update:
MI_EQUIP000 and MI_TMLGROUP with

your custom family IDs.
MI_EQUIP000_EQUIP_ID_C and
MI_TMLGROUP_ID_C with the field IDs
used to identify these custom equipment
records.
Then, run the Bulk Analyze tool using your

custom records.
Apply V3.6.0.4.0.
Optional
manually
update TM
Analyses.
For more
information
about this
issue, see the
V3.5.1
Release
Notes.
This step is
necessary
only if you
want to use
the GE DMS
Go/DMS
Go+ device
to collect
data that you
transfer to
the Meridium
APM system.
For more
information,
see the
V3.6.0.4.0
Release
Notes.

Monitoring for V3.6.0.0.0. These steps assume that you have completed the steps for
upgrading the components in the basic Meridium APM system architecture.
Step Task
Update certain TM Analyses to correct TML
Corrosion Analysis records for which you
1
Optional
In previous
versions of
Meridium
APM, in
certain
circumstances,
TML
Corrosion
Analysis
records for
which you
performed
measurement
variance
evaluation
contained
incorrect
values in the
Short Term
Corrosion Rate
and Allowable
Measurement
Variance
Applied fields.
In order to
correct this
issue in
existing
records, you
must perform
this step to
manually
update TM
Analyses.
performed measurement variance evaluation prior

to V3.5.1. To do so:
update by creating a query that returns
TML Corrosion Analysis records whose:
Short Term Corrosion Rate field contains

the value 0 (zero).
Allowable Measurement Variance Applied

field is set to True.
2. Use the Bulk Analyze tool to update the

TM Analysis that is associated with every
TML Corrosion Analysis record returned
by the query you created in step 1.
Manually update TM Analyses for which you

used custom corrosion rates. To do so:
update by running the following query:
SELECT [MI_EQUIP000].
[MI_EQUIP000_EQUIP_ID_C] "Equipment ID",
[MI_TMLGROUP].[MI_TMLGROUP_ID_C]
"TML Group ID", [MI Thickness Measurement
Location].[MI_DP_ASSET_ID_CHR] "TML
Asset ID", [MI Thickness Measurement
Optional
In previous
versions of
Meridium
APM, if you
used custom
corrosion rates
in your TM
Analyses,
certain fields
in the
associated
Location].[MI_DP_ID_CHR] "TML ID", [MI

TML Corrosion Analysis].
[MI_TML_CA_A_CR_N] "Custom Calculation A
Corros", [MI TML Corrosion Analysis].
[MI_TML_CA_B_CR_N] "Custom Calculation B
Corros" FROM [MI_EQUIP000] JOIN_SUCC
[MI_TMLGROUP] JOIN_SUCC [MI Thickness
Measurement Location] JOIN_SUCC [MI TML
Corrosion Analysis] ON {MI Has Corrosion
Analyses} ON {MI Has Datapoints} ON
{MIR_HSTMLGP} WHERE ([MI TML
Corrosion Analysis].[MI_TML_CA_A_CR_N] >
0 AND [MI TML Corrosion Analysis].
[MI_TML_CA_B_CR_N] > 0)
TML
Corrosion
Analysis
records were
populated with
values using
the unit of
measure
(UOM) inches
per day instead
of IN/YR
(TM) (i.e.,
inches per
year), which is
the UOM that
is specified in
the properties
of the fields.
In order to
correct this
issue in
existing
records, you
must perform
this step to
manually
update TM
Analyses. For
more
information
about this
issue, see the
V3.5.1 Release
Notes.
2. Use the Bulk Analyze tool to update TM

Analyses associated with the Equipment
and TML Group records returned by this
query.
Note that these instructions assume that you are
using the baseline Equipment and TML Group
families. If you use custom equipment families,
you must replace the following values before
running the query in order to identify the records
requiring update:
MI_EQUIP000 and MI_TMLGROUP

with your custom family IDs.
MI_EQUIP000_EQUIP_ID_C and
MI_TMLGROUP_ID_C with the field
IDs used to identify these custom
equipment records.
Then, run the Bulk Analyze tool using your

custom records.
3
Apply V3.6.0.4.0.
Optional
This step is
necessary only
if you want to
use the GE
DMS Go/DMS
Go+ device to
collect data
that you
transfer to the
Meridium
APM system.
For more
information,
see the
V3.6.0.4.0
Release Notes.
Applying V3.6.0.4.0
Note: These steps assume that you have already applied V3.6.0.4.0 to the basic Meridium
APM system architecture.
Step Task
This step is necessary only if you want to use
the GE DMS Go/DMS Go+ device to collect
data that you transfer to the Meridium APM
system.
Install the
supporting files
for the GE DMS Optional
Go/DMS Go+
device.
If you are using a Citrix platform, to use the

devices listed, you must first install drivers for
the devices on your Citrix platform.
If you are deploying V3.6.0 for the first time,
you may have already completed this step.
Upgrade the
supporting
firmware for the
Required
GE DMS
Go/DMS Go+
device.
You can download the firmware update from

GE here:
http://www.gemcs.com/en/ultrasound/thickness-gauges/dmsgo.html
About Thickness Monitoring Security

Groups
Meridium APM provides the following baseline Security Groups for use with Thickness
Monitoring and provides baseline family-level privileges for these groups:
MI Thickness Monitoring Administrator

MI Thickness Monitoring Inspector
MI Thickness Monitoring User
Access to certain functions in the Meridium APM Framework application is determined

by membership in these Security Groups. Note that in addition to the baseline familylevel privileges that exist for these Security Groups, users will also need at least View
privileges for all customer-defined predecessor or successor families that participate in
the Thickness Monitoring relationships. Keep in mind that:
Users who will need to create new records in TM will need Insert privileges to
these families.
Users who will need to modify records will need Update privileges to these
families.
Any user who should be allowed to delete TM records will need Delete privileges
to these families.
The following table summarizes the functional privileges associated with each group.
Function
Can be done by
Can be done by
members of the MI
members of the MI
Thickness
Thickness Monitoring
Monitoring
Administrator Group?
Inspector Group?
Can be done by
members of the MI
Thickness
Monitoring User
Group?
Configure
Global
Preferences
Yes
No
No
Configure
Family
Preferences
Yes
No
No
Use the T-Min

Calculator
No
Yes
No
Archive
Corrosion Rates
No
Yes
No
Reset the
Maximum
Historical
Corrosion Rate
Yes
No
No
Exclude TMLs
No
Yes
No
Renew TMLs
No
Yes
No
Reset User
Preferences
Yes
No
No
Set ColorCoding
Preferences
Yes
No
No
Note: If the Risk Based Inspection license is active and you use TM Analysis values to
calculate corrosion rate values used in RBI, RBI users who are responsible for
completing the steps necessary to use TM Analysis values to calculate RBI corrosion
rates or who should be able to navigate to the TM module via the RBI module must be a
member of at least one TM Security Group.
Thickness Monitoring Security Groups

The baseline Meridium APM database contains three Security Groups specifically for
Thickness Monitoring:
MI Thickness Monitoring Administrator

MI Thickness Monitoring Inspector
MI Thickness Monitoring User
The following table lists the baseline family-level privileges that exist for these Security
Groups.
MI Thickness
Monitoring
Administrator
MI Thickness
Monitoring
Inspector
MI Thickness
Monitoring User
Corrosion
View, Update, Insert
View, Update,
Insert
View, Update,
Insert
Datapoint
View, Update,
Insert
View, Update,
Insert
Datapoint Measurement
View, Update, Insert, View, Update,

Delete
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert
Equipment
View
View
View
Human Resource
View, Update, Insert,

View
Delete
View
Inspection Task
None
View, Update
None
None
View
Meridium Reference
Tables

View
Delete
View
Resource Role

View
Delete
View
Security Group
View
View
View
Security User
View
View
View
Settings
View, Update,
Insert
View
Task Execution
View, Insert
View, Insert
None
Task

Delete
Insert
View, Update,
Insert
TML Group
View
Family
Entity Family
Materials of Construction None
Delete
Insert, Delete
Relationship Family
Belongs to a Unit

Delete
Insert
View, Update,
Insert
Equipment Has Equipment View
View
View
Group Assignment
View
View
View
Has Archived Corrosion

Analyses

Delete
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has Archived Corrosion

Analysis Settings

Delete
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has Archived
Subcomponent Analysis
Settings

Delete
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has Archived
Subcomponent Corrosion
Delete
Insert, Delete
Analyses
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has Corrosion Analyses

Delete
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has Corrosion Analysis

Settings

Delete
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has Datapoints

Delete
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has Measurements

Delete
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has Roles

View
Delete
View
Has Task Execution
View, Insert
View, Insert
None
Has Task Revision
View, Insert
View, Insert
None
Has Tasks
View, Insert
View, Insert
View, Insert
Has TML Group

Delete
Insert, Delete
View
Is a User
View
View
View
User Assignment
View
View
View
About Importing PV Stress Records

The Thickness Monitoring (TM) module uses values in PV Stress records when you
create Thickness Measurement Location records and define the Allowable Stress value.
The baseline database does not, however, contain any PV Stress records. If desired, you
can import them using the Import/Export Metadata Tool. The records are provided in a
set of XML files, which are available on the Meridium APM Application Server machine.
You are not required to import the PV Stress records that Meridium, Inc. provides. If you
are upgrading from a previous version of Meridium APM in which you created PV Stress
records manually, you might choose not to import the records that are distributed by
Meridium, Inc. so that you can maintain your existing records and their values.
If you choose to import the PV Stress records that are provided by Meridium, Inc. and
your database already contains PV Stress records, the import procedure will update
existing records if they contain the same values as the Meridium APM records in the
following fields:
Design Code
Code Year
Material Specification
Material Grade
Metal Temperature
For example, suppose that your database contains a PV Stress record with the following
field values:
Design Code: Section VIII Div 1
Code Year: 1998
Material Specification: SA/CSA-G40
Material Grade: 38W
Metal Temperature: -20
Minimum Tensile Strength: 40
One of the XML files contains a PV Stress record with the following field values, where
the values in blue match those in your existing record:
Design Code: Section VIII Div 1

Code Year: 1998
Material Specification: SA/CSA-G40
Material Grade: 38W
Metal Temperature: -20
In this case, although the value in the Minimum Tensile Strength field in your PV Stress
record does not match the value in the Meridium APM PV Stress record, this record
would be updated during the import procedure. So, after the import procedure is
complete, the updated PV Stress record would contain the value 45 instead of 40 in the
Minimum Tensile Strength field.
If any of your existing PV Stress records are updated during the import procedure,
existing Thickness Measurement Location records will not be updated. If needed, you can
update them manually.
If you have existing PV Stress records, the decision to import the Meridium APM PV
Stress records should be made only after you have carefully evaluated your existing
records. The Meridium APM documentation does not provide a list of the values that will
exist in the PV Stress records that will be imported. You may need to work with your
Meridium, Inc. representative to make an informed decision.
Note: The values in the Meridium APM PV Stress records adhere to the American
Petroleum Institute API-650 (storage tanks), ASME Section II Part D tables 1A and 1B
(pressure vessels), and the ASME B31.3 (piping circuits) specifications.
About Importing Tank Stress Records

The Thickness Monitoring (TM) module uses values in Tank Stress records when you
create Thickness Measurement Location records and define the Allowable Stress value.
The baseline database does not, however, contain any Tank Stress records. If desired, you
can import them using the Import/Export Metadata Tool. The records are provided in a
set of XML files, which are available on the Meridium APM Application Server machine.
You are not required to import the Tank Stress records that Meridium, Inc. provides. If
you are upgrading from a previous version of Meridium APM in which you created Tank
Stress records manually, you might choose not to import the records that are distributed
by Meridium, Inc. so that you can maintain your existing records and their values.
If you choose to import the Tank Stress records that are provided by Meridium, Inc. and
your database already contains Tank Stress records, the import procedure will update
existing records if they contain the same values as the Meridium APM records in the
following fields:
Design Code
Code Year
Allowable Stress
Minimum Tensile Strength
Minimum Yield Strength
For example, suppose that your database contains a Tank Stress record with the following
field values:
Material Grade: C
Material Specification: A10
Design Code: API 650
Code Year: 2008
Allowable Stress: 23600
Minimum Yield Strength: 30000
The XML file contains a Tank Stress record with the following field values, where the
values in blue match those in your existing record:
Material Grade: None. This value is not populated in the imported Tank Stress
records.
Material Specification: A10
Design Code: API 650
Code Year: 2008
Allowable Stress: 23600
Minimum Yield Strength: 30000
In this case, although the value in the Material Grade field in your Tank Stress record is
different than the value in the Meridium APM PV Stress record (which is null), this
record would be updated during the import procedure. So, after the import procedure is
complete, the updated Tank Stress record would not contain a value in the Material Grade
field.
If any of your existing Tank Stress records are updated during the import procedure,
existing Thickness Measurement Location records will not be updated. If needed, you can
update them manually.
If you have existing Tank Stress records, the decision to import the Meridium APM Tank
Stress records should be made only after you have carefully evaluated your existing
records. The Meridium APM documentation does not provide a list of the values that will
exist in the Tank Stress records that will be imported. You may need to work with your
Meridium, Inc. representative to make an informed decision.
Note: The values in the Meridium APM Tank Stress records adhere to the American
Petroleum Institute API-650 (storage tanks) specifications.
Performing the Import Procedure
The baseline database does not contain any PV Stress or Tank Stress records. You can
import them, however, using the Import/Export Metadata Tool. The records are provided
in a set of XML files, which are available on the Meridium APM Application Server
machine. The following instructions for importing these files assume that you have
already installed the Meridium APM Application Server software.
To import PV Stress and Tank Stress records:
1. Using the Import/Export Metadata window, navigate to the following location on
the Meridium APM Application Server machine:
C:\Meridium\DbUpg\Versions\<database version>\_IEU_ManualImports\Stress
Records, where <database version> is the database version that is currently
installed.
2. Import the XML files, one at a time. You can import them in any order.
The files are imported, and the appropriate PV Stress and Tank Stress records are created.
Using Custom TML Analysis Types

The baseline Meridium APM database includes the Thickness Measurement Location
family, which contains the TML Analysis Type field. This field is used to classify TMLs
based upon the collection method that will be used for recording Thickness
Measurements at that location.
The TML Analysis Type field contains a list of values that is populated with the
Corrosion Inspection Type values from all Corrosion Analysis Settings records that are
associated with the Equipment or TML Group record to which the Thickness
Measurement Location record is linked.
The values that are used to populate the Corrosion Inspection Type field in the Corrosion
Analysis Settings family are stored in the System Code Table CITP (Corrosion
Inspection Type). In the baseline Meridium APM database, this table contains three
System Codes: UT, RT, and TML. You can only create Thickness Measurement Location
records with a given TML Analysis Type value if an associated Corrosion Analysis
Settings record contains the same value in the Corrosion Inspection Type field.
Using the baseline functionality, you can separate TM Analysis calculations into groups
based upon TML Analysis Type. If you want to use this functionality, you will want to
classify your TMLs as UT (measurements collected using ultrasonic thickness) or RT
(measurements collected using radiographic thickness). This separation will be desirable

for some implementations. Other implementations will prefer not to separate TMLs
according to collection method and instead perform calculations on the entire group of
TMLs that exists for a piece of equipment. For these implementations, you will want to
classify all TMLs using the TML Analysis Type TML.
Depending upon your preferred implementation, you may choose to make one or more of
the following changes to the System Code Table CITP (Corrosion Inspection Type):
Add System Codes if you want to classify TMLs using methods in addition to UT
and RT.
Delete System Codes that you do not want to use.
Modify the IDs and descriptions of the System Codes so that the classification
options are more intuitive to your users.
If you make changes to this System Code Table, keep in mind that the analysis types that
are stored in the System Code Table CITP (Corrosion Inspection Type) will be used when
you create Corrosion Analysis Settings records, and therefore, will determine the analysis
types for which you can create Thickness Measurement Location records.
Additionally, in Thickness Measurement Location records, the TML Analysis Type field
has a baseline Default Value rule that is coded to present UT as the default value when
you have defined the UT TML Analysis Type in your TM Analysis (i.e., you have created
a Corrosion Analysis Settings record with a Corrosion Inspection Type of UT). You could
modify this rule if, for example, you wanted RT to be presented as the default value when
you have defined the RT TML Analysis Type in your TM Analysis (i.e., you have created
a Corrosion Analysis Settings record with a Corrosion Inspection Type of RT). To do this,
you would modify the MI_TML_TYPE_CHR class as follows:
<MetadataField("MI_TML_TYPE_CHR")> _
Public Class MI_TML_TYPE_CHR
Inherits Baseline.MI_Thickness_Measurement_Location.MI_TML_TYPE_CHR
Public Sub New(ByVal record As Meridium.Core.DataManager.DataRecord, ByVal field
As Meridium.Core.DataManager.DataField)
MyBase.New(record, field)
End Sub
Public Overrides Function GetDefaultInitialValue() As Object
Return CStr("RT")
End Function
End Class
For more information on customizing baseline rules, click here.
Accessing the TM Administrative Tasks

Page
The TM Administrative Tasks page displays links to pages where you can perform certain
administrative tasks for Thickness Monitoring.
Note: To perform administrative tasks, you must be a Super User or a member of the MI
Thickness Monitoring Administrator Security Group.
To access the TM Administrative Tasks page:
In the Meridium APM Framework, on the Thickness Monitoring Functions page,

click the Administrative Tasks link.
The TM Administrative Tasks page appears.
Aspects of the TM Administrative Tasks

Page
The TM Administrative Tasks page displays links to pages where you can perform
administrative tasks for Thickness Monitoring.
The following links are displayed on the TM Administrative Tasks page:
Family Preferences: Displays the Asset Family Selection dialog box, where you
can select the Equipment, TML Group, or other families that you use to store
equipment or component data, and then configure settings for that family on the
Asset Family Preferences page.
Global Preferences: Displays the Global Preferences page, where you can
configure settings that apply throughout Thickness Monitoring.
Reset User Preferences: Displays the Reset User Preferences page, where you can
reset grid preferences for one or more Security Users.
Color-Coding Preferences: Displays the TM Color-Coding Preferences page,

where you can change the color-coding settings for Thickness Monitoring.
Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup: Displays the Bulk Data Form page, where
you can view and manage all the Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup records
that exist in the database.
Common Measurement Data Field Mappings: Displays the Common

Measurement Data Field Mappings page, where you can define which Thickness
Measurement fields will appear in the Common Measurement section of the TM
Initial Measurement Data Entry page and the TM Measurement Data Entry page.
About Asset Settings

You will use the Asset Family Preferences page to define settings for families that are
used in Thickness Monitoring.
If you follow the TM Best Practice, you can define settings for the Equipment or TML
Group families via this page. If you do not follow the TM Best Practice, you can define
settings for families that store equipment or component data. Regardless of whether or
not you follow the TM Best Practice, these settings must be configured at the level where
records will actually be stored.
The settings that you define on the Asset Family Preferences page will define the field in
the following records that will be used to populate the following fields in Thickness
Measurement Location and Thickness Monitoring Task records in your TM Analysis.
If you follow the TM Best Practice, these settings will determine the field in the
Equipment or TML Group record that should be used to:
Populate the TML Asset ID field in the Thickness Measurement Location

records that are linked to Equipment or TML Group records.
Populate the Task ID field in Thickness Monitoring Task records that are
created automatically and linked to Equipment or TML Group records.
If you do not follow the TM Best Practice, these settings will determine field in
the record stores equipment or component data that should be used to:
Populate the TML Asset ID field in the Thickness Measurement Location

records that are linked to records that store equipment or component data.
Populate the Task ID field in Thickness Monitoring Task records that are
created automatically and linked to records that store equipment or
component data.
Additionally, if your TM Analyses will contain TML Group records or other records that
store component data, you will also need to define the relationship between certain
families via the Asset Family Preferences page.
If you follow the TM Best Practice, you should define the relationship between
the Equipment family and the TML Group family via this page.
If you do not follow the TM Best Practice, you should define the relationship
between the family that stores equipment data and the family that stores
component data via this page.
Accessing the Asset Family Preferences

Page
The Asset Family Preferences page lets you configure settings for the Equipment or TML
Group families, or any other family that you use to store equipment or component data.
To access the Asset Family Preferences page, you will need to select the family for which
you want to configure settings. Each instance of the Asset Family Preferences page is
specific to one family and allows you to configure settings for that specific family. You
will need to access the Asset Family Preferences page multiple times if you want to
configure settings for more than one family.
Note: To configure Asset settings, you must be a Super User or a member of the MI
Thickness Monitoring Administrator Security Group.
To access the Asset Family Preferences page:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the TM Administrative Tasks page.
2. Click the Family Preferences link.
The Asset Family Selection dialog box appears.
3. In the list, select the family whose settings you want to configure.
4. Click OK.
The Asset Family Preferences page appears. The following image shows the Asset
Family Preferences page when assessed for the Equipment family.
Overview of the Asset Family

Preferences Page
On the Asset Family Preferences page, you can change the settings that apply to the
Equipment or TML Group families, or any other family that you use to store equipment
or component data.
The Asset Family Preferences page contains the following items:
Subcomponent Relationship area: Contains options that allow you to specify the
relationship definition that is used to link families that are used in Thickness
Monitoring. If you follow the TM Best Practice, in the Subcomponent
Relationship area, you should specify the Has TML Group relationship definition
that is used to link Equipment and TML Group records. If you do not follow the
TM Best Practice, in the Subcomponent Relationship area, you should specify the
relationship definitions that link records that store equipment data and records that
store component data.
In the Subcomponent Relationship area, you can define the:
Asset-to-Subcomponent Relationship
Subcomponent to Asset Relationship
Component ID Field area: Contains the Component ID Field list, where you can
define the fields in records that are used to populate fields in Thickness
Measurement Location and Thickness Monitoring Task records in your TM
Analysis.
Task menu pane: Contains task menus that provide you with quick access to
functions that are available on the Asset Family Preferences page. The following
task menus are available on the Asset Family Preferences page:
Preference Tasks
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Preference Tasks
The Preferences Tasks menu on the Asset Family Preferences page contains the following
links:
Pick Another Family: Displays the Asset Family Selection dialog box, where you
can select a family for which to configure settings.
Reload: Populates the cells on the Asset Family Preferences page with the settings
that were last saved for the family for which you accessed the Asset Family
Preferences page.
Save: Saves any changes that you have made on the Asset Family Preferences
page.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Asset Family Preferences page contains the following
links:
Print: This link is always disabled on the Asset Family Preferences page.
Send To: Displays a submenu with options that let you provide a link to the
current page on your desktop (create shortcut), in an email message, or on a Home
Page.
Documents: This link is always disabled on the Asset Family Preferences page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the Asset Family Preferences
page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the Asset Family Preferences page does not display any
links. It is not possible to configure the Associated Pages menu to display links on the
Asset Family Preferences page.
About Subcomponent Relationship

Settings
If your TM Analysis includes TML Group records or other records that store component
data, you will need to define Subcomponent Relationship settings for certain families.
These settings determine which records the Meridium APM system will include in a TM
Analysis and which families will be included in the configured explorers that are used
throughout Thickness Monitoring.
Note: The TM Best Practice assumes that your TM Analyses include TML Group
records.
For example, if your TM Analysis contains TML Group records, and you are analyzing a
piping circuit that contains three piping lines, you would store information for the piping
circuit in the following four records:
Equipment (piping circuit)

TML Group (piping line 1)
In this case, the TML Group records would be linked to the Equipment record through the
Has TML Group relationship that is defined for the purpose of linking TML Group
records to Equipment records.
Continuing with the example, if you do not use TML Group records (i.e., you do not
follow the TM Best Practice), but your TM Analysis contains records that store
component data, and you are analyzing the same piping circuit, you would store
information in four records, one that stores equipment data and three that store
component data. In this case, you would need to specify the relationship that links the
records that store equipment data to the records that store component data.
The Subcomponent Relationship section on the Asset Family Preferences page contains
the following lists that allow you to define these settings.
Asset-to-Subcomponent Relationship: Specifies the relationship family that

links certain records used in a TM Analysis, depending upon whether or not you
follow the TM Best Practice.
If you follow the TM Best Practice, your selection in this list specifies
how Equipment records will be linked to TML Group records. You should
select Has TML Group in this list.
If you do not follow the TM Best Practice, your selection in this list
specifies how records that store equipment data will be linked to records
that store component data.
The following image shows an example of the Subcomponent Relationship setting

defined for the Equipment family, according to the TM Best Practice.
If a component represented by a TML Group record or another record that stores

component data can contain additional components in a multi-tier record hierarchy, this
setting should also be defined for TML Group family or the family that stores component
data.
Subcomponent-to-Asset Relationship: Specifies the relationship family that links

certain records used in a TM Analysis, depending upon whether or not you follow
the TM Best Practice.
If you follow the TM Best Practice, your selection in this list specifies
how TML Group records will be linked to Equipment records. You should
select Has TML Group in this list.
If you do not follow the TM Best Practice, your selection in this list
specifies how records that store component data will be linked to records
that store equipment data.
The following image shows an example of the Subcomponent Relationship setting

defined for the TML Group family, according to the TM Best Practice.
Defining the Asset-to-Subcomponent

Relationship
Your selection in the Asset-to-Subcomponent Relationship list in the Subcomponent
Relationship section on the Asset Family Preferences page specifies the relationship
family that is used to link certain records in your TM Analyses, depending upon whether
or not you follow the TM Best Practice.
If you follow the TM Best Practice, your selection in this list specifies how
Equipment records will be linked to TML Group records. You should select Has
TML Group in this list.
If you do not follow the TM Best Practice, your selection in this list specifies how
records that store equipment data will be linked to records that store component
data.
To define the Asset-to-Subcomponent relationship:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the Asset Family Preferences page for
the family for which you want to specify the Asset-to-Subcomponent relationship.
2. In the Subcomponent Relationship section, in the Asset-to-Subcomponent
Relationship list, select the relationship definition that should be used to link the
given families. The following image shows an example of this setting for the
Equipment family, according to the TM Best Practice.
3. On the Preferences Tasks menu, click the Save link.

The relationship family setting is saved for the family for which you accessed the Asset
Family Preferences page.
Defining the Subcomponent to Asset

Relationship
Your selection in the Subcomponent-to-Asset Relationship list in the Subcomponent
Relationship section on the Asset Family Preferences page specifies the relationship
family that is used to link certain records used in a TM Analysis, depending upon whether
or not you follow the TM Best Practice.
If you follow the TM Best Practice, your selection in this list specifies how TML
Group records will be linked to Equipment records. You should select Has TML
Group in this list.
If you do not follow the TM Best Practice, your selection in this list specifies how
records that store component data will be linked to records that store equipment
data.
To define the Subcomponent-to-Asset relationship:

the family for which you want to specify the Subcomonent-to-Asset Relationship.
2. In the Subcomponent Relationship section, in the Subcomponent-to-Asset
Relationship list, select the relationship definition that should be used to link the
given families. The following image shows an example of this setting for the
TML Group family, according to the TM Best Practice.

The relationship family setting is saved for the family for which you accessed the Asset
Defining the Component ID Field

Setting
When you create a Thickness Measurement Location record, the Meridium APM system
executes a rule to populate the TML Asset ID field in the Thickness Measurement
Location record. For this rule to work properly, the Meridium APM system must know
which field in which record to use. The field in the record that is used depends upon the
Component ID Field setting.
If you follow the TM Best Practice, the TML Asset ID field is populated with the
value specified by the Component ID Field setting in the Equipment or TML
Group record to which the Thickness Measurement Location record is directly
linked.
If you do not follow the TM Best Practice, the TML Asset ID field is populated
with the value specified by the Component ID Field setting in the record that
stores equipment or component data to which the Thickness Measurement
Location is directly linked.
In addition, if you specify via the Global Preferences page that you want the Meridium
APM system to create and update Thickness Monitoring Task records automatically, the
Task ID of those Thickness Monitoring Task records will be populated with the value
<Task Type> - <Component ID>, where <Task Type> is the Task Type in the Thickness
Monitoring Task record and <Component ID> is the value in the Component ID Field
setting.
Whether or not you follow the TM Best Practice, and whether or not your TM Analyses
contain TML Group records or other records that store component data will determine the
families for which you should configure the Component ID Field setting.
If you follow the TM Best Practice, and your TM Analyses:
Include TML Group records, you should define these settings for the
Equipment and TML Group families. The following table lists the fields in
the Equipment and TML Group families that you should specify when
defining this setting, and the fields in the records that will be populated
with these values.
For this
family:
...you should select this

field in Component ID
...the following fields in
Field list. The value in
the following records:
this field will be used to
populate the value in...
Equipment Equipment ID
TML
Group
TML Group ID
The Task ID field in

Task records that are
linked directly to
Equipment records.
The Task ID field in
Task records that are
linked directly to TML
Group records.
The TML Asset ID field
in Thickness
Measurement Location
records that are linked to
TML Group records.
Do not include TML Group records, you should define these settings for
the Equipment family only. Specifically, you should select Equipment ID
in the Component ID Field list. With this configuration, the value in the
Equipment ID field in Equipment records will be used to populate the
value in the TML Asset ID field in associated Thickness Measurement
Location records, and the Task ID field in associated Thickness
Monitoring Task records.
If you do not follow the TM Best Practice and your TM Analyses:
Contain records that store component data, you should configure the
Component ID Field setting for the family that stores equipment data and
the family that stores component data. With this configuration:
o
o
The Task ID field in Thickness Monitoring Task records that are

linked directly to records that store equipment data will be
populated with the value in the field specified by the Component
ID Field setting for the family whose records store equipment data.
The Task ID field in Thickness Monitoring Task records, and the
TML Asset ID field in Thickness Measurement Location records
that are linked directly to records that store component data will be
populated with the value in the field specified by the Component
ID Field setting for the family whose records store component
data.
Do not contain records that store component data, you should configure
the Component ID Field setting for the family that stores equipment data
only. With this configuration, the TML Asset ID field in associated
Thickness Measurement Location records, and the Task ID field in
associated Thickness Monitoring Task records will be populated with the
value in the specified field in the record that stores equipment data.
Note that:
The Component ID Field setting must be defined before you can create Thickness
Measurement Location or define Asset Corrosion Analysis Settings for Equipment
or TML Group records, or the records that store equipment or component data. If
this setting is not defined for these families, when you try to create a Thickness
Measurement Location record or a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for one of
these records, a message appears, indicating that the Component ID Field setting
has not been configured.
The Component ID setting must also be defined before Meridium APM can create
Thickness Monitoring Task records automatically for Thickness Measurement
Location records.
To define the Component ID Field setting:

the family whose Component ID Field setting you want to define.
2. In the Component ID Field area, in the Component ID Field list, select the field
that will be used to populate the TML Asset ID field in Thickness Measurement
Location records and the Task ID field in Thickness Monitoring Task records that
are linked directly to the record in the family for which you accessed the Asset
Family Preferences page. The list contains all the fields defined for the current
family. In the following image, the Asset Family Preferences page has been
accessed for the Equipment family, and Equipment ID has been selected in the
Component ID Field list.
3. On the Preference Tasks menu, click the Save link.

The Component ID Field setting is saved for the family for which you accessed the Asset
Reloading Family Preferences

After you have made changes to the settings on the Asset Family Preferences page, you
can reload the settings to restore the most recently saved values.
To reload family preferences:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the Asset Family Preferences page.
2. On the Preference Tasks menu, click the Reload link.
The family settings revert back to their most recently saved values.
Accessing the Global Preferences Page

You can use the Global Preferences page to configure settings that will be used
throughout Thickness Monitoring.
To access the Global Preferences page:

2. Click the Global Preferences link.
The Global Preferences page appears.
Overview of the Global Preferences

Page
The Global Preferences page lets you configure settings that apply throughout Thickness
Monitoring. The Global Preferences page consists of the following items:
T-Min Calculator Preferences section: Contains the Use Interpolation for Stress
Reference Tables check box, where you can choose whether or not to use
interpolation for Stress Reference Tables.
Tasks Setting section: Contains the Auto Manage Tasks check box, where you can
define the auto manage tasks setting.
Custom Corrosion Rate Options section: Contains options that let you define
settings for using custom corrosion rate calculations.
Readings Preferences section: Contains options that let you determine how the
Meridium APM system will handle values that are entered into the Readings field
in Thickness Measurement records.
Nominal T-Min Preferences section: Contains a list of fields that exist in the
Piping Nominal T-Min family that you can specify to be used for retrieving the
Nominal T-Min value for Thickness Measurement Location records that are
linked to Equipment or TML Group records that represent pipes, or records that
store equipment or component data for pipes.
Measurement Preferences section: Contains the following check boxes:

o Allow Measurements to be Skipped: You can select this check box if you
want to create Measurement Not Taken records and use them in your TM
Analyses.
o
Allow Consecutive Skipped Measurements: If you selected the Allow

Measurements to be Skipped check box, you can optionally select this
check box to create back-to-back Measurement Not Taken records.
The Meridium APM recommended best practice for Thickness Monitoring is to not create
and use Measurement Not Taken records in your TM Analyses. These check boxes are
cleared by default.
functions that are available on the Global Preferences page. The following task
menus are available on the Global Preferences page:
Preference Tasks
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Preference Tasks
The Preferences Tasks menu on the Global Preferences page contains the following links:
Pick Another Family: This link is always disabled on the Global Preferences
page.
Reload: Updates the settings on the Global Preferences page with the values that
were last saved.
Save: Saves any changes that you have made on the Global Preferences page.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Global Preferences page contains the following links:
Print: This link is always disabled on the Global Preferences page.

Page.
Documents: This link is disabled on the Global Preferences page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the Global Preferences page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the Global Preferences page does not display any links. It
is not possible to configure the Associated Pages menu to display links on the Global
Preferences page.
Choosing Whether to Use Interpolation

for Allowable Stress
Meridium APM uses reference tables to look up the Allowable Stress values for
performing T-Min calculations and for calculating Maximum Allowable Working
Pressure. You have two choices regarding how the stress reference tables will be used to
determine Allowable Stress when an exact match cannot be found:
You can specify that the lowest temperature in the established range should be
used.
You can specify that Meridium APM should use linear interpolation to determine
the Allowable Stress.
To specify whether or not you want to use interpolation for retrieving Allowable Stress
values:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the Global Preferences page.
2. In the T-Min Calculator Preferences section, select the Use Interpolation for
Stress Reference Tables check box if you want to enable the use of interpolation.
Hint: You can clear the check box if you want to disable the use of interpolation.
The interpolation setting is saved, along with any other changes you have made to the
preferences on the Global Preferences page.
About the Auto Manage Tasks Setting

Thickness Monitoring Task records will be created automatically when you create a
Corrosion Analysis Settings record for an Equipment or TML Group record, or a record
that stores equipment or component data in a TM Analysis. The Meridium APM system
provides an option that allows Thickness Monitoring Task records to be updated
automatically when you make changes to a Thickness Measurement Location record.
The Auto Manage Tasks setting is disabled by default. If the Risk Based Inspection
license is active, you should accept the default setting because you will use the Task
records generated from RBI, rather than TM, to determine your inspection intervals. If
the Risk Based Inspection license is not active, you should enable the Auto Manage Tasks
setting.
Note: The Meridium APM system will create and update Thickness Monitoring Task
records automatically only if the Component ID setting is defined for family to which the
Thickness Measurement Location record is directly linked. If this setting is not defined,
an error message will appear when the Meridium APM system attempts to create the
Thickness Monitoring Task record.
Defining the Auto Manage Tasks Setting

To specify that you want the Meridium APM system to manage Thickness Monitoring
Task records automatically:
2. In the Tasks Setting section, select the Auto Manage Tasks check box.
Hint: You can clear the check box if you want to disable this functionality.
The setting is saved along with any other changes you have made to the settings on the
Global Preferences page.
Thickness Monitoring Task Fields

Updated Automatically by the Auto
Manage Tasks Setting
When the Auto Manage Tasks setting is enabled, the following fields in Thickness
Monitoring Task records will be updated when you make changes to a Thickness
Measurement Location record. The following list is not comprehensive.
Last Date: The value in the Last Date field is populated with the most recent
measurement date that is associated with the first Thickness Measurement
Location record referenced in the NID TMLs field in the associated Asset
Corrosion Analysis record.
For example, if the NID TMLs field contained the Entity Keys of the following
Thickness Measurement Location records in the following order, the most recent
measurement date (value in the Measurement Taken Date field in the linked Thickness
Measurement records) associated with TML 03 would be used to populate the Last Date
field in the Thickness Monitoring Task record:
TML 03
TML 14
TML 01
Desired Interval: The value in the Desired Interval field is populated with the
difference, in days, between the values in the Next Date and Last Date fields in
the Thickness Monitoring Task record.
For example, if the value in the Next Date field is 9/5/2038 and the value in the Last Date
field is 3/6/2012, the Desired Interval field would be populated with the value 9,679.
About Custom TML Corrosion Rates

The baseline Thickness Monitoring product includes several baseline TML-level
corrosion rates that you can choose to calculate for TML Corrosion Analyses. In addition
to using these baseline corrosion rates, you can optionally define custom corrosion rate
calculations to use within Thickness Monitoring. Using the options on the Global
Preferences page, you can define up to two custom calculations.
Before you can enable the use of custom corrosion rates, you must first create rules that
define those corrosion rates. Rules can be defined in the Rules Library in the
Configuration Manager application. This documentation assumes that the necessary rules
have already been defined.
When custom TML corrosion rate settings have been defined, you will see various
changes throughout Thickness Monitoring with respect to the baseline product where
custom corrosion rates are not enabled.
What Happens When Custom Corrosion

Rate Calculations Are in Use?
When custom TML corrosion rates are in place, you will see various changes throughout
Thickness Monitoring with respect to the baseline TM product.
Analysis Settings
When custom corrosion rate calculations are defined, they will appear in the Corrosion
Rate Options section of the Asset Analysis Settings window. For example, in the
following image, the calculations Custom Corrosion Rate A and Custom Corrosion Rate
B have been defined. The labels that you define for the custom calculations via the TM
global preferences will be displayed on the Asset Analysis Settings window.
Custom corrosion rate options will also appear on the TML Analysis Settings window.
These options are disabled on the TML Analysis Settings window because these options
are not defined at the TML-level.
TML Corrosion Analysis Record

When custom corrosion rate calculations have been defined, and the associated Corrosion
Analysis Settings record specifies that they should be calculated, the following fields will
be populated in all TML Corrosion Analysis records that are associated with that
Equipment or TML Group record, or the record that stores equipment or component data:
Custom Calculation A Corrosion Rate

Custom Calculation A Loss
Custom Calculation B Corrosion Rate
Custom Calculation B Loss
These fields always exist in TML Corrosion Analysis records and are included by default
on the TML Analysis datasheet.
You can remove these fields from the datasheet via the Configuration Manager
application if you do not plan to use custom corrosion rate calculations. If you do plan to
use custom calculations, you can modify the baseline field and datasheet captions to
correspond to the labels that you have defined in the global preferences. The labels that
you define via the global preferences will not be applied to the family field and datasheet
captions automatically.
TML Analysis Plots

When custom corrosion rate calculations have been defined, and the associated Corrosion
Analysis Settings record specify that they should be calculated, the custom corrosion
rates will be displayed on the TML Analysis Plot page, except when:
The values in the Custom Calculation A Corrosion Rate and Custom Calculation
B Corrosion Rate fields are set to 0, and the value in the Minimum Corrosion Rate
field in the TML Analysis Settings record is set to 0. In this case, no corrosion rate
line will be displayed.
The value in one Custom Calculation Corrosion Rate field is set to 0, the other
Custom Calculation Corrosion Rate field is set to a value greater than 0, and the
value in the Minimum Corrosion Rate field in the TML Analysis Settings record
is set to 0. In this case, only the corrosion rate line corresponding to the Custom
Calculation Corrosion Rate with a non-zero value will be plotted. For example, if
you set the value in the Custom Calculation A Corrosion Rate field to 0 and the
Custom Calculation B Corrosion Rate field to any value greater than 0, and
assuming the Minimum Corrosion Rate field in the linked TML Analysis Settings
record is set to 0, then only one corrosion rate line, corresponding to the value in
Custom Calculation B Corrosion Rate, will be plotted.
Points corresponding to measurements will be plotted regardless of whether any

corrosion rate line is displayed.
In the following example, in the following image, Custom Corrosion Rate A and Custom
Corrosion Rate B are displayed. The custom corrosion rates will be identified in the
legend using the labels that were defined in the TM global preferences.
Defining Custom Corrosion Rate

Settings
To define settings for custom corrosion rates:
2. In the Custom Corrosion Rate Options section, under the Custom Corrosion Rate
A heading, in the Label text box, type the label that you want to use for this
custom corrosion rate. You can click the
button to the right of the text box if
you want manage translations for that string.
3. To the right of the Calculation Rule text box, click the
button.
The Select Corrosion Rate Rule window appears.
4. In the left section of the window, navigate to and select the Rules Library folder
containing the project in which the desired rule is defined.
The middle section of the window is populated with a list of projects that exist in the
folder that you selected.
5. In the list of projects, select the project that containing the method that you want
to use for the corrosion rate rule.
The right section of the window is populated with a list of valid methods.
6. In the list of methods, select the one that contains the desired rule.
7. Click OK.
The Select Corrosion Rate Rule window closes.
8. If you want to define a second custom corrosion rate calculation, under the
Custom Corrosion Rate B heading, repeat the steps that you completed to define
custom corrosion rate A.
The custom corrosion rate settings are saved along with any other changes you have
made to the settings on the Global Preferences page.
About Settings for Measurement

Readings
The settings in the Readings Preferences section on the Global Preferences page allow
you to determine how the Meridium APM system will handle values entered into the
Readings field in Thickness Measurement records.
The Readings Preferences section contains the following settings:
Reading Tolerance: Determines how much variation is allowed between values in

the Readings field. When values are entered in the Readings field, they are
averaged. Then, the Reading Tolerance value is used to determine which values
fall within an acceptable range of the average value. If any of the values fall
outside of the acceptable range, the value in the Readings Pass/Fail field will be
set to Fail.
Note: The baseline TM product uses inches as the unit of measure for this setting. If you
are using a UOM Conversion Set that converts inches to another unit of measure, that
conversion will be applied to this setting.
Reading Calculation Method: Determines how values in the Readings field will
be used to populate the Thickness Measurement field. You can choose one of the
following calculation methods:
Average: The Uncorrected Measurement field will be populated with the

calculated average value of all the values that exist in the Readings field.
Minimum: The Uncorrected Measurement field will be populated with the

minimum value of all the values that exist in the Readings field.
Maximum: The Uncorrected Measurement field will be populated with the

maximum value of all the values that exist in the Readings field.
Custom: The Uncorrected Measurement field will be populated with the

value that is calculated according to the calculation defined by the Custom
Rule for Readings Calculation setting.
Note: The value in the Uncorrected Measurement field is used to populate the Thickness
Measurement field.
Custom Rule for Readings Calculations: Specifies the rule that will be used to
calculate the Thickness Measurement value when the Reading Calculation
Method setting is set to Custom. To use a custom readings calculation, you must
first create a rule that defines the calculation that will be applied. Rules can be
defined in the Rules Library in the Configuration Manager application. This
documentation assumes that the necessary rules have already been defined.
Defining Settings for Measurement

Readings
To define settings for measurement readings:
2. In the Readings Preferences section, in the Reading Tolerance text box, type the
value that defines the range within which readings must fall in order to pass
evaluation.
3. In the Readings Calculation Method list, select the value that indicates how you
want Thickness Measurement values to be calculated based upon the values in the
Readings field. You can choose Average, Minimum, Maximum, or Custom.
4. If you selected Custom in the Readings Calculation Method list, to the right of the
Custom Rule for Readings Calculation text box, click the
button.
The Select Readings Calculation rule window appears.
5. In the left section of the window, navigate to and select the Rules Library folder
containing the project in which the desired rule is defined.
The middle section of the window is populated with a list of projects that exist in the
folder that you selected.
6. In the list of projects, select the project that containing the method that you want
to use for the corrosion rate rule.
The right section of the window is populated with a list of valid methods.
7. In the list of methods, select the one that contains the desired rule.
8. Click OK.
The Select Readings Calculation rule window closes.

The custom corrosion rate settings are saved along with any other changes you have
made to the settings on the Global Preferences page.
Configuring Nominal T-Min Lookup

Nominal T-Min is a value that represents the minimum thickness of a pipe based upon
accepted industry standards. The Nominal T-Min value takes into account various design
specifications and determines the minimum thickness associated with that criteria. The
Nominal T-Min value is retrieved using values from Thickness Measurement Location
records and records in the Piping Nominal T-Min reference table. Via the Nominal T-Min
Lookup settings, you can configure which fields you want to use for retrieving the
Nominal T-Min value for Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to
Equipment or TML Group records that represent pipes, or records that store equipment or
component data for pipes.
On the Global Preferences page, the Fields for Nominal T-Min Lookup list contains a list
of all these fields that exist in the Piping Nominal T-Min family.
Each field in the Piping Nominal T-Min family corresponds to a field in the Thickness
Measurement Location family. By selecting a field in the Fields for Nominal T-Min
Lookup list, you are indicating that you want to use that field for looking up Nominal TMin values. This means that values in the associated fields in Thickness Measurement
Location records will be compared to values in the Piping Nominal T-Min reference table
and that a Nominal T-Min value will be returned only if a match is found. Any field that
is not selected in the Fields for Nominal T-Min Lookup list will not be used for looking
up the Nominal T-Min value. In other words, values in those fields of Thickness
Measurement Location records are not required to match values in corresponding field in
the Piping Nominal T-Min reference table.
Note: If no fields are selected in the Fields for Nominal T-Min Lookup list, the Nominal
T-Min lookup feature will be disabled. In other words, a Nominal T-Min value will never
be retrieved automatically for any Thickness Measurement Location record.
To define Nominal T-Min Lookup settings:

2. In the Nominal T-Min Preferences section, in the Fields for Nominal T-Min
Lookup list, select the fields that you want to use for retrieving Nominal T-Min
values.

The Nominal T-Min settings are saved along with any other changes you have made to
the settings on the Global Preferences page.
Reloading Global Settings

After you have made changes to the settings on the Global Preferences page, you can
reload the settings to restore the most recently saved values.
To reload global settings:
2. On the Preferences Tasks menu, click the Reload link.
The global settings revert back to the most recently saved values.
Accessing the TM Color-Coding

Preferences Page
On various pages throughout Thickness Monitoring, Thickness Measurement records and
Thickness Measurement Location records will be color-coded if they meet certain
criteria. If desired, via the TM Color-Coding Preferences page, you can change the colors
that will be applied.
To access the TM Color-Coding Preferences page:

2. Click the Color-Coding Preferences link.
The TM Color-Coding Preferences page appears.
Aspects of the TM Color-Coding

Preferences Page
The TM Color-Coding Preferences page displays four color-coding settings:
Below T-Min: Determines the color that will be used to identify Thickness
Measurement Location records and Thickness Measurement records with a
Measurement Value that is below the Minimum Thickness value.
Overview Inspection Date or Retirement Date: Determines the color that will be
used to identify Thickness Measurement Location records in which the Next
Inspection Date or Retirement Date is past due.
High Loss: Determines the color that will be used to identify Thickness
Measurement Location records and Thickness Measurement records that meet
High Loss criteria and the loss percentage that defines High Loss criteria.
Growth: Determines the color that will be used to identify Thickness

Measurement Location records and Thickness Measurement records that meet
Growth criteria.
For each of these settings, two columns are displayed:
TML Color: Displays a colored square representing the color that will be used to
identify Thickness Measurement Location records that meet the color-coding
criteria.
Measurement Color: Displays a colored square representing the color that will be
used to identify Thickness Measurement records that meet the color-coding
criteria.
Note: The text N/A is displayed in the Measurement Color column for the Overdue
Inspection Date or Retirement Date setting since this condition does not apply to
Thickness Measurement records.
Color-Coding Tasks
The Color-Coding Tasks menu on the TM Color-Coding Preferences page contains the
following links:
Save: Save the current color-coding settings.

Reset Color Code: Resets the color-coding settings to the default colors.
Reload Color Code: Resets the color-coding settings to the most recently saved
values.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the TM Color-Coding Preferences page contains the
following links:
Print: Displays the Print preview window, where you can print a table displaying
the color code.
Page.
Documents: This link is disabled on the TM Color-Coding Preferences page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the TM Color-Coding

Preferences page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the TM Color-Coding Preferences page does not contain
any links. It is not possible to configure the Associated Pages menu to display links on
the TM Color-Coding Preferences page.
Changing Color-Codes
To change the color-coding settings for Thickness Monitoring:
1. In the Meridium, APM Framework, access the TM Color-Coding Preferences
page.
2. In the TML Color or Measurement Color column, click the colored square for the
color that you want to modify.
The Color window appears.
3. In the Basic colors area, click the color that you want to use.
-orClick the Define Custom Colors button to define a custom color.
4. Click OK.
The color that you selected is now displayed on the TM Color-Coding Preferences page
for the entity family and condition that you selected. This color will be used for all
records that meet that condition. In the following image, the color for identifying growth
for Thickness Measurement Location records has been changed from blue to black.
5. On the Color-Coding Tasks menu, click the Save link.

The color-coding preferences that you have defined are saved, along with any other
changes to preferences that you have made on the TM Color-Coding Preferences page.
Changing the High Loss Value
To change the high loss value:

1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the TM Color-Coding Preferences
page.
2. In the High Loss text box, type a numeric value that represents the percentage of
loss from one measurement to the next that constitutes high loss. In the following
image, the high loss value has been set to 45%.

The new high loss value is saved, along with any other changes to preferences that you
have made on the TM Color-Coding Preferences page.
Resetting Color-Coding Settings to

Default Values
On the TM Color-Coding Preferences page, you can reset the color-coding settings to
their default values, which are:
Below T-Min: Red.

Overdue Inspection Date or Retirement Date: Yellow.
High Loss: Magenta and 30%.
Growth: Blue.
To reset the color-coding settings:

page.
2. On the Color-Coding Tasks menu, click the Reset Color Code link.
The color-coding settings are reset to their default value as shown in the following image.

The color-coding settings are saved.
Reloading the Most Recent ColorCoding Settings

After you have made changes to the preferences on the TM Color-Coding Preferences
page, you can reload the most recently saved settings.
To reload the most recently saved color-coding settings:
page.
2. On the Color-Coding Tasks menu, click the Reset Color Code link.
The color-coding settings are reset to the most recently saved values.
The color-coding settings are saved.
Managing Thickness Monitoring Rules

Lookup Records
Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup records create a reference table of values that are
used by Meridium APM Thickness Monitoring for performing certain calculations. Like
all reference table records, Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup records can be viewed
most easily in the Bulk Data Form or through a query. For your convenience, the TM
Administrative Tasks page contains a link that allows you to open Thickness Monitoring
Rules Lookup records in the Bulk Data Form, where you can view and modify the
reference table values as needed.
To open Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup records in the Bulk Data Form:
In the Meridium APM Framework, on the TM Administrative Tasks page, click the
Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup link.
The Bulk Data Form page appears, displaying all the records that exist in the Thickness
Monitoring Rules Lookup family.
Granting the TM Technician Role

When you record measurements in Thickness Measurement records, in the Measurement
Taken By list, you will need to select the name of the person who took the measurement.
Only people who have been granted the TM Technician role will appear in the
Measurement Taken By list.
To grant the TM Technician role to someone, you will need to:
Make sure that a Human Resource record exists to store that person's name.
-and
Link the Human Resource record to a Resource Role record that contains the
following values in the following fields.
Field
Value
Category Inspection
Role
TM Technician
Note: You can link Resource Role records to Human Resource records using the baseline
Human Resource with Role Details datasheet, which is defined for the Human Resource
family.
Keep in mind that Human Resource records can store information about people who are
not Meridium APM users and, therefore, do not have an associated Security User record
in the Meridium APM database. In some cases, the people who take measurements in the
field are not Meridium APM users. As long as those people have an associated Human
Resource record that meets the preceding criteria, they can still be selected in the
Measurement Taken By list as the person who took the measurement.
Note: When you create a Thickness Measurement record, if you have been granted the
TM Technician role, the value is set by default to your name. You can change the value
by selecting another name in the list.
Consider an example where John Smith takes measurements in the field but is not a
Meridium APM user. Therefore, no Security User record exists in the Meridium APM
database to store information about John Smith. A Human Resource record exists,
however, to record information about John Smith, including the fact that he takes
measurements in the field. The Human Resource record:
Contains the value John in the First Name field and the value Smith in the Last
Name field.
Is linked to a Resource Role record with the value Inspection in the Category field
and the value TM Technician in the Role field.
Using this example, the Human Resource and Resource Role records would look like
this:
Note: The Role list displays the System Codes that belong to the
MI_RESOURCE_ROLE System Code Table. The values are displayed using the ID and
the Description of the System Codes. Only the ID of the selected System Code, however,
is stored in the field.
Because these records exist, the TM Technician role has been granted successfully to
John Smith, and the Measurement Taken By list would contain the following value.
Note: Duncan, Amy appears by default because it is the name of the Security User who is
currently logged in to the Meridium APM system.
About Defining Fields for Measurement

Data Entry
By default, on the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page and TM Measurement Data
Entry pages, the Common Measurement Data section displays the following fields:
Measurement Taken Date

Temperature (Degrees Fahrenheit)
Measurement Taken By
When you enter values in these fields, the corresponding fields will be populated
automatically with those values in all new Thickness Measurement records that are
created on these pages.
Via the Common Measurement Data Field Mappings page, you can add up to three
additional fields to the Common Measurement Data section of both these pages. In the
same way that values entered into the standard fields will be used to populate fields in
new Thickness Measurement records, the values that you enter in to any additional fields
will also be used to populate fields in the new records. Therefore, you will want to add
fields that store data that is common to all Thickness Measurement records. A red outline
has been added to the following image to highlight three fields that have been added to
the Common Measurement Data section of the TM Measurement Data Entry page.
Note: The Common Measurement Data section of the TM Initial Measurement Data
Entry and TM Measurement Data Entry pages cannot be configured independently of one
another, meaning that whatever fields you select on the Common Measurement Data
Field Mappings page will appear in the Common Measurement Data section of both
pages.
With a few exceptions, you can add to the Common Measurement Data section any
baseline or custom Thickness Measurement field of the following type:
Character
Date
Logical
Numeric
Text
The following baseline fields cannot be added to the Common Measurement Data
section, as their baseline behavior makes them inappropriate for use as common data
fields: Historical Sequence Number, Corroded Area Measurement Values, Measurement
ID, and Measurement Value.
Accessing the Common Measurement

Data Field Mappings Measurement
Page
To access the Common Measurement Data Field Mappings Measurements page:
In the Meridium APM Framework, on the TM Administrative Tasks page, click

the Common Measurement Data Field Mappings link.
The Common Measurement Data Field Mappings page appears.
Overview of the Common Measurement

Data Field Mappings Page
The Common Measurement Data Field Mappings page allows you to define which fields
will appear in the Common Measurement Data section of the TM Initial Measurement
Data Entry and TM Measurement Data Entry pages.
The Common Measurement Data Field Mappings page consists of the following items:
Common Measurement Data Field Mappings workspace: Contains of three lists

of fields that belong to the Thickness Measurement family and can be added to
the Common Measurement Data section of the TM Initial Measurement Data
Entry and TM Measurement Data Entry pages.
Common Measurement Data Field lists: Contain Thickness Measurement fields

that you can select to add to the Common Measurement Data section. Each list
contains all character, date, text, and numeric fields that exist in the Thickness
Measurement family and have not already been added to the Common
Measurement Data section.
For example, if you select the fields as shown in the following image.
When you access either the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry or TM Measurement
Data Entry page, the Common Measurement Data section of that page will look like the
following image. Red numbers have been added to the image to show the relationship
between the Common Measurement Data Field lists and the Common Measurement Data
section.
functions that are available on the Common Measurement Data Field Mappings
page. The following task menus are available on the Common Measurement Data
Field Mappings page:
Preference Tasks
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Preference Tasks
The Preferences Tasks menu on the Common Measurement Data Field Mappings page
contains the following links:
Pick Another Family: This link is always disabled on the Common Measurement
Data Field Mappings page.
Reload: Reloads the field mapping configuration that was last saved.
Save: Saves the field mapping settings so that the selected fields will appear the
next time you access either the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry or TM
Measurement Data Entry page.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Common Measurement Data Field Mappings page
contains the following links:
Print: This link is always disabled on the Common Measurement Data Field
Mappings page.
Page.
Documents: This link is always disabled on the Common Measurement Data

Field Mappings page.
Help: This link is not functional.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the Common Measurement Data Field Mappings page
does not display any links. It is not possible to configure the Associated Pages menu to
display links on the Common Measurement Data Field Mappings page.
Adding Fields to the Common

Measurement Data Section
The following instructions provide details on adding fields to the Common Measurement
Data section of the TM Measurement Data Entry and TM Initial Measurement Data Entry
pages.
To add fields to the Common Measurement Data section:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the Common Measurement Data Field
Mappings page.
2. In the Common Measurement Data Field lists that correspond to the locations in
which you want to add a field, select the names of the fields that you want to add
to the Common Measurement Data section.
You can select a value in any or all of the three lists. The following image shows a field
selected in each of the three Common Measurement Data Field lists.
Note: For any list where you do not select a value, the corresponding location will be
empty on the Common Measurement Data section.
The field mapping settings are saved.
Removing Fields from the Common

The following instruction provide details on removing a field that has previously been
added to the Common Measurement Data section of the TM Initial Measurement Data
Entry and TM Measurement Data Entry page.
Note: The Common Measurement Data section automatically includes the Measurement
Taken Date, Temperature (Degrees Fahrenheit), and Measurement Taken By fields. These
fields cannot be removed. Only fields that have been added via the Common
Measurement Data Field Mappings page can be removed.
To delete fields from the Common Measurement Data section:
Mappings page.
2. In the Common Measurement Data Field list that corresponds to the location from
which you want to remove a field, select the blank value.
For example, the following image shows the blank value selected in the Common
Measurement Data Field 1 list.
3. Select blank values in additional lists, if desired.

4. On the Preference Tasks menu, click the Save button.
The field mapping settings are saved. The next time you access the TM Initial
Measurement Data Entry or TM Measurement Data Entry page, the fields you removed
will no longer be displayed.
Modifying the Fields on the Common

Note: The Common Measurement Data section automatically includes the Measurement
Taken Date, Temperature (Degrees Fahrenheit), and Measurement Taken By fields. These
fields cannot be modified. Only fields that have been added via the Common
Measurement Data Field Mappings page can be modified.
To modify the fields that appear in the Common Measurement Data section:
Mappings page.
2. In any Common Measurement Field Mapping list where a value is already
selected, select the name of the field that you want to appear instead.
3. On the Preference Tasks menu, click the Save button.
The field mapping configuration is saved. The next time you access the TM Initial
Measurement Data Entry or TM Measurement Data Entry page, the updated field
mapping will be used.
Installing Supporting Files for Devices

on Meridium APM Framework
Machines
If you will use one of the following supported devices to collect data that you will
transfer to the Meridium APM system, you must first install the supporting files on the
Meridium APM Framework machines that will connect to these devices:
Krautkramer Branson DMS Instrument

Krautkramer Branson DMS2 Instrument
GE DMS Go
GE DMS Go+
You can install the supporting files using the Meridium APM Drivers installer.
To install the supporting files for supported devices on a Meridium APM Framework
machine:
1. On the Meridium APM Framework machine that will connect to the device, insert
the 3rd party DVD, and navigate to the folder \\Third Party Drivers for
APM\Meridium APM Drivers.
2. Double-click the file setup.exe.
A message appears, asking if you want to allow the installer to make changes to your
machine.
3. Click the Yes button.
The Meridium APM Drivers dialog box appears, which contains a progress bar.
After the progress bar reaches the end, the Meridium APM Drivers installer appears,
displaying the Welcome screen.
4. Click the Next button.

The License Agreement screen appears.
5. Read the entire license agreement, and then select one of the following options:
o I accept the terms of the license agreement, if you agree to the terms of the
license agreement and want to continue. These instructions assume that
you want to continue.
o
I do not accept the terms of the license agreement, if you do not agree
to the terms of the license agreement and do not want to continue.
This option is selected by default. If you want to accept this selection,
click the Cancel button to exit the installer.
The Next button becomes enabled.

The Ready to Install the Program screen appears.
7. Click the Install button.

The Installing Meridium APM Drivers screen appears, displaying a progress bar that
indicates the status of the installation process.
After the progress bar reaches the end, the InstallShield Wizard Completed screen
appears.
8. Click the Finish button.

The Meridium APM Drivers installer closes. The supporting files for the following
devices are now installed on the Meridium APM Framework machine:
o
o

GE DMS Go
GE DMS Go+
The Navigation Menu

The Navigation menu appears throughout Thickness Monitoring and provides access to
features that are available in the Thickness Monitoring module.
When you are viewing an equipment-specific page in Thickness Monitoring, the

Navigation menu offers quick access to other features within the context of the
Equipment or TML Group records that you are currently viewing. For example, if you
access the TM TMLs/Measurements page for the Equipment record with the Record ID
Pump A39-5, you can click the Analysis Summary link on the Navigation menu to view
the TM Analysis page for the Equipment record with the Record ID Pump A39-5.
If you access a page in Thickness Monitoring for more than one Equipment record to
which TML Group records are linked (i.e., multiple Equipment nodes are displayed in the
TM Explorer pane), when you select an Equipment node in the TM Explorer pane and
then use the Navigation menu to go to a different page, that Equipment node will be
selected in the TM Explorer pane when the new page appears. If, however, the TM
Explorer pane includes multiple Equipment and TML Group nodes, and you select a
TML Group node and click a link on the Navigation menu, the node for the Equipment
record to which the TML Group record is linked will be selected in the TM Explorer pane
when the new page appears.
Note: The link for the page that you are currently viewing will always be disabled on the
Navigation menu. For example, when you are on the TM TMLs/Measurements page, the
TMLs and Measurements link will be disabled.
The Navigation menu in Thickness Monitoring contains the following links:
TM Start Page: Displays the Thickness Monitoring Functions page.

Analysis Summary: Displays the TM Analysis page, where you can view TM
Analysis summary information for the Equipment or TML Group records whose
nodes appear in the TM Explorer pane.
TMLs and Measurements: Displays the TM TMLs/Measurements page, where

you can manage all the Thickness Measurement Location and Thickness
Measurement records that are linked to the Equipment or TML Group records
whose nodes appear in the TM Explorer pane.
Measurement Data Entry: Displays the TM Measurement Data Entry page, where
you can record measurements for the Thickness Measurement Location records
that are linked to the Equipment or TML Group records whose nodes appear in
the TM Explorer pane.
Initial Measurement Data Entry: Displays the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry
page, where you can quickly enter base measurements for the Thickness
Measurement Location records that:
o
Are linked to the Equipment or TML Group records whose nodes appear
in the TM Explorer pane.
-butAre not yet linked to a Thickness Measurement record.

DataLogger: Displays the Select a Device and Properties dialog box, from which
you can send data to or receive data from that device.
o
Quick View: Displays the TM Quick View page. This link is disabled if no
Thickness Measurement Location records are linked to the Equipment or TML
Group records whose nodes appear in the TM Explorer pane.
T-Min Calculator: After displaying a disclaimer explaining that the calculator is

not intended to be a comprehensive tool for calculating the T-Min value, displays
the T-Min Calculations page for the Equipment or TML Group records whose
nodes appear in the TM Explorer pane.
TM Explorers
The TM Explorer pane appears on various pages throughout Thickness Monitoring and
displays nodes in a tree that represent a hierarchy of the records that are linked to the
Equipment or TML Group records for which you accessed the page.
The TM Explorer pane is displayed using a configured explorer that displays nodes
representing the following records:
The Equipment and/or TML Group record for which you accessed the page.
If the Equipment record for which you accessed the page is linked to TML
Group records, the TM Explorer pane will also display nodes for any TML
Group records that are linked to that Equipment record.
If you accessed the page for a TML Group record, the TM Explorer pane
will also display a node for the Equipment record to which the TML
Group record is linked.
The Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to the Equipment or
TML Group records.
The Thickness Measurement records that are linked to those Thickness

Note the following information about the TM Explorer pane:
Thickness Measurement nodes are displayed in the TM Explorer pane on the TM

TMLs/Measurements page only.
The TM Explorer pane on all pages in TM displays a maximum 20 levels of TML
Group nodes for a single Equipment node.
The configured explorers that are used to determine the content of the TM Explorer pane
are stored in the following folder in the Meridium APM Catalog:
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Thickness Monitoring\Explorers. These configured explorers
are created automatically when:
A user accesses any page in Thickness Monitoring and the configured explorers
do not already exist.
A user updates the Family Preferences for the Equipment or TML Group family.
If any of the configured explorers already exist, they will be overwritten with an
updated copy.
The following table provides a list of the configured explorers that are created and
updated automatically and identifies the page where each one is used.
This configured explorer:
...Is used on this page:
Archived Corrosion Analysis
TM Archived Analysis
TM Measurement Data Entry

Measurement Data Entry
TM Initial Measurement Data Entry
Quick View
TM Quick View
Summary Analysis
TM Analysis
T-Min Calculator
T-Min Calculations
TMLs and Measurements
TM TMLs/Measurements
All TM users should be granted create permissions to the folder

\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Thickness Monitoring\Explorers so that the TM Explorer
pane can be created and updated as needed as your users navigate throughout the TM
product. TM users also need View/Execute permissions on the folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Thickness Monitoring and all its subfolders.
Because the TM configured explorers are created and updated automatically, you should
not modify them manually. Any changes that you make to the configured explorers will
be overwritten each time they are updated. In addition, you should not delete the
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Thickness Monitoring\Explorers folder. If you do so, error
messages will appear when you try to access any page on which the configured explorers
are used.
About the Task Menu Pane in Thickness

Monitoring
The task menu pane in Thickness Monitoring differs from the task menu pane that is used
throughout the rest of the Meridium APM Framework application by offering options that
are not available in the rest of the product. In Thickness Monitoring, you can:
Hide the task menu pane.

View the task menus while the task menu pane is hidden.
Display the task menu pane after it has been hidden.
Change the width of the task menu pane.
Hiding the Task Menu Pane

In Thickness Monitoring, you can hide the task menu pane, providing a larger workspace.
This is especially useful on the TM TMLs/Measurements page, where the TMLs pane and
the Measurements pane contain many fields spread horizontally across the page.
To hide the task menu pane:
Click the button in the upper-right side of the task menu pane.
In the following image, the button is outlined in red.
The task menu pane collapses to the left side of the screen, and the
displayed. In the following image, the
button is
button is outlined in red.
Note that after you have hidden the task menu pane, you can view its contents by pausing
on the
button. In addition, you can choose to display the task menu pane again.
Viewing the Task Menus While the Task

Menu Pane is Hidden
While the task menu pane is hidden, if you need to access a function that is available on
one of the task menus, you can view the task menus.
To view the task menus while the task menu pane is hidden:
Click the
button on the left side of the page.
The task menu pane expands over the contents of the page that you are currently viewing.
When you click a link on a task menu that displays another page or dialog box or click
outside the task menu pane itself, the task menu pane will return automatically to the
hidden position.
Displaying the Task Menu Pane After it

Has Been Hidden
After the task menu pane has been hidden, you can return it to its original position on the
left side of the page.
To re-display the hidden task menu pane:
1. Click the
button on the left of the page.
The task menu pane will expand over the current screen contents on the left side of the
page.
2. Click the
button.
The task menu pane returns to its default position on the page.
Changing the Width of the Task Menu

Pane
Throughout the Meridium APM Framework application, a default width is used to
determine the amount of space in which the task menu pane is displayed. In Thickness
Monitoring, you can change the width of the task menu pane to make it larger or smaller
than the default width. Expanding the task menu pane can be useful on pages where the
labels for one or more task menu links exceed the default display width.
Note that you can specify how wide the task menu pane should be when it appears in the
default position, and you can specify how wide the task menu pane should be when a user
displays it briefly while it is in the hidden position.
To change the width of the displayed task menu pane:
With the task menu pane is in the default display position, click the divider on the
right side of the task menu pane that separates it from the rest of the page, and
drag it until the task menu pane is the desired width.
To change the width of the hidden task menu pane:

1. With the task menu pane hidden, click the
display the task menu pane.
button on the left side of the page to
The task menu pane appears.
2. Click the divider on the right side of the task menu pane, and drag it until the task
menu pane is the desired width.
The width that you select will be used when the task menu pane is visible from the
hidden position.
How is Color-Coding Applied?

Thickness Measurement Location records and Thickness Measurement records can be
color-coded for the conditions described in the following list, each of with has a default
color that can be modified via the TM Color-Coding Preferences page.
Below T-Min: Indicates that the Last Measurement Value is less than or equal to
the Minimum Thickness value for the Thickness Measurement Location record.
The default color for this condition is red and can be applied to both Thickness
Measurement Location records and Thickness Measurement records.
Note: Any Measurement Value that is less than or equal to the Minimum Thickness value
will be colored, including those taken prior to the Last Measurement. The TML ID for the
Thickness Measurement Location record, however, will be colored only if the Last
Measurement Value is less than or equal to the Minimum Thickness value.
Overdue Inspection Date or Retirement Date: Indicates that the Thickness

Measurement Location has a past-due Scheduled Next Inspection Date or
Retirement Date. The default color for this condition is yellow and applies only to
Thickness Measurement Location records.
High Loss: Indicates that the Last Measurement Value is at least 30% less than the
Near Measurement Value. The default color for this condition is magenta and
applies to both Thickness Measurement Location records and Thickness
Growth: Indicates that the Last Measurement Value is greater than the Near
Measurement Value. The default color for this condition is blue and applies to
both Thickness Measurement Location records and Thickness Measurement
records.
Note: The criteria are listed in order of priority, red being the highest. If a record meets
the criteria for more than one color, the color with the highest priority will be applied.
Where is Color-Coding Applied?

On various pages throughout Thickness Monitoring, records will be color-coded if they
meet certain conditions. Color-coding lets you see at a glance whether certain conditions
exist for a given Thickness Measurement Location record or Thickness Measurement

record.
Color Coding will be applied to TML IDs and Measurement IDs on the TM
Color Coding will be applied to TML IDs and Measurement Values on the
following pages:
The TM Measurement Data Entry page.
The TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page.
The TM Quick View page.
For example, the following image shows color-coded TML IDs and Measurement Values
on the TM TMLs/Measurements page.
Note: Typically, color coding will be applied when you enter or modify a value and then
move to another field. This allows you to see if the value you are entering meets any of
the color-coding criteria. The color-coding will not be made permanent or applied to the
Thickness Measurement record or the Thickness Measurement Location record until you
save your changes.
Creating a TM Analysis
The Meridium APM Thickness Monitoring module does not include a specific interface
for creating new corrosion analyses. Because a corrosion analysis consists of many
records, the process of creating a TM Analysis involves completing various steps
throughout the TM product. In this area of the documentation, we provide an overview of
the analysis-creation process and basic step-by-step instructions for completing each step
in the process. Additional details on completing each step are available in other areas of
this documentation.
To create a TM Analysis:
1. Identify the piece of equipment that needs to be analyzed. If an Equipment record

does not yet exist for this piece of equipment, create one.
2. Access the TM Analysis page for the Equipment record.
The TM Analysis page appears, displaying the Equipment record for which you accessed
the page as the root node in the TM Explorer pane.
3. Create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for the Equipment record.

A Corrosion Analysis Settings record is created and linked to the Equipment record.
Additionally, an Asset Corrosion Analysis record is created automatically and linked to
the Equipment record.
4. On the Navigation menu, click the TMLs and Measurements link to access the
TM TMLs/Measurements page.
The TM TMLs/Measurements page appears.
5. If you are using TML Group records throughout your TM Analyses, create the
TML Group records that you want to associate with the root level Equipment
record.
Note: When you create a TML Group record, one or more Corrosion Analysis Settings
records may be created automatically and populated with values that are stored in the
Corrosion Analysis Settings records that are linked to the Equipment record to which the
TML Group record is linked. When the Equipment record is linked to more than one
Corrosion Analysis Settings record (i.e., it is associated with more than one TML
Analysis Type), you will choose the TML Analysis Types for which you want to create
the Corrosion Analysis Settings records that will be linked to the TML Group record that
you create. Additionally, you can modify the values in this record, if desired.
6.
Create a Thickness Measurement Location record for the:

o
Equipment record if your TM Analysis does not contain TML Group

records.
-or5.
TML Group records, if your TM Analysis contains TML Group records.
7. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Save and Analyze link.
The Meridium APM system saves the Thickness Measurement Location

record and links it to the Equipment or TML Group record.
A TML Corrosion Analysis record is created automatically and linked to

the Thickness Measurement Location record.
A Corrosion Analysis Settings record is created automatically and linked

to the Thickness Measurement Location record.
If you created TML Group records for this TM Analysis, one Asset
Corrosion Analysis record is created and linked to each TML Group
record you created.
Create additional Thickness Measurement Location records, as needed. To create

a comprehensive analysis, you will probably create multiple Thickness
Measurement Location records for each Equipment or TML Group record.
Hint: You do not need to click the Save and Analyze link until you have created all the
desired records. When you save your changes on the TM TMLs/Measurements page, all
the necessary records will be created automatically for any new Thickness Measurement
Location record that you have added.
9. Create a Thickness Measurement record for the Thickness Measurement Location
records that you have created.
Recording Thickness Measurements is an ongoing task that will be performed throughout
the life of the equipment. When you first create an analysis, however, you should at least
record the base measurement for each Thickness Measurement Location record, if
possible. The base measurement is the first measurement recorded for the Thickness
Measurement Location record and becomes the starting point from which all other
measurements are compared. The base reading can be measured manually (actual) or may
be recorded from a standard (nominal), such as the design specification provided by the
equipment manufacturer. The Initial Measurement Data Entry page in Thickness
Monitoring is designed specifically for recording base measurements.
When you create subsequent Thickness Measurement records for a Thickness
Measurement Location record, the Meridium APM system can compare the new readings
to the base reading to determine the corrosion rates for that Thickness Measurement
Location record.
Depending upon your situation and the available data, when you are creating a new
analysis, you may need to record measurements in addition to the base measurement. For
example, you might create both the base measurement and the next measurement if you
are setting up an analysis for a piece of equipment that has existed in your plant for a year
and you are recording the base measurement from the design code and the next
measurement using an actual reading taken one year after installation.
After you have completed the preceding steps, all the basic components of a TM Analysis
will exist. Keep in mind, however, that a TM Analysis is a living document that will be
updated regularly. As time passes, you will create additional Thickness Measurement
records for each Thickness Measurement Location record, and the Meridium APM
system will recalculate various values in the Asset Corrosion Analysis and TML
Corrosion Analysis records based upon the new data. Instructions for managing the TM
Analysis throughout the life of the equipment are provided throughout this
documentation. You can use the following links for details on performing analysis tasks:
Modifying the Asset Analysis settings and TML Analysis settings.

Creating new TMLs.
Creating new Thickness Measurements.
Performing T-Min Calculations.
Excluding TMLs from an analysis.
Archiving an analysis.
Renewing TMLs.
Accessing the TM Analysis Page

The TM Analysis page displays the results of the TM Analysis for the record that is
selected in the TM Explorer pane. The TM Analysis page offers a customized view of
analysis records. This page is designed to provide a summary of the analysis and to
provide access to other features associated with the analysis, such as plots. We
recommend that you use the Thickness Monitoring workflow to view and manage
corrosion analyses.
You can open the TM Analysis page for multiple Equipment or TML Group records. For
TM Analyses that include both Equipment and TML Group records, if you access the TM
Analysis page for the Equipment record, you will be able to access summary information
for the TML Group and Thickness Measurement Location records by expanding the tree
To open an existing TM Analysis:

1. On the Thickness Monitoring Functions page, click the Corrosion Analysis
Summary link.
The Find Items window appears.
2. Select the Equipment or TML Group family from the Search In list.
3. If desired, add criteria to the search.
4. Click the Find Now button.
The Search results appear, displaying all the Record IDs that meet the specified criteria.
In the following image, all of the Record IDs for the Equipment family are displayed.
5. In the search results, select the record you want to open, and click the Open
button.
The TM Analysis page appears. The Equipment or TML Group record that you selected is
displayed as a node and is selected in the TM Explorer pane, and summary information
from the Asset Corrosion Analysis record that is linked to the selected Equipment or
TML Group record is displayed in the Corrosion Analysis Summary workspace.
Note: If a Corrosion Analysis Settings record is not linked to an Equipment or TML

Group record for which you accessed the TM Analysis page, a message will appear,
indicating that you must define Corrosion Analysis Settings before an analysis can be
performed.
Overview of the TM Analysis Page

The TM Analysis page contains the:
TM Explorer pane: Contains a tree, which displays nodes to represent the

Equipment and/or TML Group records for which you accessed the TM Analysis
page and the Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to those
Equipment or TML Group records.
Workspace:
If an Equipment or TML Group node is selected in the TM Explorer pane,

the Corrosion Analysis Summary for <Asset ID> workspace, where
<Asset ID> is the Record ID of the selected Equipment or TML Group
record, is displayed. This workspace displays summary information from
each Asset Corrosion Analysis record that is linked to the selected
Equipment or TML Group record. Up to three Asset Corrosion Analysis
records may exist (UT, RT, and TML), depending upon the types of
Thickness Measurement Location records that are included in the TM
Analysis. Throughout the documentation, we refer to the Corrosion
Analysis Summary for <Asset ID> workspace as the Corrosion Analysis
Summary workspace.
If a Thickness Measurement Location node is selected in the TM Explorer

pane, the TML Corrosion Analysis Details for <TML ID> workspace,
where <TML ID> is the Record ID of the selected Thickness
Measurement Location record, is displayed. This workspace displays
summary analysis information for the selected Thickness Measurement
Location record. Throughout the documentation, we refer to the TML
Corrosion Analysis Details for <TML ID> workspace as the TML
Corrosion Analysis Details workspace.
Task menu pane: Displays task menus that provide you with quick access to
functions that are available on the TM Analysis page. The following task menus
are available:
Analysis Tasks
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
TM Explorer
The TM Explorer pane on the TM Analysis page displays nodes in a tree, where each
node represents one of the following items:
An Equipment or TML Group record for which you accessed the page.
A record that is linked to an Equipment or TML Group record for which you
accessed the page.
The TM Explorer pane on the TM Analysis page is displayed using the Summary Analysis
configured explorer, which is stored in the following folder in the Meridium APM
Catalog: \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Thickness Monitoring\Explorers.
The selected node determines what is displayed in the workspace on the TM Analysis
page:
When you select an Equipment or TML Group node in the TM Explorer pane, the
Corrosion Analysis Summary workspace will be displayed.
When you select a Thickness Measurement Location node in the TM Explorer
pane, the TML Corrosion Analysis Details workspace will be displayed.
Corrosion Analysis Summary

Workspace
When an Equipment or TML Group node is selected in the TM Explorer pane, the
workspace on the TM Analysis page is titled Corrosion Analysis Summary for <Record
ID>, where <Record ID> is the Record ID of the Equipment or TML Group record
whose node is selected. In this case, the workspace displays information from the Asset
Corrosion Analysis records that are linked to the Equipment or TML Group record. The
analysis summary contains a separate Analysis, Last Calculated on <date> section for
each Asset Corrosion Analysis record that is linked to the Equipment or TML Group
record. The heading in each area indicates the TML Analysis Type of the Thickness
Measurement Location records that were used to calculate the data in that section.
For example, if the selected Equipment or TML Group record has Thickness
Measurement Location records with RT and UT TML Analysis Types, the Corrosion
Analysis Summary workspace would contain a UT Analysis, Last Calculated on <date>
section and an RT Analysis, Last Calculated on <date> section, as shown in the
following image.
The following table lists each Analysis, Last Calculated on <date> section item and its
corresponding Asset Corrosion Analysis value.
Analysis, Last Calculated

on <date> section item
Asset Corrosion
Analysis value
Controlling Corrosion Rate

(<Method>)
Controlling Corrosion
Rate
Scheduled Next Inspection

Date
Asset Controlling Next

Insp Date
Projected T-Min Date
Asset Controlling
Retire Date
Maximum Historical
Corrosion Rate
Maximum Historical
Corrosion Rate
Note: The value that appears in parentheses below Controlling Corrosion Rate indicates
the method used to determine the corrosion rate and does not correspond to a field in the
Asset Corrosion Analysis record.
Two items that are displayed in the Analysis, Last Calculated on <date> section do not
correspond with values that are stored in the Asset Corrosion Analysis record:
Estimated Remaining Life From Today: Displays a value that is calculated for
viewing purposes only and is not stored in the database.
TMLs Below T-Min: Displays a list of the Thickness Measurement Location
records that are linked to a Thickness Measurement record with a Measurement
Value that is below the Minimum Thickness value in the Thickness Measurement
Location record.
Note: To the right of the values that are based on values in Thickness Measurement
Location records, you will see the text Based on: followed by a hyperlink to the TML
Corrosion Analysis for the Thickness Measurement Location on which the value is based.
TML Corrosion Analysis Details

Workspace
When a Thickness Measurement Location node is selected in the TM Explorer pane on
the TM Analysis page, the workspace is labeled TML Corrosion Analysis Details for
<TML ID>, where <TML ID> is the Record ID of the Thickness Measurement Location
record whose node is currently selected. Throughout the documentation, we refer to the
TML Corrosion Analysis Details for <TML ID> workspace as the TML Corrosion
Analysis Details workspace.
The Corrosion Data section of the TML Corrosion Analysis Details workspace displays
values that are stored in the TML Corrosion Analysis record that is linked to the
Thickness Measurement Location record whose node is selected in the TM Explorer
pane:
Note: Below Controlling Corrosion Rate, the corrosion rate that was used as the
Controlling Corrosion Rate will be displayed: Short Term Corrosion Rate, Long
Term Corrosion Rate, Least Squares, or Minimum Corrosion Rate.
Long Term Corrosion Rate

Short Term Corrosion Rate
Least Squares Corrosion Rate
Scheduled Next Inspection Date
Interval Next Inspection Date
Factor Remaining Life Date
Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate
Allowable Measurement Variance Applied
Two items that are displayed in the Corrosion Data section do not correspond with values
that are stored in the TML Corrosion Analysis record:
T-Min Value: Displays the value that is stored in the Minimum Thickness field in
the associated Thickness Measurement Location record.
Estimated Remaining Life from Today: Displays a value that is calculated for
viewing purposes only and is not stored in the database.
An additional section, the Adjusted Corrosion Data section, is displayed in the TML
Corrosion Analysis Details workspace when, in the Asset Analysis Settings:
It is specified that the Average Corrosion Rate or Formula Corrosion Rate should
be calculated.
-and
The Apply CCR to TML Rem Life Next Insp Date Calc check box is selected.
The following image shows an example of what the Adjusted Corrosion Data section
looks like:
The Adjusted Corrosion Data section displays values that are stored in the TML
Corrosion Analysis record. The following table lists each Adjusted Corrosion Data
section item and the corresponding TML Corrosion Analysis field.
Adjusted Corrosion Data

section item
TML Corrosion Analysis field
Adjusted Corrosion Rate
Asset Average Corrosion Rate
Adj Scheduled Next

Inspection Date

Next Inspection
Adj Projected T-Min Date

Retirement Date
Adj Estimated Remaining Life Asset Average Corrosion Rate

from Today
Remaining Life
Analysis Tasks
The Analysis Tasks menu on the TM Analysis page contains the following links:
Pick Another Asset: Displays the Find Items window, where you can search for
one or more different Equipment or TML Group records and display them on the
TM Analysis page. This link is enabled only when an Equipment or TML Group
node is selected in the TM Explorer pane.
Analysis Settings: Displays one of the following items, depending upon the type
of node that is selected in the TM Explorer pane. If:
An Equipment or TML Group node (representing a record for which

analysis settings are already defined) is selected, the Select Analysis Type
dialog box is displayed, where you can select the TML Analysis Type (UT,
RT, or TML) for which you want to view the associated analysis settings.
A Thickness Measurement Location node is selected, the TML Analysis

Settings window is displayed, where you can view and modify values that
are stored in the Corrosion Analysis Settings record that is associated with
the record whose node is selected.
Display Parent Asset: Refreshes the TM Explorer pane and the Corrosion
Analysis Summary workspace so that the Equipment record whose associated
TML Group record is currently represented by the root node in the TM Explorer
pane becomes the root node. This link is enabled when a TML Group record is the
root node in the TM Explorer pane.
Archive Corrosion Analysis: Lets you archive the current TM Analysis. This link
is enabled only if you are a Super User or a member of the MI Thickness
Monitoring Inspector Security Group and an Equipment or TML Group node is
selected in the TM Explorer pane.
Review Archived Analyses: Displays the TM Analysis Archive page, which

displays any archived analyses that exist for the Equipment or TML Group record
whose node is selected in the TM Explorer pane. This link is enabled only if an
Equipment or TML Group node is selected in the TM Explorer pane.
Exclude TMLs: Displays the Exclude TMLs dialog box, where you can choose
Thickness Measurement Location records to exclude from the TM Analysis. This
link is enabled only if you are a Super User or a member of the MI Thickness
Monitoring Inspector Security Group and if an Equipment or TML Group node is
Statistical Details: Displays the TML Statistical Details dialog box, where you can
view various statistics that have been calculated for the TML Corrosion Analysis.
This link is enabled only when a Thickness Measurement Location node is
selected in the TM Explorer pane and if the Asset Analysis Settings specify that
the Least Squares Corrosion Rate should be calculated.
Plots: Displays the Asset Analysis Plot page, which shows a graph of the current
analysis. This link is enabled only if the TM Analysis contains active Thickness
View Tasks: Displays the Task List page in Task Management, where you can
view the Thickness Monitoring Task records that are linked to an Equipment or
TML Group record in the TM Analysis. This link is enabled only if one or more
Thickness Monitoring Task records are linked to the Equipment or TML Group
record whose node is currently selected in the TM Explorer pane.
Reset MHCR: After displaying a confirmation message, resets the Maximum

Historical Corrosion Rate for the Asset Corrosion Analysis record or TML
Corrosion Analysis record that is linked to the Equipment, TML Group, or
Thickness Measurement Location record whose node is selected in the TM
Explorer pane. This link is enabled only if:
You are a Super User or a member of the MI Thickness Monitoring

Administrator Security Group.
-and
o
The selected node represents an Equipment, TML Group, or Thickness

Measurement Location record that is linked to an Asset Corrosion
Analysis or TML Corrosion Analysis record whose Maximum Historical
Corrosion Rate field contains a value.
Formulas: Displays the Formulas dialog box, which displays the formulas that
are used to calculate the values displayed on the TM Analysis page.
Navigation
The Navigation menu on the TM Analysis page displays links to various Thickness
Monitoring features. This menu is common to most pages in Thickness Monitoring.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the TM Analysis page contains the following links:
Print: This link is always disabled on the TM Analysis page.

Page.
Documents: Displays the Reference Documents window, where you can

manage Reference Document records for the record represented by the node
that is selected in the TM Explorer pane. This link is enabled only when you
select a node in the TM Explorer pane that represents a record that is related
to the Reference Document family through the Has Reference Documents
relationship. In the baseline Meridium APM database, this link is enabled
only when an Equipment node is selected in the TM Explorer pane.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the TM Analysis page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the TM Analysis page displays links only if Associated
Pages have been configured for the entity family of the record whose node is selected in
the TM Explorer pane. If no Associated Pages have been configured for the entity family,
the Associated Pages menu will be empty.
About Archiving Corrosion Analyses

When you archive an Asset Corrosion Analysis, you create a copy of the current, active
Asset Corrosion Analysis record and store it in a new Asset Corrosion Analysis record.
Archived Asset Corrosion Analysis records have the following characteristics:
They are linked to the Equipment or TML Group record that was selected when
you clicked the Archive Corrosion Analysis link through the Has Archived
Corrosion Analyses relationship.
They are not linked to Thickness Measurement Location records or Thickness
Measurement records. Thickness Measurement Location and Thickness
Measurement records remain linked only to the active Asset Corrosion Analysis.
They are linked to an Asset Analysis Settings record through the Has Archived
Corrosion Analysis Settings relationship. The Asset Analysis Settings record
stores a copy of the Asset Analysis Settings that existed at the time the analysis
was archived. This copy is created automatically when the Asset Corrosion
Analysis record is archived.
The value in the Analysis State field is set to Archived.
Archived Asset Corrosion Analysis records are meant to serve as a historical record of the
conditions that existed in the analysis at the time it was archived. Archiving an Asset
Corrosion Analysis can be useful if you want to:
Create a snapshot of the Asset Corrosion Analysis based on certain Asset Analysis
Settings, then modify the settings to see how they affect the analysis calculations.
Create a copy of the existing Asset Corrosion Analysis before making changes to
the related Thickness Measurement Location or Thickness Measurement records,
such as adding or excluding Thickness Measurement Location records.
Each Asset Corrosion Analysis can have one or more archived analyses. This means that
you can archive the current, active analysis as many times as you like to create as many
snapshots as you need.
Note: If you archive an Asset Corrosion Analysis for an Equipment record that is linked
to TML Group records, any Asset Corrosion Analysis record that is linked to the TML
Group records will also be automatically archived.
Archiving a Corrosion Analysis

To archive a TM Analysis:
1. On the TM Analysis page, on the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Archive
Corrosion Analysis link.
A confirmation message appears, explaining that the Meridium APM system will archive
the analysis associated with the selected Equipment or TML Group record.
Meridium APM creates a copy of the Asset Corrosion Analysis record and stores it in a
new Asset Corrosion Analysis record, where the Analysis State is set to Archived. The
current page continues to display the active Asset Corrosion Analysis record. To view the
archived TM Analysis, you can click the Review Archived Analyses link on the Analysis
Tasks or TML/Measurement Tasks menu.
Accessing the TM Archived Analysis

Page
To view archived analyses for an Asset:
On the TM Analysis page, on the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Review Archived
Analyses link.
The TM Archived Analysis page appears.
Aspects of the TM Archived Analysis

Page
The TM Archived Analysis page displays a summary of the archived Asset Corrosion
Analyses that are linked to the currently selected Equipment or TML Group record. The
TM Archived Analysis Page contains the following main sections:

Equipment and/or TML Group records for which you accessed the TM Archived
Analysis page and the records that are linked to those Equipment or TML Group
records. The TM Explorer pane on the TM Archived Analysis page is displayed
using the Archived Corrosion Analysis configured explorer, which is stored in the
following folder in the Catalog: \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Thickness
Monitoring\Explorers.
The node that you select in the TM Explorer pane will determine what page is displayed
in the workspace on the right side of the page. If you accessed the TM Archived Analysis
page for an Equipment record that is linked to TML Group records, you can select any
TML Group node in the TM Explorer pane to view summary information for the archived
analysis associated with the TML Group record that the node represents.
Archived Corrosion Analysis Summary workspace: Displays the Archived

Corrosion Analyses that are linked to the selected Equipment or TML Group
record. The information for each archived analysis is divided into two sections:
Analysis Last Calculated on [date]: Displays information about the

archived analysis, including:
o
o
Settings: Displays information about the settings that were used to perform
the calculations that are displayed in the Analysis Last Calculated on
[date] section. The settings are stored in a copy of the Corrosion Analysis
Settings record that was created at the same time as the archived Asset
functions that are available on the TM Analysis Archive page. The following task
menus are available:
Archive Tasks
Navigation Tasks
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Archive Tasks
The Archive Tasks menu on the TM Archived Analysis page contains the following links:
Pick Another Asset: Displays the Find Items window, where you can search for a
different Equipment or TML Group record and display it on the TM Archived
Analysis page.
are used to calculate the values displayed on the TM Archived Analysis page.
Navigation
The Navigation menu on the TM Archived Analysis page displays links to various
Thickness Monitoring features. This menu is common to most pages in Thickness
Monitoring.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the TM Archived Analysis page contains the following
links:
Print: This link is always disabled on the TM Archived Analysis page.

Page.

Help: Displays the help topic for the TM Archived Analysis page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the TM Archived Analysis page displays links only if
Associated Pages have been configured for the entity family of the record whose node is
selected in the TM Explorer pane. If no Associated Pages have been configured for the
entity family, the Associated Pages menu will be empty.
Excluding TMLs
Thickness Monitoring provides a feature that lets you exclude Thickness Measurement
Location records so that they will not be included in the TM Analysis. In other words,
excluded Thickness Measurement Location records will not be used in any calculations.
Only Super Users and members of the MI Thickness Monitoring Inspector Security
Group can exclude Thickness Measurement Location records from an analysis.
To exclude one or more Thickness Measurement Location record from an analysis:
1. On the TM Analysis page, in the TM Explorer pane, select the node representing
the Equipment or TML Group record whose Thickness Measurement Location
record you want to exclude. The following image shows an Equipment node
2. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Exclude TMLs link.

The Exclude TMLs dialog box appears, displaying a list of Thickness Measurement
Location records that exist for the selected Equipment or TML Group record. If you
selected an Equipment record that is linked to TML Group records, the list will include
any Thickness Measurement Location record that is linked either to the Equipment record
or TML Group records.
3. In the Exclude From Analysis column, select the check box for any Thickness
Measurement Location record that you want to exclude from the TM Analysis.
For example, in the following image, TML_0STCR UT Active has been selected
for exclusion from the analysis.
Hint: You can clear this check box for any previously excluded Thickness Measurement
Location records that you now want to include.
4. Click the Save button.
Your changes are saved, and a message appears, indicating that the Thickness
Measurement Location records were updated successfully.
After the Exclude TMLs dialog box closes, you can access TM TMLs/Measurements
page and scroll to the right in the TMLs grid to see that the Exclude From Analysis check
box is now selected for any Thickness Measurement Location record that you excluded.
In the following image, the Exclude From Analysis check boxes are outlined in red.
Resetting the Maximum Historical

Corrosion Rate
On the TM Analysis page, you can reset the Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate value in
an Asset Corrosion Analysis record (if an Equipment or TML Group node is selected in
the TM Explorer pane) or a TML Corrosion Analysis record (if a Thickness Measurement
Location node is selected in the TM Explorer pane). When you reset the Maximum
Historical Corrosion Rate for:
An Asset Corrosion Analysis record, the Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate

field is populated with the Maximum Corrosion Rate value in the associated
A Thickness Measurement Location record, the Maximum Historical Corrosion

Rate field is populated with the TML controlling corrosion rate.
To reset the Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate:

the Equipment, TML Group, or Thickness Measurement Location record whose
Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate you want to reset. The following image
displays a Thickness Measurement Location node selected in the TM Explorer
pane.
The workspace of the TM Analysis page is updated to display the information that is
associated with the node selected in the TM Explorer pane. The following image displays
the TML Corrosion Analysis Details for TML011 UT Active workspace. Note that the
current Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate value is 10.001 Mils/year. This value has
been outlined in red.
2. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Reset MHCR link.

The Confirm Reset MHCR dialog box appears, displaying a message that asks if you want
to reset the Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate.
The Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate value is reset in the Asset Corrosion Analysis
record or TML Corrosion Analysis record and the updated value is displayed in the
workspace of the TM Analysis page.
The following image shows an example of the TML Corrosion Analysis Details
workspace for the Thickness Measurement Location record with the Record ID TML011
UT Active. A red outline has been added to the image to highlight the updated Maximum
Historical Corrosion Rate value of 9.403 Mils/year.
About Creating Asset Analysis Settings

Before you can create Thickness Measurement Location records or view the analysis
summary for an Equipment or TML Group record, a Corrosion Analysis Settings record
that defines the analysis settings for that Equipment or TML Group record must exist.
You will first create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record manually for an Equipment
record for which you want to perform TM Analysis. Then, if your TM Analyses include
TML Group records, one or more Corrosion Analysis Settings records can be created
automatically using values from the Corrosion Analysis Settings records that are linked to
the Equipment record to which the TML Group record is linked. The number of
Corrosion Analysis Settings records that are created for a TML Group record depends
upon the number of Corrosion Analysis Settings records that are linked to the associated
Equipment record and the TML Analysis Types that you want to associate with your
TML Group records.
If more than one Corrosion Analysis Settings record exists for an Equipment record (i.e.,
more than one TML Analysis Type is associated with the Equipment record) for which
you create a TML Group record, you will select only the TML Analysis Types for which
you want to create Corrosion Analysis Settings records to link to the new TML Group
record. If the parent Equipment record is linked to only one Corrosion Analysis Settings
record, the Corrosion Analysis Settings record that is created and linked automatically to
the TML Group record will inherit automatically the TML Analysis Type that is
associated with that Equipment record.
When you create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for an Equipment record, an Asset
Corrosion Analysis record is created automatically and linked to that Equipment record.
Additionally, Asset Corrosion Analysis records are created automatically for any TML
Group records that you include in your TM Analyses.
Corrosion Analysis Settings records determine the TML Analysis Types in your TM
Analysis, and therefore, the types of Thickness Measurement Location records that you
can create for a given Equipment or TML Group record. When you create a new
Thickness Measurement Location record, the TML Analysis Type list on the New TML
dialog box will display only the TML Analysis Types that have been defined for the
selected Equipment or TML Group record.
You can modify the analysis settings for each Equipment and TML Group record as
desired.
The Corrosion Analysis Settings record that exists for an Equipment or TML Group
record will be used to create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for any Thickness
Measurement Location record that is linked to that Equipment or TML Group record. If
desired, you can modify settings at the TML level after a Thickness Measurement
Location record has been created.
Creating Corrosion Analysis Settings

Records
You can use the following instructions to create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record
manually for an Equipment record. This documentation assumes that all Corrosion
Analysis Settings records that are linked directly to TML Group records are created
automatically.
To create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for an Equipment record:
the Equipment record for which you want to create a Corrosion Analysis Settings
record. The following image shows an Equipment node selected in the TM
Explorer pane.
2. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Analysis Settings link.

The Select Analysis Type dialog box appears, displaying one option for each of the
following baseline TML Analysis Types: UT, RT, and TML. The UT option is selected by
default.
3. Select the option that is associated with the TML Analysis Type for which you
want to create analysis settings, and click OK.
The Asset Analysis Settings window appears.
4. On the Asset Analysis Settings window, define the settings as desired.

Note: Fields on the Asset Analysis Settings window may contain values based upon
default rules that exist for the Corrosion Analysis Settings family. You can accept the
default values or specify values of your own.
5. Click the Create Settings button.
o If you are creating a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for an Equipment
record that is not linked to at least one TML Group record, a message
appears, indicating that the settings for the selected Equipment record
have been updated successfully. In this case, you have completed all the
necessary steps, and the Corrosion Analysis Settings record is created and
linked to the Equipment record.
o
If you are creating a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for an Equipment

record that is linked to TML Group records, and one or more of those
TML Group records are not currently associated with analysis settings for
the TML Analysis Type that you selected on the Select Analysis Type
dialog box, the Select Spreading of <TML Analysis Type> Corrosion
Analysis Settings dialog box appears, displaying the TML Group records
to which you can spread the analysis settings (i.e., create a Corrosion
Analysis Settings record automatically). All of the check boxes are
selected by default. In this case, proceed to the next step of these

instructions.
6. On the Select Spreading of <TML Analysis Type> Corrosion Analysis Settings

dialog box:
o Accept the default selection, and click OK.
-oro
Clear the check box to the left of any TML Group record to which you do
not want to spread the analysis settings that you are creating for the
associated Equipment record, and click OK.
Note: You can also use the Select All and Clear All buttons to select and clear check
boxes on the Select Spreading of <TML Analysis Type> Corrosion Analysis Settings
dialog box.
A message appears, indicating that the settings for the selected Equipment record have
been updated successfully. Additionally, one Corrosion Analysis Settings record is
created for the Equipment record, and one Corrosion Analysis Settings record is created
for each TML Group record that you selected on the Select Spreading of <TML Analysis
Type> Corrosion Analysis Settings dialog box.
Accessing Existing Asset Analysis

Settings
To access the analysis settings for an Equipment or TML Group record:
the Equipment or TML Group record whose analysis settings you want to view.
The following image displays a node representing an Equipment record selected
The Select Analysis Type dialog box appears, displaying options for TML Analysis
Types. The options that appear on the Select Analysis Type dialog box will differ,
depending upon the type of node that is selected in the TM Explorer pane:
o
If an Equipment node is selected in the TM Explorer pane, the Select

Analysis Type dialog box displays one option for each of the following
baseline TML Analysis Types: UT, RT, and TML. The UT option is
selected by default.
If a TML Group node is selected in the TM Explorer pane, the Select

Analysis Type dialog box displays one option for each TML Analysis Type
for which analysis settings currently exist for the TML Group record
represented by the selected node. The following image shows the Select
Analysis Type dialog box when the selected node represents a TML Group
record for which analysis settings for the following TML Analysis Types
exist: TML and UT.
3. Select the option that is associated with the TML Analysis Type for which you
want to access analysis settings, and click OK.
The Asset Analysis Settings window appears, displaying the analysis settings for the
selected Equipment or TML Group record. From this dialog box, you can modify the
current settings if desired.
Modifying Asset Analysis Settings

If needed, you can modify the analysis settings for an Equipment or TML Group record
after the Corrosion Analysis Settings record exists. If you modify the analysis settings for
an Equipment record that is linked to TML Group records or Thickness Measurement
Location records, you will have the option of applying the modified settings to those
records as well.
To modify the Asset analysis settings:

1. Access the Asset Analysis Settings window for the Equipment or TML Group
record whose settings you want to modify.
2. Make the desired changes.
3. Click the Update Settings button.
A message appears, indicating that the settings for the selected Equipment or TML Group
record have been updated successfully.
o
If a selected Equipment record is not linked to TML Group or Thickness

Measurement Location records, the Asset Analysis Settings window
closes, and the TM Analysis is updated using the new settings.
If a selected Equipment or TML Group record is linked to Thickness

Measurement Location records for which analysis settings are already
defined, the Select Dependencies For Update builder appears and displays
those Thickness Measurement Location records. If this occurs, skip to step
6.
If a selected Equipment record is linked to TML Group records for which

analysis settings of the same TML Analysis Type are already defined, the
Select Dependencies For Update builder appears. The following
instructions assume that this has occurred.
4. In the grid that appears on the Select Dependencies For Update builder, in the
Process column, select the TML Group records whose analysis settings you want
to update. Above the grid, you can select or clear the All check box to select or
clear every check box in the Process column. In the following image, the TML
Group records with Record IDs AQA-10TMLS-01 and AQA-10TMLS-03 are
selected.
Note: The Meridium APM system will update only the specific fields in the Corrosion
Analysis Settings record that were changed for the Equipment record in step 2.
The next screen on the Select Dependencies For Update builder appears.
6. In the Process column, select the check box for each Thickness Measurement
Location record whose settings you want to update with the updated settings.
Above the grid, you can select or clear the All check box to select or clear every
check box in the Process column.
Note: The Meridium APM system will update only the specific fields in the Corrosion
Analysis Settings record that were changed for the Equipment record in step 2.
7. Click the Finish button.
A message appears, indicating that the settings for the selected Equipment or TML Group
record and all selected dependent settings have been updated successfully, and the TM
Analysis is updated according to the new settings.
Details of the Asset Analysis Settings

The Asset Analysis Settings window displays the analysis settings that are currently
configured for the selected Equipment or TML Group record, and provides a custom view
of fields that exist in the Corrosion Analysis Settings record that is linked to a given
The Asset Analysis Settings window is divided into two sections:
Asset Corrosion Rate

TML Corrosion Rate
Asset Corrosion Rate Section
The Asset Corrosion Rate section on the Asset Analysis Settings window displays settings
that you let you specify how corrosion rates will be calculated.
The Asset Corrosion Rate section displays the following items:
Controlling Corrosion Rate (CCR) area: Displays one option for each type of
corrosion rate that can be used as the Controlling Corrosion Rate for the Asset
Corrosion Analysis. The following options are displayed:
Average: The Controlling Corrosion Rate for the Equipment or TML

Group record will be calculated as the average of the Controlling
Corrosion Rates from linked Thickness Measurement Location records.
Formula: The Controlling Corrosion Rate for the Equipment or TML

Group record will be determined using the statistical method.
Maximum: The Controlling Corrosion Rate for the Equipment or TML

Group record will be set to the highest Controlling Corrosion Rate for
linked Thickness Measurement Location records.
Comments text box: Displays information that is related to the settings defined in
the Asset Corrosion Rate section. The information that you type in this text box is
for informational purposes only and is not used by the Meridium APM system.
Apply CCR to TML Rem Life Next Insp Date Calc check box: A setting that
specifies whether or not the Asset Controlling Corrosion Rate will be used to
calculate the Asset Average Corrosion Rate, Asset Average Corrosion Rate
Remaining Life, Asset Average Corrosion Rate Retirement Date, and Asset
Average Corrosion Rate Next Inspection Date, in which case those averages will
be rolled up to the "controlling" values on the Asset Corrosion Analysis. This
option applies only when you are using the Average or Formula method for
calculating the Controlling Corrosion Rate.
Average Calculation Options area: Displays text boxes for options that apply
when you select Average as the method for calculating the Controlling Corrosion
Rate for the Equipment or TML Group record. The following text boxes are
displayed:
Safety Factor: Displays the value by which the standard average corrosion
rate will be multiplied to determine the Average Corrosion Rate for the
Minimum Number of TMLs: Displays the minimum number of Thickness

Measurement Location records that should be used for calculating the
Average Corrosion Rate when some Thickness Measurement Location
records are eliminated by the Percentile setting.
Percentile: Displays a value representing the percentage of Thickness

Measurement Location records that will be used to calculate the average
corrosion rate. For example, if you type the value 80 in this text box, only
the 80% of Thickness Measurement Location records with the highest
corrosion rates will be used for calculating the Average Corrosion Rate.
The following items appear below the Asset Corrosion Rate section:
Std Deviation factor text box: Displays a value that determines where the upper
limit and lower limit will be drawn on the Asset Analysis Plot. For example, if
you type a value of 2 in the Std Deviation Factor text box, the upper limit and
lower limit lines will be drawn to represent a standard deviation of 2. This value
can help you see at a glance by looking at the Asset Analysis Plot whether or not
all of the corrosion rates fall within a desired range. This value is also used for
determining outliers when the Statistical Corrosion Rate method is used.
Remaining Life Critical Number of TMLs text box: Displays the number of
Thickness Measurement Location records to use when calculating the Asset
Calculated Remaining Life. If you type the value 1 in this text box, the most
conservative (i.e., shortest) Remaining Life value from the Thickness
Measurement Location records that are linked to the Equipment or TML Group
record will be used. If you specify a value greater than 1, that number of the most
conservative Remaining Life values will be averaged from the Thickness
record. The Remaining Life Critical Number of TMLs is 1 by default.
TML Corrosion Rate Section

The TML Corrosion Rate section on the Asset Analysis Settings window displays settings
that you let you specify how corrosion rates will be calculated for Thickness
The TML Corrosion Rate section displays the following items:
Corrosion Rate Options area: Displays one check box for each corrosion rate type
that can be calculated for Thickness Measurement Location records. Select the
check box for each corrosion rate that you want to be calculated for Thickness
record for which you accessed the Asset Analysis Settings window. If you do not
select a given check box, that corrosion rate will not be calculated. If you do not
select any corrosion rate options, the corrosion rate will not be calculated. The
following check boxes are displayed:
Least Squares: A calculation based upon the least squares estimation

method.
Long Term: A corrosion rate calculated using the Base Measurement and
the Last Measurement for a Thickness Measurement Location record.
Short Term: A corrosion rate calculated using the Near Measurement and
the Last Measurement for a Thickness Measurement Location record.
Note: If none of the check boxes in the Corrosion Rate Options area are selected, the
Minimum Corrosion Rate will be used by default in the TM Analysis.
Default Inspection Interval text box: Displays the value that will be used for
calculating the Interval Next Inspection Date for a Thickness Measurement
Location record. While you define a default value for the inspection interval at the
Asset Analysis level, you can modify the inspection interval for individual
Thickness Measurement Location records via the TML Analysis Settings. To the
right of the Default Inspection Interval text box, the Unit of Measure associated
with the Default Inspection Interval is displayed. The Unit of Measure may vary,
depending upon the UOM Conversion Set associated with your Security User
account.
Inspection Interval Options area: Displays one check box for each option that you
can select to determine which inspection dates should be calculated for Thickness
Measurement Location records, and therefore, how the Scheduled Next Inspection
Date will be determined. The following text boxes are displayed:
Factor Remaining Life: The Factor Remaining Life Date will be

calculated using the Remaining Life Factor.
Inspection Interval: The Interval Next Inspection Date will be calculated

using the Default Inspection Interval.
Default T-Min text box: Displays the value that will be used as the Default T-Min
value on the T-Min Calculations page. If a corrosion analysis is performed on a
Thickness Measurement Location record with no value in the Minimum

Thickness field, the Meridium APM system will populate the Minimum
Thickness field with this value and use this value as the minimum thickness value
for the TM Analysis. This value is 0 (zero) by default. To the right of the Default
T-Min text box, the Unit of Measure associated with the Default T-Min is
displayed. The Unit of Measure may vary, depending upon the UOM Conversion
Set associated with your Security User account.
Minimum Corrosion Rate text box: Displays a default value is provided for new
Thickness Measurement Locations. This rate will be used as the Controlling
Corrosion Rate for the Thickness Measurement Location record whenever a
corrosion rate based on the data cannot be calculated. The Minimum Corrosion
rate is 5 Mils/year by default. To the right of the Minimum Corrosion Rate text
box, the Unit of Measure associated with the Minimum Corrosion Rate is
Use Minimum Corrosion Rate check box: A setting that specifies whether or not
you want to use the Minimum Corrosion Rate when the calculated corrosion rate
for a Thickness Measurement Location record is less than the specified Minimum
Corrosion Rate. If this check box is selected, when the Meridium APM system
calculates a corrosion rate for a Thickness Measurement Location record that is
less than the Minimum Corrosion Rate, the Minimum Corrosion Rate will be
used in place of the calculated value as the Thickness Measurement Location
record's Controlling Corrosion Rate.
Note: If the Use Minimum Corrosion Rate check box is cleared and only one Thickness
Measurement record is linked to a Thickness Measurement Location record, the
Minimum Corrosion Rate will still be used as the Controlling Corrosion Rate. The
Minimum Corrosion Rate will not be used if there are no Thickness Measurement records
linked to a Thickness Measurement Location record.
Remaining Life Factor text box: Displays a value that will be used in calculating
the Factor Remaining Life Date. The value in this text box should be the number
by which you want to multiply the Remaining Life in order to determine the
Scheduled Next Inspection Date. The value must be greater than 0 (zero) and less
than or equal to 1.
Allowable Measurement Variance text box: Displays a value that characterizes
how much difference is allowed between the values in the Measurement Value
fields of the two most recent Thickness Measurement records. Allowable
Measurement Variance will not be considered when thickness measurements are
evaluated if the value in this text box is 0 (zero). To the right of the Allowable
Measurement Variance text box, the Unit of Measure associated with the
Allowable Measurement Variance is displayed. The Unit of Measure may vary,
account.
Corrosion Rate Variance text box: Displays a value that represents the amount of
variation that is allowed between the Short Term Corrosion Rate for a given
Thickness Measurement Location record and the Minimum Corrosion Rate
defined in the Asset Analysis Settings. If this value is 0 (zero), Corrosion Rate
Variance validation will not be performed.
Accessing Existing TML Analysis

Settings
TML analysis settings define certain values and parameters that will be used by the TML
Corrosion Analysis. TML analysis settings, in addition to the settings defined in the
associated Corrosion Analysis Settings and Asset Corrosion Analysis records are used to
define all the settings that will be used in a given TM Analysis. Most analysis settings are
defined at the Equipment or TML Group level. A few, however, can be defined at the
TML level and apply to the specific Thickness Measurement Location record for which
they are defined.
To access the TML analysis settings for a Thickness Measurement Location record:
On the TM Analysis page, in the TM Explorer pane, select the node representing
the Thickness Measurement Location record whose settings you want to modify. The
following image shows a node representing a Thickness Measurement Location record

The TML Analysis Settings window appears.
Modifying TML Analysis Settings

To modify the TML analysis settings:
1. Access the TML Analysis Settings window for the Thickness Measurement
Location record whose settings you want to modify.
2. Make the desired changes.
3. Click the Update Settings button.
A message appears, indicating that the settings for the selected Thickness Measurement
Location record have been updated successfully.
Details of the TML Analysis Settings

You can use the TML Analysis settings window to define values and parameters that will
be used by the TML Corrosion Analysis.
The following items are enabled on the TML Analysis Settings window and can be
defined for an individual Thickness Measurement Location record. Additional, disabled
items are displayed on the TML Analysis Settings window. These disabled items apply to
the Asset Corrosion Analysis and cannot be modified at the TML level; they must be
defined at the Equipment or TML Group level.
Std Deviation Factor text box: Displays a value that determines where the upper
limit and lower limit will be drawn on the Asset Analysis Plot. For example, if
you type a value of 2 in the Std Deviation Factor text box, the upper limit and
lower limit lines will be drawn to represent a standard deviation of 2. This value
can help you see at a glance by looking at the Asset Analysis Plot whether or not
all of the TML corrosion rates fall within a desired range. This value is also used
for determining outliers when the Statistical Corrosion Rate method is used.
Default Inspection Interval text box: Displays the value that will be used as the
Default Inspection Interval. To the right of the Default Inspection Interval text
box, the Unit of Measure associated with the Default Inspection Interval is
Minimum Corrosion Rate text box: Displays a value that represents the default
corrosion rate that will be used if the Thickness Measurement Location record
does not have enough measurement data for the Meridium APM system to
calculate a corrosion rate or if criteria dictate that the corrosion rate should not be
calculated. Note that:
In the Asset Analysis Settings, you can select or clear the Use Minimum
Corrosion Rate check box. When this check box is selected, the Minimum
Corrosion Rate will be used as the Thickness Measurement Location
record's Controlling Corrosion Rate whenever the calculated corrosion
rate for a Thickness Measurement Location record is less than the
specified Minimum Corrosion Rate.
Whenever the Minimum Corrosion Rate is used instead of a calculated

corrosion rate, the Minimum Corrosion Rate Used check box will be
selected in the TML Corrosion Analysis record.
To the right of the Minimum Corrosion Rate text box, the Unit of Measure
associated with the Minimum Corrosion Rate is displayed. The Unit of Measure
may vary, depending upon the UOM Conversion Set associated with your
Security User account.
Allowable Measurement Variance text box: Displays a value that characterizes
how much difference is allowed between the values in the Measurement Value
fields of the two most recent Thickness Measurement records. Allowable
Measurement Variance will not be considered when thickness measurements are
evaluated if the value in this text box is 0 (zero). To the right of the Allowable
Measurement Variance text box, the Unit of Measure associated with the
Allowable Measurement Variance is displayed. The Unit of Measure may vary,
account.
Corrosion Rate Variance text box: Displays a value that represents the amount of
variation that is allowed between the Short Term Corrosion Rate for a given
Thickness Measurement Location record and the Minimum Corrosion Rate
defined in the Asset Analysis Settings. If this value is 0 (zero), Corrosion Rate
Variance validation will not be performed.
Accessing the Asset Corrosion Analysis

Plot
To access the plot for an Asset Corrosion Analysis:
the Equipment or TML Group record whose analysis plot you want to view. The
following image shows the node representing an Equipment record selected in the
TM Explorer pane.
2. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Plots link.

If the Equipment or TML Group record is linked to only one active Asset Corrosion
Analysis record, the Asset Analysis Plot page appears.
-orIf the Equipment or TML Group record is linked to more than one active Asset Corrosion
Analysis record (meaning that the Equipment or TML Group record is linked to
Thickness Measurement Location records of more than one TML Analysis Type), the
Select Analysis Type dialog box appears.
3. Select the type of Asset Corrosion Analysis whose plot you want to view, and
click OK.
The Asset Analysis Plot page appears.
Aspects of the Asset Analysis Plot

The Asset Analysis Plot page provides a visual representation of the Thickness
Measurement Location records that are linked to an Equipment or TML Group record.
The Controlling Corrosion Rate for each Thickness Measurement Location record is
plotted as a bar on the graph.
The Asset Analysis Plot page contains the following items:
Asset Analysis Plot workspace: Displays a bar graph that displays the controlling
corrosion rate for each TML Group record or Thickness Measurement Location
record that is linked to the Equipment record for which you accessed the Asset
Analysis Plot page.
functions that are available on the Asset Analysis Plot page. The following task
menus are available on the Asset Analysis Plot page:
Plot Tasks
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Asset Analysis Plot Graph

The main workspace of the Asset Analysis Plot page displays a bar graph that shows the
controlling corrosion rate of each Thickness Measurement Location record that is linked
to the Equipment or TML Group record for which you accessed the Asset Analysis Plot
page.
If your TM Analysis:
Includes TML Group records and you accessed the Asset Analysis Plot page for an
Equipment record that is linked to one or more TML Group records, the graph
will show the controlling corrosion rate associated with each TML Group record
that is linked to the Equipment record. If you accessed the Asset Analysis Plot
page for a TML Group record, the graph will show the controlling corrosion rate
associated with each Thickness Measurement Location record that is linked to the
TML Group record.
Does not include TML Group records, the graph will show the controlling
corrosion rate associated with each Thickness Measurement Location record that
is linked to the Equipment record for which you accessed the Asset Analysis Plot
page.
Three lines may also be drawn on the graph: Upper Limit, Average, and Lower Limit. The
Average line represents the average corrosion rate for all TML Group or Thickness
Measurement Location records. Note that this average is always based upon ALL
Thickness Measurement Location records linked to a given Equipment or TML Group
record, even if some Thickness Measurement Location records are excluded from
calculating the average Asset Controlling Corrosion Rate.
The Upper Limit and Lower Limit lines are drawn using the Standard Deviation Factor
defined in the Asset Analysis Settings.
Note: You can right-click any bar on the graph and then click Drill-down to access the
TML Analysis Plot for the selected Thickness Measurement Location record.
Plot Tasks
The Plot Tasks menu on the Asset Analysis Plot page contains the following links:
Copy Plot: Creates a copy of the plot so that you can paste it into another
application.
Plot Print Preview: Displays the Print Preview window, where you can define
print settings and print the plot.
Select Bad Actors: Displays the Filter Criteria dialog box, where you can select
the percentage of Thickness Measurement Location records or TML Group
records to include in the plot. This link is enabled only if:
The Equipment or TML Group record is linked to more than ten Thickness
-or
o
The Equipment record is linked to more than ten TML Group records.
Remove Filter: Removes any filters that you specified on the Filter Criteria
dialog box. This link is enabled only if you specified a filter on the Filter Criteria
dialog box.
Navigation
The Navigation menu on the Asset Analysis Plot page displays links to various Thickness
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Asset Analysis Plot page contains the following links:
Print: Displays the Print dialog box, where you can specify how you want to print
the plot.
Page.
Documents: This link is always disabled on the Asset Analysis Plot page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the Asset Analysis Plot page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the Asset Analysis Plot page displays links only if
Associated Pages have been configured for the family of the Equipment or TML Group
record for which you accessed the Asset Analysis Plot page. Otherwise, the Associated
Pages menu will be empty.
Accessing the TML Analysis Plot Page

The TML Analysis Plot page provides a visual representation of the measurement data
and corrosion rates that exist for a given Thickness Measurement Location record.
To access the TML Analysis Plot page:
the Thickness Measurement Location record whose plots you want to access. The
following image shows a node representing a Thickness Measurement Location
record in the TM Explorer pane.
2. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Plots link.

The TML Analysis Plot page appears.
Aspects of the TML Analysis Plot Page

The TML Analysis Plot page provides a visual representation of the Thickness
Measurement records that have been recorded and the corrosion rates that have been
calculated for each Thickness Measurement Location record. The plot will display one
line for each corrosion rate that has been calculated, including Long Term, Short Term,
Least Squares, and any custom corrosion rate that has been defined.
Note: The analysis settings defined for the Equipment or TML Group record determine
which corrosion rates will be calculated for each Thickness Measurement Location record
that is involved in a corrosion analysis.
In addition to the lines representing corrosion rates, the Minimum Thickness line also
appears. By locating the intersection of each corrosion rate line with the Minimum
Thickness line, you can see the date on which the TML will reach the minimum
thickness, based upon projection for that corrosion rate.
The TML Analysis Plot page contains of the following items:
TML Analysis Plot workspace: Displays the plot for the selected Thickness
Measurement Location record.
functions that are available on the TML Analysis Plot page. The following task
menus are available on the TML Analysis Plot page:
Plot Tasks
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Plot Tasks
The Plot Tasks menu on the TML Analysis Plot page contains the following links:
Copy Plot: Creates a copy of the plot so that you can paste it into another
application.
Plot Print Preview: Displays the Print Preview window, where you can define
print settings and print the plot.
Statistical Details: Displays the TML Analysis Details dialog box, where you can
view the statistical details of the TML Corrosion Analysis.
Note: The Statistical Details link will be enabled only if the Least Squares Corrosion
Rate has been calculated for the TML Corrosion Analysis, as determined by the Asset
Analysis Settings.
Navigation
The Navigation menu on the TML Analysis Plot page displays links to various Thickness
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the TML Analysis Plot page contains the following links:
Print: Displays the Print dialog box, where you can specify how you want to print
the plot.
Page.
Documents: This link is always disabled on the TML Analysis Plot page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the TML Analysis Plot page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages on the TML Analysis Plot page menu displays links only if
Associated Pages have been configured for the Thickness Measurement Location family.
Otherwise, the Associated Pages menu will be empty.
Viewing the Statistical Details

If the Least Squares Corrosion Rate has been calculated for the TML Corrosion Analysis,
you can access statistical details from the TML Analysis Plot page. The following
instructions provide details on accessing this statistical information from the TML
Analysis Plot page. You can also access these details from the TM Analysis page by
clicking the Statistical Details link on the Analysis Tasks menu.
To view the statistical details of a TML analysis plot:
On the TML Analysis Plot page, on the Plot Tasks menu, click the Statistical
Details link.
The TML Analysis Details dialog box appears.
Aspects of the Statistical Details

The TML Analysis Details dialog box displays the following statistical information about
the TML:
Descriptive Statistics
Minimum: The lowest Thickness Measurement value recorded for the TML. In a
typical TML Corrosion Analysis, this will be the Last Measurement Value, or the
Thickness Measurement that was recorded most recently.
Maximum: The highest Thickness Measurement value recorded for the TML. In a
typical TML Corrosion Analysis, this will be the Base Measurement Value, or the
Thickness Measurement that was recorded first chronologically.
Range: The difference between the maximum value and the minimum value (i.e.,
Maximum - Minimum). This value represents the total amount of corrosion that
has occurred at the TML.
Mean Abs. Deviation: A value that represents the average difference (i.e.,
deviation) of the Thickness Measurements from the mean measurement value.
This value is calculated by summing the difference between all measurement
values and the mean measurement value and dividing that value by the number of
measurements.
Mean: The average thickness of the TML, calculated by dividing the sum of all
Thickness Measurements by the number of measurements that have been recorded
for the TML.
Variance: A value that helps you determine how spread out the Thickness
Measurement values are.
Standard Deviation: A value that helps you determine how spread out the
Thickness Measurement values are. This value is calculated as the square root of
the Variance.
Skewness: A value that represents how symmetrical the Thickness Measurement

values are with respect to the center point. A negative number indicates that the
values are skewed to the left. A positive number indicates that the values are
skewed to the right.
Kurtosis: A value that indicates the peakedness of a distribution of Thickness

Measurements for the TML.
Linear Regression (Least Squares)
Valid: An indicator of whether or not the linear regression is valid (i.e., whether or
not the Least Squares Corrosion Rate is a reliable indicator of the TML corrosion
rate). A value of True means that it is valid; False indicates that it is invalid.
Meridium APM makes this determination by evaluating the statistical values that
have been calculated for the TML.
R2: A value that indicates how close the least squares regression line comes to the
actual, plotted Thickness Measurement values. A value of 1 (one) indicates a
perfect fit. As this value approaches zero, the fit becomes worse.
Chi-Squared: A value that indicates the quality of the fit of measurements with
respect to the least squares linear regression.
Min. Bound: The minimum X value used for plotting the least squares linear
regression. In this case, the Minimum Bound is 0, as the first plotted value is
recorded at the Base Measurement Date, or zero days.
Max. Bound: The maximum X value used for plotting the least squares linear
regression. In this case, the Maximum Bound is equal to the difference in days
between the Last Measurement Date and the Minimum Bound.
About the TM TMLs/Measurements

Page
You can use the TM TMLs/Measurements page to view and manage the Thickness
Measurement Location and Thickness Measurement records in a TM Analysis. If your
TM Analyses include TML Group records, you can also view and manage those records
using this page.
On the TM TMLs/Measurements page, you can:
View and manage all the Thickness Measurement Location records and Thickness
Measurement records that are linked to a given Equipment or TML Group record.
Access more information about any Thickness Measurement Location record or
Thickness Measurement record.
Perform various tasks related to Thickness Measurement Location records and
Thickness Measurement records, such as:
Create Thickness Measurement Location records.
Modify Thickness Measurement Location records.
Delete Thickness Measurement Location records.
Create Thickness Measurement records.
Modify Thickness Measurement records.
Delete Thickness Measurement records.
Perform various tasks related to TML Group records, such as:
Create TML Group records.
Modify TML Group records.
Link TML Group records to RBI Components.
Delete TML Group records.
Accessing the TM TMLs/Measurements

Page
The following instructions provide steps for accessing the TM TMLs/Measurements page
via the Thickness Monitoring Functions page. You can also access the TM
TMLs/Measurements page via the Navigation menu that appears throughout the TM
module.
To access the TM TMLs/Measurements page:
1. On the Thickness Monitoring Functions page, click the TMLs/Measurements link.
2. Perform a search to find the Equipment or TML Group records whose Thickness
Measurement Location records and Thickness Measurement records you want to
manage.
3. In the results list, select the Equipment or TML Group records for which you want
to access the TM TMLs/Measurements page, and then click the Open button.
The TM TMLs/Measurements page appears, displaying the Thickness Measurement
Location records and Thickness Measurement records for the selected Equipment or
TML Group records.
Overview of the TM
TMLs/Measurements Page
The TM TMLs/Measurements page displays all the Thickness Measurement Location
records and Thickness Measurement records that are included in a TM Analysis. The
page contains the following areas:
TM Explorer Pane: Contains a tree, which displays nodes to represent the records
in the TM Analysis.
Asset Pane: Displays the datasheet for the Equipment or TML Group record:
o
Whose node is currently selected in the TM Explorer pane.
To which the Thickness Measurement Location record whose node is

currently selected in the TM Explorer pane is linked.
That is associated with the Thickness Measurement record whose node is

currently selected in the TM Explorer pane.
-or-
-or-
TMLs Pane: Displays the Thickness Measurement Location records that are
currently linked to the Equipment or TML Group record whose node is selected in
the TM Explorer pane. This pane also displays various properties of each
Thickness Measurement Location record.
Measurements Pane: Displays the Thickness Measurement records that are linked
to the Thickness Measurement Location record that is selected in the TMLs pane
along with various properties of each Thickness Measurement record.
Task Menus: Appear on the task menu pane to the left side of the page and
provide you with quick access to functions that are available on the TM
TMLs/Measurements page. The following task menus are available on the TM
TMLs/Measurements page:
TM Tasks
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
TM Explorer
The TM Explorer pane on the TM TMLs/Measurements page displays nodes in a tree,
where each node represents one of the following items:
accessed the page.
The TM Explorer pane on the TM TMLs/Measurements page is displayed using the TMLs
and Measurements configured explorer, which is stored in the following folder in the
Meridium APM Catalog: \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Thickness Monitoring\Explorers.
The selected node determines what is displayed on the right side of the TM
When you select an Equipment or TML Group node in the TM Explorer pane:
o The Asset pane will display the details of the Equipment or TML Group
record whose node is selected.
o
The TMLs pane will display the Thickness Measurement Location records
that are linked to that Equipment or TML Group record.
When you select a Thickness Measurement Location node in the TM Explorer

pane:
o
The Asset pane will display the details of the Equipment or TML Group
record to which the associated Thickness Measurement Location record is
linked.
The TMLs pane will display the Thickness Measurement Location records
that are linked to that Equipment or TML Group record, and the row that
corresponds to your selection in the TM Explorer pane will be selected in
the TMLs pane.
The Measurements pane will display the Thickness Measurement records

that are linked to the Thickness Measurement Location record whose node
is selected.
When you select a Thickness Measurement node in the TM Explorer pane:

o
The Measurements pane will display all the Thickness Measurement

records that are linked to the Thickness Measurement Location record to
which the Thickness Measurement record whose node is selected is linked.
The Thickness Measurement record whose node is selected in the TM

Explorer will be selected in the Measurements pane, and the Thickness
Measurement Location record to which that Thickness Measurement
record is linked will be selected in the TMLs pane.
The Asset pane will display the details of the associated Equipment or
TML Group record.
Asset Pane
The Asset pane displays the details of the Equipment or TML Group record whose node
is selected in the TM Explorer pane. If a Thickness Measurement Location node or a
Thickness Measurement node is selected in the TM Explorer pane, the Asset pane will
display the details of the Equipment or TML Group record that is associated with the
Thickness Measurement Location or Thickness Measurement record whose node is
selected. The general features and behavior of the Asset pane are the same as that of
datasheets in the Record Manager. The Asset pane will display the datasheet that is
defined via the Configuration Manager as the default datasheet for the Equipment or
TML Group family. The following image displays the Asset pane for the TML Group
record with the Record ID D003-097-1.
Above the datasheet in the Asset pane, the Mapped to RBI Component label is displayed
when:
The Risk Based Inspection license is active.
-and
Via the Risk Based Inspection (RBI) module, in the reference Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record, you have specified that the TML Corrosion
rates associated with the current Equipment or TML Group record be used to
calculate RBI corrosion rates.
To the right of this label, the Record ID of the Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record for which you specified that TM Analysis values be used to calculate RBI
corrosion rate values is displayed. This value appears as a hyperlink. When you click this
hyperlink, the RBI Asset View page (in the RBI module) for the associated Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record is displayed.
You can collapse the Asset pane by clicking the button in the upper-right corner of the
Asset pane. You can expand the Asset pane by clicking the button when the Asset pane
is collapsed. Meridium APM will save the collapsed or expanded view of the Asset pane
so that each time you log in to the Meridium APM Framework application, the Asset pane
will be in the same position that it was the last time you used the TM
You can change the height of the Asset pane by pointing to the border at the bottom of the
Asset pane and dragging it to the desired location. The pointer will change to indicate that
the bottom of the Asset pane can be moved.
TMLs Pane
The TMLs pane displays all the Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked
to the Equipment or TML Group record whose details are displayed in the Asset pane.
The TMLs pane contains a grid that is separated into rows and columns, where each row
represents a single Thickness Measurement Location record, and each column represents
a field in a Thickness Measurement Location record or the TML Corrosion Analysis
record that is linked to that Thickness Measurement Location record. The intersection of
each row and column forms a cell, which displays the current value for a given field in a
given record. A horizontal scroll bar is available to let you view the entire contents of
each row.
By default, the grid in the TMLs pane is sorted by the TML ID column so that the
Thickness Measurement Location records are displayed in ascending order by their TML
IDs. The TML ID column is locked into place and cannot be moved or removed. It will
remain in view on the far-left side of the grid when you use the scroll bar to view fields in
columns on the right side of the grid. The TML ID field for Thickness Measurement
Location records may be colored based on certain conditions.
You can customize the display of the grid, including the sort order, column display, and
filters using standard grid customization options. Any changes that you make to the grid
will be saved and used in place of the default grid settings the next time you access the
TM TMLs/Measurements page. You can also use the Edit Filter button at the bottom-right
of the grid to create custom filters. The five most recent custom filters that you used will
be saved.
Note: The type-ahead feature that you can use elsewhere in the product does not work in
the grid in the TMLs pane.
At the top of the TMLs pane, the TML Analysis Type list is displayed and contains the
following options:
The TML Analysis Types that are associated with the TM Analysis: Displays one
or more of the following values, depending upon the analysis types that are
associated with the Equipment or TML Group record that is displayed as the root
node in the TM Explorer pane: UT, RT, and TML.
The value ALL: When you select the value ALL in this list, the grid will display
all Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to the selected
Equipment or TML Group record. This option is selected by default.
To the right of the TML Analysis Type list, the Active TMLs only check box is displayed.
Each time you access the TM TMLs/Measurements page, this check box is selected so
that only active Thickness Measurement Location records are displayed in the grid. If you
want to see inactive Thickness Measurement Location records, clear the Active TMLs
only check box.
A toolbar is also displayed at the top of the TMLs pane and allows you to perform
functions specific to Thickness Measurement Location records. The toolbar offers the
options described in the following table.
Button Description
Displays the New TML dialog box, where you can supply information for
required fields and create a new Thickness Measurement Location record for
the selected Equipment or TML Group record.
Displays a confirmation message and then deletes the selected Thickness
Displays the TML ID dialog box, where you can specify the TML ID of the
new Thickness Measurement Location record, which will be a copy of the
selected Thickness Measurement Location record.
Displays the Create Multiple Copies of TML dialog box, where you can specify
the number of copies of the selected Thickness Measurement Location record
to create.
Displays a drop-down menu, where you can choose to view the details of the
selected Thickness Measurement Location record or the details of the TML
Corrosion Analysis record that is linked to that Thickness Measurement
Location record.
Displays the Preview window, where you can view and print a copy of the
information that is displayed in the grid.
Measurements Pane
The Measurements pane displays all the Thickness Measurement records that are linked
to the Thickness Measurement Location record that is selected in the grid in the TMLs
pane. For example, in the following image, the Measurements pane displays the
Thickness Measurement records that are linked to Thickness Measurement Location
record D0003-097-1-A.
The Measurements pane contains a grid that is separated into rows and columns, where
each row represents a single Thickness Measurement record. Each column represents a
field in a Thickness Measurement record. The intersection of each row and column forms
a cell, which displays the current value for a given field in a given record. A horizontal
scroll bar is available to let you view the entire contents of each row.
By default, the grid in the Measurements pane is sorted by the Measurement Taken Date
column so that the Thickness Measurement records are displayed in the order in which
they were recorded. The Measurement ID column is appears on the far left of the grid and
is locked into place so that it cannot be moved or removed. It will remain in view on the
far-left side of the Measurements grid when you use the scroll bar to view fields in
columns on the right side of the Measurements grid. The Measurement ID field for
Thickness Measurement records will be colored based on certain conditions.
You can customize the display of the grid, including the sort order, column display, and
filters using standard grid customization options. Any changes that you make to the grid
will be saved and used in place of the default grid settings the next time you access the
TM TMLs/Measurements page. You can also use the Edit Filter button at the bottom-right
of the grid to create custom filters. The five most recent custom filters that you used will
be saved.
Note: The type-ahead feature that you can use elsewhere in list fields does not work in
the grid in the Measurements pane.
At the top of the Measurements pane, the Active Measurements only check box is
displayed. Each time you visit the TM TMLs/Measurements page, this check box is
selected so that only active Thickness Measurements records are displayed in the grid. If
you want to see inactive Thickness Measurement records, clear the Active Measurements
only check box.
A toolbar is also displayed at the top of the Measurements pane and allows you to
perform functions specific to Thickness Measurement records. The toolbar offers the
options described in the following table.
Button Description
Displays the New Measurement dialog box, where you can supply information
for required fields and create a new Thickness Measurement record for the
Thickness Measurement Location record that is selected in the TMLs pane.
Displays a confirmation message and then deletes the selected Thickness
Measurement record.
Displays a drop-down menu from which you can access details about the
Thickness Measurement record that is currently selected in the grid.
information that is displayed in the grid.
TM Tasks
The TM Tasks menu on the TM TMLs/Measurements page contains the following links:
one or more different Equipment or TML Group records and display them on the
Save and Analyze: Saves any changes that you have made on the TM
TMLs/Measurements page and updates calculations in the TM Analysis. This link
is enabled only if the analysis settings necessary for updating the TM Analysis
exist and you have modified the TM Analysis since you accessed the TM
Renew TMLs: Displays the Renew TMLs dialog box, where you can renew
selected Thickness Measurement Location records. This link is enabled only if
one or more Thickness Measurement Location records are linked to the
Equipment or TML Group record whose node is currently selected in the TM
Explorer pane.
Audit Information: Displays the Audit Information dialog box, which shows when
the most recently updated record in the TM Analysis was last updated and who
updated it. This link is enabled only if one or more Thickness Measurement
Location records are linked to the Equipment or TML Group record whose node
is currently selected in the TM Explorer pane.
View Tasks: Displays the Task List page in Task Management, where you can view
the Thickness Monitoring Task records that are linked to an Equipment or TML
Group record in the TM Analysis. This link is enabled only if one or more
Analysis Settings: Displays the TM Analysis Settings dialog box, where you can
view the settings that are defined in the Corrosion Analysis Settings record that is
linked to the Thickness Measurement Location record selected in the grid in the
TMLs pane. This link is enabled only if one or more Thickness Measurement
Location records are linked to the Equipment or TML Group record whose node
is currently selected in the TM Explorer pane.
are used to calculate certain values displayed on the TM TMLs/Measurements
page.
Move TMLs: Displays one of the following items, depending upon the type of
node that is selected in the TM Explorer pane:
If a TML Group node is selected, and that node is not the root node in the
TM Explorer pane, the Move TMLs to <Record ID> builder is displayed,
where <Record ID> is the Record ID of the TML Group record whose
node is selected in the TM Explorer pane and to which you want to move
Thickness Measurement Location records that are currently associated
with a different record in the same TM Analysis.
If any node other than a TML Group node is selected or the selected node
represents a TML Group record and is the root node in the TM Explorer
pane, the Move TMLs builder is displayed, which you can use to move
Thickness Measurement Location records associated with the current TM
Analysis to a different TM Analysis.
Create TML Group: Creates a new TML Group record and an associated
Corrosion Analysis Settings record using values in the Corrosion Analysis
Settings record that is linked to the Equipment record whose node appears at the
root level in the TM Explorer pane. This link is enabled and functions as expected
when all of the following conditions are met:
The Equipment record whose node appears at the root level in the TM
Explorer pane:
Is selected.
Is not linked as a predecessor to another Equipment record.
Is linked to a Corrosion Analysis Settings record.
You have defined the following Subcomponent Relationship settings:
Asset-to-Subcomponent Relationship, where the Equipment family

is linked to the TML Group family via the Has TML Group
relationship definition.
Subcomponent-to-Asset Relationship, where the TML Group

family is linked to the Equipment family via the Has TML Group
relationship definition.
Delete TML Group: After displaying a confirmation message, deletes the selected
TML Group record and the Thickness Measurement Location, Corrosion Analysis
Settings, TML Corrosion Analysis, and Asset Corrosion Analysis records to which
it is linked.
Link to RBI Component: Displays the Link to RBI Component dialog box, where
you can select the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that you want to
link to the TML Group record whose node is selected in the TM Explorer pane.
This link is enabled when all of the following conditions are met:
The Risk Based Inspection (RBI) license is active.
The root node in the TM Explorer pane represents an Equipment record

that is linked to one or more Criticality Calculator RBI Components
records.
One or more Criticality Calculator RBI Components records to which the

Equipment record is linked contains in the Calculated Corrosion Rate
Source field the value Component.
Navigation
The Navigation menu on the TM TMLs/Measurements page displays links to various

Monitoring.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the TM TMLs/Measurements page contains the following
links:
Print: Displays the Preview window, from which you can print the information
displayed in the Asset pane.
Page.
Documents: Displays the Reference Documents window, where you can manage
Reference Document records for the record represented by the node that is
selected in the TM Explorer pane. This link is enabled only when you select a
node in the TM Explorer pane that represents a record that is related to the
Reference Document family through the Has Reference Documents relationship.
In the baseline Meridium APM database, this link is enabled only when an
Equipment node is selected in the TM Explorer pane.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the TM TMLs/Measurements

page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages on the TM TMLs/Measurements page menu displays links only if
Creating TML Group Records

If your TM Analyses include TML Group records, you can create TML Group records
using the following instructions. These instructions assume that the following settings are
defined:
Analysis settings for the Equipment record to which you want to link a new TML
Group record.
The Asset-to-Subcomponent Relationship, where the Equipment family is linked
to the TML Group family via the Has TML Group relationship definition.
The Subcomponent-to-Asset Relationship, where the TML Group family is linked
to the Equipment family via the Has TML Group relationship definition.
To create a new TML Group record:

1. Access the TM TMLs/Measurements page for the Equipment record to which you
want to link a new TML Group record.
The TM TMLs/Measurements page appears. In the TM Explorer pane, the root
Equipment node is selected by default.
2. On the TM Tasks menu, click the Create TML Group link.

o If the analysis settings for the Equipment record to which you are linking
the TML Group record is associated with only one TML Analysis Type
(e.g., UT), the TML Group record is created, and a new node representing
the TML Group record appears in the TM Explorer pane.
In addition, a new Corrosion Analysis Settings record is created and linked to the TML
Group record. Values that are stored in the Corrosion Analysis Settings record to which
the parent Equipment record is linked are used to populate the fields in the Corrosion
Analysis Settings record that is linked directly to the TML Group record.
o
If the analysis settings for the Equipment record to which you are linking
the TML Group record is associated with more than one TML Analysis
Type (e.g., TML and UT), the Select Analysis Types dialog box appears,
displaying the TML Analysis Types for which analysis settings can be
created for the new TML Group record. All options are selected by default.
The following image shows an example of what this dialog box would
look like if analysis settings for the TML Analysis Types TML and UT
existed for the Equipment record for which you were creating a TML
Group record.
In this case, proceed to the next step in these instructions.

3. On the Select Analysis Types dialog box:
o Accept the default selection, and click OK.
-oro
Clear the check box that is associated with any TML Analysis Type for
which you do not want to create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for
the new TML Group record, and click OK.
The Select Analysis Types dialog box closes, the TML Group record is created, and a new
node representing the TML Group record appears in the TM Explorer pane. Additionally,
one or more Corrosion Analysis Settings records are created automatically and linked
directly to the TML Group record. Using the preceding example, if you accepted the
default selection, two Corrosion Analysis Settings records would be created automatically
for the new TML Group record: One Corrosion Analysis Settings record containing the
value TML in the Corrosion Inspection Type field and one Corrosion Analysis Settings
record containing the value UT in the Corrosion Inspection Type field.
Modifying Equipment and TML Group

Records
You can modify the properties of Equipment and TML Group records on the TM
TMLs/Measurements page using the datasheet that is displayed in the Asset pane. The
general features and behavior of the datasheet are the same as that of the Record
Manager.
To modify an Equipment or TML Group record on the TM TMLs/Measurements page:
1. In the TM Explorer pane, select the node representing the Equipment or TML
Group record that you want to modify. In the following image, the Equipment
node 039-0001 Overheard Line (Piping Circuit) is selected.
The Asset pane is updated to display the information that is stored in the associated
Equipment or TML Group record. The following image displays the Asset pane for
the Equipment record with Asset ID 039-0001.
2. In the Asset pane, modify the value of one or more fields in the datasheet. The
following image displays the Asset pane. Note that the Asset Status field has been
populated with the value Functional.
3. On the TM Tasks menu, click the Save and Analyze link.

The changes made to the Equipment or TML Group record and any other changes that
you make on the TM TMLs/Measurements page are saved. If you made changes that
would require the corrosion analysis to be updated, the necessary updates are made.
About Linking TML Group Records to

RBI Components
When the Risk Based Inspection (RBI) license is active, you can use TML Corrosion
Analysis values to determine corrosion rate values in RBI. When you do so, you must
perform most steps in this workflow within the RBI module. If you want to specify that
TM values at the TML Group level be used to calculate RBI corrosion rate values,
however, you can perform this step using TM rather than RBI.
To do this, you will link a TML Group record to a Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record that is linked to the Equipment record with which the TML Group record is
associated. When you link a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record to a TML
Group record, RBI corrosion rate values for the RBI Analysis that you create from that
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record will be based upon the average of the
following values in the TML Corrosion Analysis records that are linked to the TML
Group record:
In other words, the values in the preceding list will determine the following values in the
Criticality Int. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval record that is associated with the RBI Analysis that
is created from the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that you linked to the
TML Group record:
Short Term Ave. Corr. Rate

Long Term Avg. Corr. Rate
Linking a TML Group Record to an

RBI Component
You can use the Link to RBI Component dialog box to specify that TM Analysis values at
the TML Group level be used to calculate RBI corrosion rate values. When you do this,
TML Corrosion Analysis values that are associated with the TML Group record will be
used to determine RBI corrosion rates for the RBI Analysis that is associated with the
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that you select. You can also accomplish
this task via the Risk Based Inspection (RBI) module using the Link to TML Groups
dialog box. The method that you use will be determined by various factors, but you
should use the method that makes the most sense for the workflow you are currently
executing.
Note: When you use the TM module to select TML Group records to link to a Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record, you will do so for only one TML Group record at a
time. Alternatively, via the RBI module, you can select more than one TML Group record
at a time to link to a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
The following instructions assume that the following criteria are met:
The Risk Based Inspection (RBI) license is active.
-and
You have accessed the TM TMLs/Measurements page for a TM Analysis that

contains:
o An Equipment record that is linked to one or more Criticality Calculator
RBI Components records.
o
One or more TML Group records.
-and
One or more Criticality Calculator RBI Components records to which the

Equipment record is linked contain in the Calculated Corrosion Rate Source field
the value Component.
To link a TML Group record to an RBI Component:

1. In the TM Explorer pane, select the TML Group node representing the TML
Group record whose TML Corrosion Analysis values you want to use to calculate
RBI corrosion rates. In the following image, the TML Group node TMLGRP64252384924 is highlighted in the TM Explorer pane.
2. On the TM Tasks menu, click the Link to RBI Component link.

The Link to RBI Component dialog box appears, displaying the Select RBI Component to
Link to TML Group <Record ID> screen, where <Record ID> is the Record ID of the
TML Group record that is associated with the node that is selected in the TM Explorer
pane.
3. In the grid on the Select RBI Component to Link to TML Group <Record ID>
screen, select the check box to the left of the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record for which you want to use TM Analysis values to calculate
RBI corrosion rates. In the following image, the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record with the Record ID Cylindrical Shell ~ HXST 141 is selected.
4. Click OK.
The dialog box closes, and the TM TMLs/Measurements page returns to focus.
The Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that you selected on the Link to RBI
Component dialog box is linked to the TML Group record for which you accessed the
dialog box through the Mapped to RBI Component relationship, where the TML Group
family is the predecessor.
When you create an RBI Analysis for the selected Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record, the values in the following fields in the Criticality Int. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval
record that is created automatically are calculated based upon the TML Corrosion
Analysis values that are associated with the TML Group record.
o
o
Short Term Avg. Corr. Rate

Long Term Avg. Corr. Rate
Printing the Details of Equipment and

TML Group Records
On the TM TMLs/Measurements page, you can print the details of an Equipment or TML
Group record.
To print the details of an Equipment or TML Group record:
Group record whose details you want to print. In the following image, the
Equipment node 039-0001 Overheard Line (Piping Circuit) is selected.
2. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Print link.

The Preview window appears.
3. Click the
button to open the Print window, where you can change the print
settings and then print the details of the Equipment or TML Group record.
-orClick the
button to print the details of the Equipment or TML Group record with
your default print settings.
The details of the Equipment or TML Group record are sent to your selected printer.
Deleting TML Group Records

To delete a TML Group record:
1. Access the TM TMLs/Measurements page for the Equipment record that is linked
to the TML Group that you want to delete.
The TM TMLs/Measurements page appears. In the TM Explorer pane, the root
Equipment node is selected by default.
2. In the TM Explorer pane, select the TML Group node representing the TML
Group record that you want to delete.
3. On the TM Tasks menu, click the Delete TML Group link.
A confirmation message is displayed, identifying the records that will be deleted in
addition to the TML Group record and asking if you are sure you want to continue.
The TML Group record and the Thickness Measurement Location, Thickness
Measurement, Corrosion Analysis Settings, TML Corrosion Analysis, and Asset
Corrosion Analysis records to which it is linked are deleted from the database, the TM
TMLs/Measurements page returns to focus, and the TML Group node representing the
deleted TML Group record is removed from the TM Explorer pane.
About Creating New Thickness

Measurement Location Records
After you have identified a location on a piece of equipment where you want to record
thickness measurements, you will need to create a Thickness Measurement Location
record for that location and save it to the database. On the TM TMLs/Measurements page,
you have the following options for creating new Thickness Measurement Location
records:
You can create a new Thickness Measurement Location record from scratch.
You can copy an existing Thickness Measurement Location record and use it as a
template for creating a new Thickness Measurement Location record. This option
is useful if you need to create a Thickness Measurement Location record with
properties that are similar to the properties of an existing Thickness Measurement
Location record.
You can create multiple copies of an existing Thickness Measurement Location

record at once. This option is useful if you need to create several Thickness
Measurement Location records with similar properties.
When you create a new Thickness Measurement Location record via the TM
It will be linked automatically to the Equipment or TML Group record whose

node is selected in the TM Explorer pane.
A Corrosion Analysis Settings record will be created automatically using the
analysis settings that are specified for the selected Equipment or TML Group
record and linked to the Thickness Measurement Location record.
A TML Corrosion Analysis record will be created and linked to the Thickness
After you have created a new Thickness Measurement Location record and saved it to the
database, you can view and modify the details of that record on the TML Datasheet. You
can view the details of the associated TML Corrosion Analysis record on the TML
Corrosion Analysis Datasheet.
Note: You cannot create Thickness Measurement Location records for an Equipment or
TML Group record until analysis settings have been defined for that Equipment or TML
Group record. Additionally, before Thickness Measurement Location records can be
created for an Equipment or TML Group record, the Component ID Field setting must be
defined for the Equipment or TML Group family.
Creating a New Thickness Measurement

Location Record from Scratch
To create a new Thickness Measurement Location record:
1. On the TM TMLs/Measurements page, in the TM Explorer pane, select the node
representing the Equipment or TML Group record for which to create a new
Thickness Measurement Location record. In the following image, the Equipment
node ~ ~ AQA Test TML Plot is selected.
2. On the toolbar at the top of TMLs pane, click the
button.
The New TML dialog box appears.
3. In the TML ID text box, type an ID for the Thickness Measurement Location
record. Note that the TML ID must be unique with respect to the Thickness
Measurement Location records that are already linked to the current Equipment or
TML Group record. In this example, New TML 101 has been typed in the TML
ID text box.
4. In the TML Analysis Type list, select the desired TML Analysis Type. The TML
Analysis Type list will include any TML Analysis Type for which analysis
settings exist.
Note: The New TML dialog box displays all the fields that are required in a Thickness
Measurement Location record. In the baseline Thickness Monitoring module, only TML
ID and TML Analysis Type are required. If your implementation has been customized to
require additional fields, they will be displayed on the New TML dialog box. You will
need to supply a value for each required field before you can save the Thickness
5. Click OK.
A row containing the new Thickness Measurement Location record is added to the grid in
the TMLs pane. In the following image, the Thickness Measurement Location record
with TML ID TML09 is outlined in red.
6. Define the TML properties as desired. You can use the scroll bar at the bottom of
the grid to view all the available fields.
The new Thickness Measurement Location record is saved to the database along with any
other unsaved changes that you have made on the TM TMLs/Measurements page, and the
TM Analysis is updated. After you have created one or more Thickness Measurement
Location records, you can create new Thickness Measurements for those Thickness
Copyright 1993-2005 Meridium APM, Inc.
Copying an Existing Thickness

Measurement Location Record
If you need to create a Thickness Measurement Location record with properties that are
similar to the properties of an existing Thickness Measurement Location record, you can
copy an existing Thickness Measurement Location record and use it as a template for
creating a new Thickness Measurement Location record.
To copy an existing Thickness Measurement Location record:

representing the Equipment or TML Group record to which the Thickness
Measurement Location record you want to copy is linked. In the following image,
the Equipment node ~ ~ AQA Test TML Plot is selected.
2. In the grid in the TMLs pane, select the Thickness Measurement Location record
that you want to use as a template for creating a new Thickness Measurement
Location record. In the following image, the Thickness Measurement Location
record with the TML ID TML01 is selected.
3. On the toolbar at the top of the TMLs pane, click the
button.
The TML ID dialog box appears.
4. In the Enter new TML ID text box, type a unique ID for the Thickness
Measurement Location record. Note that the TML ID must be unique with respect
to the Thickness Measurement Location records that are already linked to the
selected Equipment or TML Group record. In the following image, the TML ID
TML01-1 has been entered.
5. Click OK.
A row containing the new Thickness Measurement Location record is added to the grid in
the TMLs pane. The row contains the information for the Thickness Measurement
Location record that you selected to use as a template and the new TML ID that you
specified on the TML ID dialog box. All fields in the new Thickness Measurement
Location record will contain the information from the Thickness Measurement Location
record that you used as a template except for the Status Changed By, Status Changed
Date, and Exclude from Analysis fields. In the following image, a row containing the
Thickness Measurement Location record with TML ID TML01-1 is outlined in red.
6. If desired, edit any of the existing TML properties, or define the desired additional
properties.
The new Thickness Measurement Location record is saved to the database along with any
other unsaved changes that you have made on the TM TMLs/Measurements page, and the
TM Analysis is updated. After you have created the Thickness Measurement Location
record, you can begin recording Thickness Measurements for the TML.
Creating Multiple Copies of an Existing

Thickness Measurement Location
Record
If you need to create several Thickness Measurement Location records with similar
properties, you can create multiple copies of a Thickness Measurement Location record
and use it as a template for creating multiple, new Thickness Measurement Location
records.
To create multiple copies of an existing Thickness Measurement Location record:
representing the Equipment or TML Group record for which you want to create
multiple, new Thickness Measurement Location records. In the following image,
the Equipment node ~ ~ AQA Test TML Plot is selected.
that you want to use as a template for creating a new Thickness Measurement
Location records, as shown in the following image.

The Create Multiple Copies of TML dialog box appears.
button.
4. In the Number of copies text box, type the number of copies you want to create.
The number you specify must be between 1 and 100. In this example, we have
chosen to create three copies of the Thickness Measurement Location record with
TML IDTML01.
5. Click OK.
6. A new row is added to the grid in the TMLs pane for each copy that was created.
If the copy operation was successful, a message will appear on the Create
Multiple Copies of TML dialog box, indicating that the process was completed
successfully. All fields in the new Thickness Measurement Location records will
contain the information from the Thickness Measurement Location record that
you used as a template for the new copies except for the Status Changed By,
Status Changed Date, and Exclude from Analysis fields. In the following image,
the rows containing the three new Thickness Measurement Location records that
were created as copies of the Thickness Measurement Location record with TML
ID TML01 are outlined in red.
7. Click the Close button.

8. If desired, edit any of the existing TML properties, or define the desired additional
properties.
The new Thickness Measurement Location records are saved to the database along with
any other unsaved changes that you have made on the TM TMLs/Measurements page,
and the is updated. After you have copied the Thickness Measurement Location records,
you can begin recording Thickness Measurements for the TMLs.
Accessing the TML Datasheet

The details of Thickness Measurement Location records are displayed in the TMLs pane
on the TM TMLs/Measurements page. You can scroll to the right in the grid to view all of
the columns of information displayed for each Thickness Measurement Location record.
Additionally, you can view the details of a single Thickness Measurement Location
record using the TML datasheet.
To view the details of a Thickness Measurement Location record using the TML
datasheet:
representing the Thickness Measurement Location record for which you want to
view the details. In the following image, TML01 UT Active is selected.
whose details you want to view. In the following image, the Thickness
Measurement Location Record with the TML ID TML01 is selected.

TML Datasheet.
button, and then click
The Thickness Measurement Location window appears, displaying the details of the
Aspects of the TML Datasheet

The Thickness Measurement Location window displays the details of the Thickness
Measurement Location record that you selected on the TM TMLs/Measurements page.
The General Information tab is selected by default.
A toolbar is also displayed above the datasheet and contains the following options:
Displays the Preview window, where you can view and print the information that
is displayed on the Thickness Measurement Location window.
Displays the Reference Documents window, where you can manage Reference
Document records that are linked to the Thickness Measurement Location record.
Note: This button is enabled only if the Thickness Measurement Location family is
related to the Reference Document family through the Has Reference Documents
relationship.
Displays the historical values for the selected field.
Accessing the TML Corrosion Analysis

Datasheet
You can view the details of a TML Corrosion Analysis in the TMLs pane on the TM
TMLs/Measurements page. You can also view the corrosion analysis details on the TML
Corrosion Analysis datasheet.
To access the TML Corrosion Analysis datasheet:
representing the Equipment or TML Group record that is linked to the Thickness
Measurement Location record for which you want to view the details. In the
following image, TML01 UT Active is selected.
whose analysis details you want to view. The following image shows the
Thickness Measurement Location record with TML ID TML051 selected in the
TMLs pane.

TML Corrosion Analysis Datasheet.
The TML Analysis Datasheet window for the selected Thickness Measurement Location
record appears. The TML Analysis Datasheet window displays the fields associated with
the TML Corrosion Analysis.
Aspects of the TML Corrosion Analysis

Datasheet
The TML Analysis Datasheet window displays the details of the TML Corrosion Analysis
that is linked to the Thickness Measurement Location record that you selected on the TM
TMLs/Measurements page. The Datasheet list is displayed above the datasheet area and
displays a list of the datasheets that have been configured for the TML Corrosion
Analysis family.
is displayed on the TML Analysis Datasheet window.
Note: This button is enabled only if the Thickness Measurement Location family is
related to the Reference Document family through the Has Reference Documents
relationship.
About Renewing Thickness

Renewing Thickness Measurement Location records provides a mechanism for recording
a new base measurement for a Thickness Measurement Location record and setting all
existing Thickness Measurement records to Inactive. Additionally, the value that was the
Thickness Measurement Location record's Controlling Corrosion Rate prior to the
renewal will become the Minimum Corrosion Rate value in the associated Corrosion
Analysis Settings record after the renewal. You have two options for renewing Thickness
Measurement Location records. You can:
Renew Thickness Measurement Location records and add new measurements.

Renew Thickness Measurement Location records without adding new
measurements.
Generally, you will want to renew Thickness Measurement Location records when you
replace a piece of equipment. For example, if an Equipment record representing a tank is
linked to one or more Thickness Measurement Location records for which Thickness
Measurement records have been created, when you replace the tank, you can renew the
Thickness Measurement Location records to retain the measurement data recorded for the
old tank while creating a new base measurement for the new tank. When you do this, you
can begin performing corrosion analyses for the new tank.
When you renew a Thickness Measurement Location record:
The Measurement Status Indicator field for any Thickness Measurement record
whose Measurement Status Indicator field was set to Active prior to the renewal
will be set to Inactive.
The value in the Historical Sequence Number field in the associated Thickness
Measurement records that were used during that life cycle will be incremented.
For example, if the Historical Sequence Number field previously contained no
value, indicating that the associated Thickness Measurement Location had never
been renewed, it will now be 1 (one), indicating that the associated Thickness
Measurement Location record has been renewed one time.
The value in the Renew Historical Sequence Number field in the Thickness
Measurement Location record will be populated with the largest Historical
Sequence Number in the associated Thickness Measurement records that were
used during that life cycle. For example, if there are two associated Thickness
Measurement records that were used during that life cycle and one's Historical
Sequence Number is 1 and the other's is 2, the Renew Historical Sequence
Number field in the Thickness Measurement Location record would be populated
with the value 2. This will keep track of the life cycle for that Thickness
The value in the Status Changed By field will be changed to the User ID for the
Security User who renewed the Thickness Measurement Location record.
The value in the Status Changed Date field will change to the current date.
Renewing Thickness Measurement

Location Records and Adding New
Measurements
You can renew Thickness Measurement Location records and immediately add the new
base measurement for each renewed Thickness Measurement Location record. The
Meridium APM system will make the necessary updates to the Thickness Measurement
Location records and navigate to the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page.
To renew TMLs and add new measurements:
representing the Equipment or TML Group record whose Thickness Measurement
Location records you want to renew, as shown in the following image.
2. On the TM Tasks menu, click the Renew TMLs link.

The Renew TMLs dialog box appears, displaying a list of Thickness Measurement
Location records, depending upon the node that you selected in the TM Explorer pane
and whether or not your TM Analysis includes TML Group records.
If your TM Analysis includes TML Group records and you selected:
An Equipment node, all the Thickness Measurement Location records that

are linked to all the associated TML Group records are displayed in the
list.
A TML Group node, all the Thickness Measurement Location records that
are linked to that TML Group record are displayed in the list.
If your TM Analysis does not include TML Group records, all the Thickness
Measurement Location records that are linked to the selected Equipment record
are displayed in the list.
3. In the Renew TML column, select the check box for any Thickness Measurement
Location record that you want to renew. The Renew and Renew and Add New
Measurements buttons will remain disabled until you select the check box for one
or more Thickness Measurement Location records to renew.
4. Click the Renew and Add New Measurements button.

Your changes are saved along with any other unsaved changes that you have made on the
TM TMLs/Measurements page, the TM Analysis is updated, and a message appears
indicating that the Thickness Measurement Location records were renewed successfully.
After the Renew TMLs dialog box closes, the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry
page appears, displaying the Thickness Measurement Locations records that you just
renewed. The date in the Measurement Taken Date field is automatically set to the current
date and time. If desired, you can change this value.
5. Update the Thickness Measurement Location records with the new measurement
data.
6. On the Measurement Tasks menu, click the Save and Analyze link.
New Thickness Measurement records are created using the Measurement Taken Dates
and Measurement Values that you provided, and the TM Analysis is updated. A message
appears indicating that the Thickness Measurement Location records were updated
successfully. If you view the Thickness Measurement Location record, you will see that:
A new Thickness Measurement record has been created and linked to the
The Measurement Value is the value that you specified on the TM Initial
The value in the Measurement Status Indicator field is set to Active.
Renewing Thickness Measurement

Location Records Without Adding New
Measurements
You can renew Thickness Measurement Location records without having to add new
thickness measurements at the same time. The Meridium APM system will save the
changes to the Thickness Measurement Location records and update the TM Analysis.
To renew TMLs and add new measurements:
Location records you want to renew, as shown in the following image.
2. On the TM Tasks menu, click the Renew TMLs link.

The Renew TMLs dialog box appears, displaying a list of Thickness Measurement
Location records, depending upon the node that you selected in the TM Explorer pane
and whether or not your TM Analysis includes TML Group records.
If your TM Analysis includes TML Group records and you selected:
An Equipment node, all the Thickness Measurement Location

records that are linked to all the associated TML Group records are
displayed in the list.
A TML Group node, all the Thickness Measurement Location
records that are linked to that TML Group record are displayed in
the list.
If your TM Analysis does not include TML Group records, all the
Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to the selected
Equipment record are displayed in the list.
3. In the Renew TML column, select the check box for any Thickness Measurement
Location record that you want to renew. The Renew and Renew and Add New
Measurements buttons will remain disabled until you select the check box for one
or more Thickness Measurement Location records to renew.
4. Click the Renew button.

Your changes are saved, along with any other unsaved changes that you have made on the
TM TMLs/Measurements page, and the TM Analysis is updated. A message appears
indicating that the Thickness Measurement Location records were renewed successfully,
and the TM TMLs/Measurements page refreshes to display the changes.
Modifying a Record Using the Thickness

Measurement Location Datasheet
You can modify the properties of a Thickness Measurement Location record using the
Thickness Measurement Location datasheet, which provides you with a concise view of a
single Thickness Measurement Location record. This option may be useful if you need to
modify multiple fields, related fields, or fields that are not displayed by default in the grid
in the TMLs pane.
To modify an existing Thickness Measurement Location record using the Thickness
Measurement Location datasheet:
representing the Thickness Measurement Location record that you want to
modify. In the following image, TML01 UT Active is selected.
The selected Thickness Measurement Location record is displayed and selected in the
grid in the TMLs pane.

TML Datasheet.
3. Modify the TML properties as desired. The general features and behavior of the
datasheet are the same as that of the Record Manager.
4. When you have finished making changes, click OK.
The changes made to the Thickness Measurement Location record and any other changes
that you made on the TM TMLs/Measurements page are saved. If you made changes that
would require the TM Analysis to be updated, the necessary updates are made.
Modifying a Record in the TMLs Pane

You can modify the properties of a Thickness Measurement Location record using the
grid in the TMLs pane. This option provides you with a broader view of multiple
Thickness Measurement Location records in the grid.
Note: Properties of the TML Corrosion Analysis can also be displayed in the TMLs pane
but cannot be modified. Fields TML Corrosion Analysis records are disabled and will be
updated automatically based upon changes that you make to the TM Analysis.
To modify an existing Thickness Measurement Location record in the TMLs pane:
representing the Thickness Measurement Location record you want to modify.
The following image shows a node representing a Thickness Measurement
Location record selected in the TM Explorer pane.
grid in the TMLs pane. Note that the value in the Minimum Thickness (Inches) field for
the Thickness Measurement Location record with TML IDTML01 is 0.12.
2. Enter or modify data in any of the fields displayed in the grid. The following
image displays the selected Thickness Measurement Location record in the TMLs
pane. Note that the value in the Minimum Thickness (Inches) for the Thickness
Measurement Location Record with TML IDTML01 has been changed from 0.12
to 0.15.
3. On the TM Tasks menu, click the Save and Analyze Link.

The changes made to the Thickness Measurement Location record and any other changes
that you make on the TM TMLs/Measurements page are saved. If you made changes that
would require the to be updated, the necessary updates are made.
About Allowable Stress

The Allowable Stress field in Thickness Measurement Location records stores a value
that is used as one of the inputs for determining the Calculated T-Min value for certain
Thickness Measurement Location records. It is also used for calculating Maximum
Allowable Working Pressure for Thickness Measurement Location records associated
with Equipment records that represent pipes. Using the baseline formulas:
An Allowable Stress value must be defined in all Thickness Measurement

Location records associated with Equipment records that represent pipes. The
value that exists in the Allowable Stress field in the Thickness Measurement
Location record will be used for determining the Calculated T-Min value and the
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure.
An Allowable Stress value must be defined in all Thickness Measurement
Location records associated with Equipment records that represent pressure
vessels. The value that exists in the Allowable Stress field in the Thickness
Measurement Location record will be used for determining the Calculated T-Min
value.
For Thickness Measurement Location records associated with Equipment records

that represent tanks:
If the Tank Type field contains the value Floor Plate, an Allowable Stress
value is not required and will not be used if it exists in the Thickness
If the Tank Type field contains the value Riveted Shell, an Allowable
Stress value of 21000 will be used for calculating the T-Min value. If a
different value exists in the Allowable Stress field of the Thickness
Measurement Location record, it will be ignored.
If the Tank Type field contains the value Annular Ring, the Allowable
Stress value will be calculated using a formula that is specific to Annular
Ring tanks. If a value exists in the Allowable Stress field of the Thickness
Measurement Location record, it will be ignored.
If the Tank Type field contains the value Welded Shell, the Allowable
Stress value will be calculated using the Minimum Tensile Strength and
Minimum Yield Strength that are retrieved from the Tank Stress reference
table. This calculated value will become the Lookup Value, which can be
overridden by a user-defined value.
In most cases, the Meridium APM system can populate the value in the Allowable Stress
field for each Thickness Measurement Location record using the Piping Stress, PV Stress,
and Tank Stress reference tables, or you can define the Allowable Stress value manually.
Regardless of whether you define this value manually or have the Meridium APM system
populate this value automatically, the Allowable Stress value must be defined via the
Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box.
Accessing the Allowable Stress Lookup

Dialog Box
You can access the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box from the Allowable Stress field in
Thickness Measurement Location records, either on the Thickness Measurement
Location datasheet or in the grid in the TMLs pane on the TM TMLs/Measurements page.
Note: The Allowable Stress field is not included by default in the TMLs grid on the TM
TMLs/Measurements page. If desired, you can add this field to the grid. By default, the
Allowable Stress field appears on the Design General tab of the baseline Thickness
Measurement Location datasheet.
To access the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box:
In the Allowable Stress field of the desired Thickness Measurement Location

record, click the button.
The Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box appears.
When you access the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box, Meridium APM attempts to
retrieve an Allowable Stress value using the information that exists in the Thickness
Measurement Location record. The status of the retrieval and the value that was retrieved,
if any, will be displayed on the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box.
Aspects of the Allowable Stress Lookup

Dialog Box
On the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box, you can define the Allowable Stress value
for a Thickness Measurement Location record.
The Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box contains the following features:
Current Value: A read-only text box that displays the value that currently exists in
the Allowable Stress field in the Thickness Measurement Location record.
Lookup Value: A read-only text box that displays the value that was retrieved
from the Piping Stress reference table, the PV Stress reference table, or the Tank
Stress reference table, depending upon the values that exist in the Thickness
Measurement Location record. When you access the Allowable Stress Lookup
dialog box, Meridium APM attempts to retrieve an Allowable Stress value using
the information that exists in the Thickness Measurement Location record.
User Defined Value: A text box in which you can type a value to use in place of
the value that appears in the Current Value or Lookup Value text box.
Value to use: A list that contains three options, which let you choose the value that
will be used to populate the Allowable Stress field in the Thickness Measurement
Location record: Current Value, Lookup Value, or User Defined Value.
Status: A read-only field that displays the status of the reference table lookup
operation. This field will display the text:
Succeeded if Meridium APM was able to retrieve an Allowable Stress

value from a reference table. If the status is Succeeded, the Lookup Value
text box will be populated with the value that was retrieved.
Failed if Meridium APM was not able to retrieve an Allowable Stress

value from a reference table. If the status is Failed, the Lookup Value text
box will not contain a value.
Below these items, the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box contains a display area that
shows the values that were used to retrieve the value displayed in the Lookup Value text
box. At the bottom of the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box, the following buttons
appear:
OK: Populates the Allowable Stress field in the Thickness Measurement Location
record with the value identified by the Value to use setting.
Reset: Closes the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box and clears the value that
currently exists in the Allowable Stress field in the Thickness Measurement
Location record.
Cancel: Closes the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box without making any
changes to the Allowable Stress value in the Thickness Measurement Location
record.
Defining the Allowable Stress Value

To define the Allowable Stress value for a Thickness Measurement Location record:
1. In the desired Thickness Measurement Location record, access the Allowable

Stress Lookup dialog box.
The Current Value and Lookup Value text boxes will be populated, as appropriate.
2. If desired, in the User Defined Value text box, type a value that you want to use as
the Allowable Stress value. This step is necessary only if you do not want to use
the value in either the Current Value or the Lookup Value text box.
3. In the Value to use list, select the value that you want to use for populating the
Allowable Stress value in the Thickness Measurement Location record. You can
choose:
Current value to populate the Allowable Stress field with the value in the
Current Value text box.
Lookup value to populate the Allowable Stress field with the value in the
Lookup Value text box.
User defined value to populate the Allowable Stress field with the value in
the User Defined Value text box.
Click OK.
The Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box closes, and the Allowable Stress field in the
Thickness Measurement Location record is populated with the value that you selected.
Note: If you accessed the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box from the Thickness
Measurement Location datasheet, you must navigate out of the Allowable Stress field to
see the updated value.
5. Save the Thickness Measurement Location record.
About Moving Thickness Measurement

Location Records
Under some circumstances, it may be necessary to move Thickness Measurement

Location records from one Equipment or TML Group record to another. There are two
scenarios in which you might perform this task:
You may want to move Thickness Measurement Location records from one TM
Analysis to another.
For example, you may determine that a Thickness Measurement Location record that was
originally linked to one Equipment or TML Group record actually belongs to a different
Equipment or TML Group record that is included in a different TM Analysis. In this case,
rather than creating a new Thickness Measurement Location record for the correct
Equipment or TML Group record, you can move the Thickness Measurement Location
record from the original Equipment or TML Group record to the correct one.
In this case, you will use the Move TMLs builder to select the Thickness Measurement
Location records that you want to move and the target Equipment or TML Group record
to which you will move the Thickness Measurement Location records.
-or
You may want to move to a TML Group record Thickness Measurement Location
records that currently belong to another record in the same TM Analysis.
For example, you may determine that a particular subset of existing Thickness
Measurement Location records actually belong in their own TML Group. If so, you
would create a TML Group record to include in the existing TM Analysis and then move
the Thickness Measurement Location records from the TML Group record with which
they are currently associated to the new TML Group record created specifically for those
TMLs.
In this case, the TML Group record for the node that is selected in the TM Explorer pane
is assumed to be the target record to which you want to move Thickness Measurement
Location records. To move the records, you will use the Move TMLs to <Record ID>,
where <Record ID> is the Record ID of the target TML Group record.
The steps that you take for each of these tasks will differ slightly. In either case, when
you move a Thickness Measurement Location record from one Equipment or TML Group
record to another:
The Thickness Measurement Location records that you move will be unlinked
from the current Equipment or TML Group record and linked to the target
Equipment or TML Group record that you select via the Has Datapoints
relationship.
The target Equipment or TML Group record must not already be linked to a
Thickness Measurement Location record containing a value in the TML ID field
that matches the value in the TML ID field of any of the Thickness Measurement
Location records that you want to move.
The value in the TML Asset ID field of any moved Thickness Measurement
Location record will be updated to reflect the target Equipment or TML Group
record.
Any Thickness Measurement, TML Corrosion Analysis, and Corrosion Analysis

Settings records that are linked to the moved Thickness Measurement Location
records will remain linked to those Thickness Measurement Location records after
the Thickness Measurement Location records are moved.
The values in all of the fields in the Corrosion Analysis Settings records that are
linked to the Thickness Measurement Location records that you are moving will
inherit the values in all of the fields in the Corrosion Analysis Settings record that
is linked to the target Equipment or TML Group record with the exception of the
following fields:
Allowable Measured Variance
Corrosion Rate Variance
Default Inspection Interval
Minimum CR
You can select Thickness Measurement Location records from multiple source
Equipment or TML Group records for a single move operation, but you can select
only a single target Equipment or TML Group record. If you want to move
Thickness Measurement Location records to more than one target Equipment or
TML Group record, you will need to perform the move operation multiple times.
All calculations for the TM Analysis that is associated with the source and the
target Equipment or TML Group records will be updated automatically after the
Thickness Measurement Location records are moved.
Moving Thickness Measurement

Location Records from one TM
Analysis to Another
You can use the following instructions to move Thickness Measurement Location records
from an Equipment or TML Group record in one TM Analysis to an Equipment or TML
Group record in a different TM Analysis. The following instructions assume that you
have accessed the TM TMLs/Measurements page where the root node represents the
Equipment record associated with the TM Analysis from which you want to move
You can also use a different set of instructions to move Thickness Measurement Location
records to a different TML Group record in the same TM Analysis.
To move Thickness Measurement Location records from one TM Analysis to another:
1. On the TM TMLs/Measurements page for the TM Analysis associated with the
Thickness Measurement Location records you want to move, in the TM Explorer
pane, select any node except a TML Group node.
Note: If the root node in the TM Explorer pane is a TML Group node, you can select that
node and follow the instructions listed here. When the root node is associated with an
Equipment record, however, and you select a node that is associated with a TML Group
record, the Meridium APM system assumes that the selected TML Group record is the
target record to which you want to move Thickness Measurement Location records from
within the same TM Analysis.
2. On the TM Tasks menu, click the Move TMLs link.
The Move TMLs builder appears, displaying the List of Available TMLs screen.
The List of Available TMLs screen shows all the Thickness Measurement Location
records that are linked to any Equipment or TML Group record that is currently displayed
in the TM Explorer pane. The list is grouped by Equipment or TML Group record.
3. On the List of Available TMLs screen, select the check box to the left of any
Thickness Measurement Location record that you want to move.
Hint: You can select the All check box at the top of the screen to select all the Thickness
Measurement Location records in the list.

The Find Target Asset screen appears.
5. Perform a search to find the Equipment or TML Group record to which you want
to move the Thickness Measurement Location records.
6. In the results list, select the desired Equipment or TML Group record, and click
the Next button.
The Review the TMLs to Be Moved to the Target Asset screen appears.
The Review the TMLs to Be Moved to the Target Asset screen provides a summary of the
actions that will be performed when you complete the operation. Within the grid:
1.
o
The Selected TMLs column displays the Thickness Measurement Location

records you have chosen to move. The records are grouped according to
the record from which they will be moved (i.e., the source record).
The Target Asset column displays the Record ID of the Equipment or TML
Group record to which the selected Thickness Measurement Location
records will be linked. The target Equipment or TML Group record is the
same for all the Thickness Measurement Location records you have
selected to move.
7. After you have reviewed the information on the Review the TMLs to Be Moved to
the Target Asset screen and are satisfied with your selections, click the Finish
button.
The selected Thickness Measurement Location records are unlinked from the source
Equipment or TML Group record(s) and linked to the target Equipment or TML Group
record.
1.
o
If the target Equipment or TML Group record is already linked to a

Thickness Measurement Location record containing a value in the TML
ID field that matches the value in the TML ID field of any Thickness
Measurement Location record that you selected to move, an error message
will be displayed, and the Thickness Measurement Location records
containing matching TML IDs will not be moved.
If the target Equipment or TML Group record is not linked to a Corrosion

Analysis Settings record with the same inspection type as any of the
Thickness Measurement Location records that you tried to move, the
Settings Missing dialog box appears, displaying a list of Thickness
Measurement Location records that could not be moved.
Hint: You can create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for the target Equipment or
TML Group that has the same inspection type as the Thicknesses Measurement Location
records that you are trying to move via the TM Analysis page.
Moving Thickness Measurement

Location Records to a TML Group
Record in the Same TM Analysis
You can use the following instructions to move to a TML Group record Thickness
Measurement Location records that belong to another record in the same TM Analysis.
The following instructions assume that you have accessed the TM TMLs/Measurements
page where the root node represents the Equipment record that is linked to the TML
Groups records to which and from which you are moving the Thickness Measurement
Location records.
You can also use a different set of instructions to move Thickness Measurement Location
records from one TM Analysis to another.
To move to a TML Group record Thickness Measurement Location records that belong to
another record in the same TM Analysis:
1. On the TM TMLs/Measurements page for the TM Analysis associated with the
Thickness Measurement Location records that you want to move, in the TM
Explorer pane, select the TML Group node to which you want to move Thickness
2. On the TM Tasks menu, click the Move TMLs link.
3. The Move TMLs to <Record ID> appears, where <Record ID> is the Record ID
of the TML Group record that is associated with the selected node and to which
you want to move the Thickness Measurement Location records. The Select TMLs
to be Moved to Target TML Group screen is displayed and shows all the
Thickness Measurement Location records that are associated with the current TM
Analysis except for those linked to the TML Group record to which you are
moving Thickness Measurement Location records (i.e., the target TML Group
record).
4. On the Select TMLs to be Moved to Target TML Group screen, select the check
box to the left of any Thickness Measurement Location record that you want to
move to the target TML Group record. In the following image, the Thickness
Measurement Location record with the Record ID TML4 is selected.
Hint: You can select the All check box at the top of the screen to select all the Thickness
Measurement Location records in the list.

The Review the TMLs to be Moved to the Target TML Group screen appears, displaying a
grid that summarizes the actions that will be performed when you complete the operation.
Within the grid:
o
The Selected TMLs column displays the Record IDs of the Thickness
Measurement Location records that you have chosen to move to the target
TML Group record. The records are grouped according to the record from
which they will be moved (i.e., the source record).
The Target TML Group column displays the Record ID of the TML Group
record to which the Thickness Measurement Location records will be
moved. The target TML Group record will be the same for all Thickness
Measurement Location records you have selected to move.
6. After you have reviewed the information on the Review the TMLs to be Moved to
the Target TML Group screen and are satisfied with your selections, click the
Finish button.
The selected Thickness Measurement Location records are unlinked from the source
record(s) and linked to the target TML Group record.
o
If the target TML Group record is already linked to a Thickness

Measurement Location record containing a value in the TML ID field that
matches the value in the TML ID field of any Thickness Measurement
Location record that you selected to move, an error message will be
displayed, and the Thickness Measurement Location records containing

matching TML IDs will not be moved.
If the target TML Group record is not linked to a Corrosion Analysis
Settings record with the same inspection type as any of the Thickness
Measurement Location records that you tried to move, the Settings
Missing dialog box appears, displaying a list of the Thickness
Measurement Location records that could not be moved. If you are
following the TM Best Practice to create your TM Analyses, however, the
TML Group records in a given TM Analysis should be linked to Corrosion
Analysis Settings records of the same inspection type as the Equipment
record to which the TML Group records are linked.
Hint: If necessary, you can create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for the target TML
Group record that has the same inspection type as the Thickness Measurement Location
records that you are trying to move via the TM Analysis page.
What Happens If an Equipment or

TML Group Record Has TMLs and No
Settings?
If you access the TM TMLs/Measurements page for an Equipment or TML Group record
that is linked to one or more Thickness Measurement Location records but is not linked to
a Corrosion Analysis Settings record that has the same inspection type as those Thickness
Measurement Location records, the Missing Settings window will appear.
The Missing Settings window contains a grid that displays the following columns of
information:
Asset: The Record ID of the Equipment or TML Group record for which the
correct inspection type has not been defined.
Missing Settings: The inspection type that must be defined in the Corrosion
Analysis Settings record that is linked to the Equipment or TML Group record.
This is based upon the inspection type defined in the Thickness Measurement
Location record. The value in this column appears as a hyperlink, which you can
click to define the correct inspection type.
Reason: A brief explanation of why the inspection type must be changed.
Each entry in the list represents a unique combination of the three values. For example, a
single Equipment or TML Group record may be listed multiple times if the Corrosion
Analysis Settings records linked to the Equipment or TML Group record do not have the
correct inspection type for more than one Thickness Measurement Location record.
Whenever this window appears, you should click each hyperlinked value in the Missing
Settings column and define the inspection type that is needed. You will not be able to
update the TM Analysis until all the required inspection types are defined.
Printing the Grid in the TMLs Pane

To print the information displayed in the grid in the TMLs pane:
representing the Equipment or TML Group record to which the Thickness
Measurement Location record(s) information you want to print are linked. In the
following image, the node representing the Equipment record with the Record ID
~ ~ AQA Test TML Plot is selected.
button.
3. Click the
settings and then print the contents of the grid in the TMLs pane.
-orClick the
button to print the contents of the grid in the TMLs pane with your default
print settings.
The contents of the grid in the TMLs pane are sent to your selected printer.
Printing the Details of Thickness

To print the details of a Thickness Measurement Location record:

representing the Thickness Measurement Location record whose details you want
to print. In the following image, the TML01 UT Active node is selected.

TML Datasheet.
3. On the toolbar at the top of the Thickness Measurement Location window, click
the button.
Note: If there is a report that is associated with the Thickness Measurement Location
family, the Select Report to Print dialog box will appear before the Preview window
appears. On the Select Report to Print dialog box, you can choose to print the datasheet
for the Thickness Measurement Location record, or the report.
4. Click the
settings and then print the details of the Thickness Measurement Location record.
-orClick the
button to print the details of the Thickness Measurement Location record
with your default print settings.
The details of the Thickness Measurement Location record are sent to your selected
printer.
Deleting Thickness Measurement

Location Records
To delete a Thickness Measurement Location record via the TM
Location record you want to delete. In the following image, the Equipment node ~
~ AQA Test TML Plot is selected.
that you want to delete. In the following image, the Thickness Measurement
Location record with TML ID TML01 is selected in the TMLs pane.
button.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to delete the selected
If one or more Thickness Measurement records have been linked to the Thickness
Measurement Location record, a second confirmation message appears, indicating that
deleting the Thickness Measurement Location record will also delete records associated
with the Thickness Measurement Location record and asking if you want to proceed with
the deletion.
The selected Thickness Measurement Location record and all the Thickness
Measurement records that are linked to that Thickness Measurement Location record are
deleted, any unsaved changes you have made on the TM TMLs/Measurements page are
saved to the database. If you made changes that would require the to be updated, the
necessary updates are made.
Creating a New Thickness Measurement

The following instructions provide details on creating a new Thickness Measurement
record on the TM TMLs/Measurements page. Note that you can also create new Thickness
Measurement records on the TM Measurement Data Entry page and the TM Initial
To create new Thickness Measurement record:
1. On the TM TMLs/Measurements page, in the grid in the TMLs pane, select the
Thickness Measurement Location record to which you want to link the new
Thickness Measurement record. In the following image, the row containing TML
ID TML01 is selected.
2. On the toolbar at the top of the Measurements pane, click the
button.
The New Measurement dialog box appears.
3. To the right of the Readings text box, click the
button.
The Readings for [TML] window appears, where [TML] is the TML ID of the Thickness
Measurement Location record for which you are creating the new Thickness
Measurement record.
4. In the Value column of each row, type the desired reading value.
Note: The number of rows that appear in the grid on the Readings for [TML] window
corresponds to the value in the Number of Readings field in the Thickness Measurement
Location record for which you are creating a the Thickness Measurement record.
5. After you have populated all rows on the Readings for [TML] window, click OK.
The Readings for [TML] window closes, and the readings that you supplied appear in the
Readings text box on the New Measurement dialog box. If you supplied multiple values,
they will be separated by semicolons.
Hint: If you prefer not to use the Readings for [TML] window, you can type values
directly into the Readings text box, separating each one with a colon.
6. On the New Measurement dialog box, in the Measurement Taken Date box, type
or select a date. The value in the Measurement Taken Date box is set by default to
the current date.
Note: The New Measurement dialog box displays all the fields that are required in a
Thickness Measurement record. In the baseline Thickness Monitoring module, only the
Measurement Value and Measurement Taken Date fields are required. If your
implementation has been customized to require additional fields, they will be displayed
on the New Measurement dialog box. You will need to supply a value for each required
field before you can save the Thickness Measurement record.
7. Click OK.
A new row is added to the grid in the Measurements pane and contains the information
that you supplied on the New Measurement dialog box. In the following image, the new
row is selected.
Note: The Measurement ID field will be empty until you save the Thickness
Measurement record, when it will be populated automatically with the Record ID that is
created for the Thickness Measurement record based upon the ID Template that is defined
for the Thickness Measurement family.
8. Edit the measurement properties as desired. You can use the scroll bar at the
bottom of the grid to view all the available fields.
The new Thickness Measurement record is saved to the database along with any other
unsaved changes that exist on the TM TMLs/Measurements page, and the corrosion
analysis is updated.
Creating a Corroded Area Measurement

The following instructions provide details on recording corroded area measurements for
an Equipment or TML Group record via the TM TMLs/Measurements page, and
instructions for setting up a Corroded Area Values grid for Thickness Measurement
Location records. Note that if a Corroded Area Values grid has been configured for a
Thickness Measurement Location record, the Corroded Area Values grid the will also be
available on the TM Measurement Data Entry page.
To record corroded area measurements in the Corroded Area Values grid:
representing the Thickness Measurement Location record for which you want to
record corroded area measurements. The following image shows the node TML01
UT Active selected.

TML Datasheet.
3. On the TML datasheet, click the Corroded Area tab, as shown in the following
image.
4. Select the Is Corroded Area check box, as shown in the following image.
Selecting this check box enables the use of the Corroded Area Values grid. You can select
this check box only if the value in the Number of Readings field is 1 (one). If the value in
the Number of Readings field is greater than one, an error message will appear when you
attempt to select this check box.
Note: After a Corroded Area Values grid has been configured for a Thickness
Measurement Location record, you will need to record all measurements for that
Thickness Measurement Location record using the Corroded Area Values grid.
5. In the Corroded Area Length field, type a value that represents the overall length
of the corroded area.
6. In the Corroded Area Width field, type a value that represents the overall width of
the corroded area.
Note: The Corroded Area Length and Corroded Area Width fields are optional and are
meant for informational purposes only. The values in these fields have no effect on the
corroded area measurement. The value in these fields must be numeric but have no unit
of measure associated with them.
7. In the Corroded Area Rows field, type a value representing the number of rows
that you want to include in the Corroded Area Values grid.
8. In the Corroded Area Columns field, type a value representing the number of
columns that you want to include in the Corroded Area Values grid.
Note: Together, the number of rows and columns you specify will determine the number
of cells in the Corroded Area Values grid (one cell at the intersection of each row and
column). The number of cells corresponds to the number of measurements that will be
recorded for the corroded area. For example, two columns and two rows will create a
Corroded Area Values grid with four cells, which means that four measurements will be
recorded for the corroded area.
9. Click OK.
button.
11. Click the
button to the right of the Measurement Value text box.
The Corroded Area Values window appears.
12. Type the corroded area measurements into the cells in the Corroded Area Values
grid, and click OK.
13. The calculated average of the measurements that you entered appears in the
Measurement Value text box in the New Measurement dialog box.
14. Click OK.

15. The calculated average of the measurements you entered in the Corroded Area
Values grid is populated in the Readings, Uncorrected Measurement, and
Thickness Measurement fields of a new row in the grid in the Measurements pane.
The following image shows the new row selected in the Measurements pane.
The changes made to the Thickness Measurement record and any other unsaved changes
that exist on the TM TMLs/Measurements page are saved. If you made changes that
Accessing the Thickness Measurements

Datasheet
To view the details of a Thickness Measurement record on the TM TMLs/Measurements
page:

representing the Thickness Measurement Location record whose Thickness
Measurement record you want to view. In the following image, the node TML01
UT Active is selected.
2. In the grid in the Measurements pane, select the row containing the Thickness
Measurement record whose details you want to view. In the following image, the
row containing the Thickness Measurement record with the Measurement ID
0.23-9/30/2005 is selected.

click Thickness Measurement Datasheet.
button, and then
The Thickness Measurement widow appears, displaying the details of the selected
Aspects of the Thickness Measurements

Datasheet
The Thickness Measurements window displays the details of the Thickness Measurement
record that you selected on the TM TMLs/Measurements page.
A toolbar is displayed above the datasheet that contains the following options:
Thickness Measurement Datasheet.
Document records for the Thickness Measurement record. By default, reference
documents cannot be configured for Thickness Measurement records, and this
option is disabled.
Note: Thickness Measurement records are not defined as a predecessor in the MI Has
Reference Documented relationship family in the default implementation, and this button
will be disabled. If your implementation has been customized, you may be able to
manage reference documents for Thickness Measurement records, and this button will be
enabled.
About Modifying Thickness

Measurement Records
After a Thickness Measurement record has been created and linked to an Thickness
Measurement Location record, its properties can be modified if needed. You have two
options for modifying a Thickness Measurement record. You can:
Modify a Thickness Measurement record Using the Thickness Measurement

datasheet.
Modify a Thickness Measurement record in the Measurements pane.
Note: If a required field is left blank in the Thickness Measurement record, when you try
to save the TM TMLs/Measurements page, a message appears, indicating that the
required field is blank and must contain a value. The Thickness Measurement record with
the missing information will not be saved, but any other Thickness Measurement records
that do have complete information will be saved to the database.
Modifying Thickness Measurement

Records Using the Thickness
Measurements Datasheet
You can modify a Thickness Measurement record using the Thickness Measurements
datasheet, which provides you with a concise view of a single Thickness Measurement
record. This option may be useful if you need to modify multiple fields, related fields, or
fields that are not displayed by default in the grid in the Measurements pane.
To modify an existing Thickness Measurement record using the Thickness Measurements
datasheet:
Measurement record that you want to modify. In the following image, the node
TML01 UT Active is selected.
Measurement record you want to modify. In the following image, the row
containing the Thickness Measurement record with the Measurement ID 0.239/30/2005 is selected.

button, and then
The Thickness Measurements window appears, displaying the details of the selected
4. Modify the Thickness Measurement properties as desired. The general features

and behavior of the datasheet are the same as that of the Record Manager.
5. When you have finished making changes, click OK.
Modifying Thickness Measurement

Records in the Measurements Pane
You can modify a Thickness Measurement record using the grid in the Measurements
pane. This option provides you with an overview of multiple Thickness Measurement
records in the grid.
To modify an existing Thickness Measurement record in the Measurements pane:
whose Thickness Measurement record you want to modify. In the following
image, the row containing the Thickness Measurement Location record with TML
ID TML01 is selected.
2. In the grid in the Measurements pane, select the Thickness Measurement record
you want to modify. In the following image, the Thickness Measurement with
Measurement ID 0.23-9/30/2005 is selected. Note that the value in the
Measurement Taken Date cell is 9/30/2005.
3. Enter or modify data in any of the fields displayed in the grid. In the following
image, the value in the Measurement Taken Date cell for the Thickness
Measurement record with Measurement ID 0.23-9/30/2005 has been changed
from 9/30/2005 to 9/30/2000.
4. On the TM Tasks menu, click the Save and Analyze Link.

would require the TM Analysis to be updated, the necessary updates are made
Printing the Grid in the Measurements

Pane
To print the information displayed in the grid in the Measurements pane:
representing the Thickness Measurement Location record to which the Thickness
Measurement record(s) that you want to print are linked. In the following image,
the node TML01 UT Active is selected.
The Thickness Measurement records that are linked to the selected Thickness
Measurement Location record are displayed in the grid in the Measurements pane.
button.
3. Click the
settings and then print the contents of the grid in the Measurements pane.
-orClick the
button to print the contents of the grid in the Measurements pane with your
default print settings.
The contents of the grid in the Measurements pane are sent to your selected printer.
Printing the Details of Thickness

Measurement Records
To print the details of a Thickness Measurement record:
Measurement record you want to print. In the following image, the node TML01
UT Active is selected.
The Thickness Measurement records that are linked to the selected Thickness
Measurement Location record are displayed in the grid in the Measurements pane.
Measurement record that you want to print. In the following image, the row
containing the Thickness Measurement record with the Measurement ID 0.239/30/2005 is selected.

button, and then
The Thickness Measurements window appears, displaying the details of the selected
4. On the toolbar at the top of the Thickness Measurements window, click the
button.
Note: If there is a report that is associated with the Thickness Measurement family, the
Select Report to Print dialog box will appear before the Preview window appears. On the
Select Report to Print dialog box, you can choose to print the datasheet for the Thickness
Measurement record or the report.
5. Click the
settings and then print the details of the selected Thickness Measurement record.
-orClick the
button to print the details of the selected Thickness Measurement record
with your default print settings.
The details of the Thickness Measurement record are sent to your selected printer.
Deleting Thickness Measurement

Records
To delete a Thickness Measurement record on the TM TMLs/Measurements page:
whose Thickness Measurement record you want to delete. In the following image,
the Thickness Measurement Location record with TML ID TML01 is selected.
2. In the grid in the Measurements pane, select the Thickness Measurement record
that you want to delete. In the following image, the Thickness Measurement
record with the Measurement ID 0.23-9/30/2005 is selected.
button.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to delete the selected
The selected Thickness Measurement record is deleted, and the is updated. In the
following image, you can see that the Thickness Measurement record with the
Measurement ID 0.23-9/30/2005 has been deleted.
Accessing the TM Measurement Data

Entry Page
You can use the TM Measurement Data Entry page to enter thickness measurements for
all the Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to a given Equipment or
TML Group record.
To access the TM Measurement Data Entry page:
1. On the Thickness Monitoring Functions page, click the Measurement Data Entry
link.
2. Perform a search to find the Equipment or TML Group records for which you
want to enter thickness measurements.
3. In the search results, select the Equipment or TML Group records, and click the
Open button.
The TM Measurement Data Entry page appears.
Overview of the TM Measurement Data

Entry Page
The TM Measurement Data Entry page contains the following items:

Equipment and/or TML Group records for which you accessed the page and the
Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to those Equipment or
TML Group records.
Common Measurement Data for <Family> section: Displays options that let you
define default values that will be used to populate fields in new Thickness
Task section: Displays a list of the Inspection Task records that are linked to the
Equipment record that is represented by the root node in the TM Explorer pane.
You can select an Inspection Task record in this list to specify that it should be
updated based upon Thickness Measurement records that you create via the TM
Measurement Data Entry page. This section is displayed only when one or more
Inspection Task records are linked to the Equipment record whose node appears at
the root level in the TM Explorer pane.
Data Entry Grid: Displays a grid that you can use to create new Thickness
Measurement records for the selected Equipment or TML Group record.
Task Menu pane: Displays task menus that provide you with quick access to
functions that are available on the TM Measurement Data Entry page. The
following task menus are available on the TM Measurement Data Entry page:
Measurement Tasks
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
TM Explorer
The TM Explorer pane on the TM Measurement Data Entry page displays nodes in a tree,
where each node represents one of the following items:
accessed the page.
The contents of the TM Explorer pane are displayed using the Measurement Data
Entry configured explorer, which is stored in the following folder in the Meridium APM
Common Measurement Data Section

The Common Measurement Data for <Family> section, where <Family> is the family
name of the Equipment or TML Group record whose node is currently selected in the TM
Explorer pane, displays fields where you can specify values that will be populated by
default in the Thickness Measurement records that you create via the TM Measurement
Data Entry page. Throughout the documentation, we refer to this section as the Common
Measurement Data section.
The following fields are displayed in the Common Measurement Data section:
Measurement Taken Date: The date that you want to record in the Measurement
Taken Date field in the new Thickness Measurement records. By default, this field
displays the last date that you selected the last time you viewed this page for any
Equipment or TML Group record. If you have never accessed this page before,
this field is set to the current date by default. You can select a different date if
needed (e.g., if you are recording measurements that were taken on a different
date).
Measurement Taken By: The name of the Security User that you want to be
populated in the Measurement Taken By field in the new Thickness Measurement
records. This list contains the first and last name of Security Users who have been
granted the TM Technician role. If the Security User who is logged in currently
has been granted the TM Technician role, that Security User will be selected by
default. Otherwise, no Security User will be selected in this list by default.
Temperature (Degrees Fahrenheit): The value that you want to record in the
Temperature field in the new Thickness Measurement records. By default, no
value appears in this field.
When you enter values in the fields in the Common Measurement Data section, the
corresponding fields in the new Thickness Measurement records will be populated
automatically. For example, consider that you have entered the values shown in the
following image in the Common Measurement Data section.
When you enter a value in the Readings field in the data entry grid, the Common
Measurement Data section values will be used to populate the corresponding fields in the
new Thickness Measurement records, as shown in the following image.
Note: The default behavior described reflects the behavior of the baseline TM product. If
default rules have been defined for the Measurement Taken Date, Measurement Taken
By, or Temperature fields in the Thickness Measurement family, those behaviors will be
reflected in the fields in the Common Measurement Data section.
While the Common Measurement Data section values will be used as the default values
in the new Thickness Measurement records that you create, within any record, you can
modify the default value by changing the value in the data entry grid. Note that if you
modify the values in the Common Measurement Data section, your changes will not be
applied to any rows in the data entry grid that already contain data.
Task Section
The Task section displays a list of the Inspection Task records that are linked to the
Equipment record whose node appears at the root level in the TM Explorer pane.
The Task section is displayed only when:
The node that appears at the root level in the TM Explorer pane represents an
Equipment record that is linked to at least one Inspection Task record.
-and
An Equipment or Thickness Measurement Location node is selected in the TM

Explorer pane.
Note: The sections to the right of the TM Explorer pane are refreshed only when you
select an Equipment or TML Group node in the TM Explorer pane. Meaning, if you select
a TML Group node (the Task section is not displayed), and then you select a Thickness
Measurement Location node, the Task section will not be re-displayed. You must select
an Equipment node in order for the Task section to be re-displayed. Then, if you select a
Thickness Measurement Location node, the Task section will remain displayed.
When you select an Inspection Task record in this list, it will be updated based upon
Thickness Measurement records that you create via the TM Measurement Data Entry
page. When an Inspection Task record is selected in the list, to the right of the list, the
text View Task appears as a hyperlink. You can click this hyperlink to access the selected
Inspection Task record. By default, no value is selected in this list.
The value that is displayed in the list depends upon whether or not the given Inspection
Task record is linked to an RBI Recommendation record.
If the Inspection Task record is linked to an RBI Recommendation record, the

value displayed in the list is a combination of the value in the Task ID field in the
Inspection Task record and the value RBI, separated by a hyphen. For example,
consider an Inspection Task record that is linked to an RBI Recommendation
record and whose Task ID field contains the value Insp-1. The value Insp-1 - RBI
would be displayed in the list for this Inspection Task record.
If the Inspection Task record is not linked to an RBI Recommendation record, the
value displayed in this list is a combination of the values in the Task ID and
Source Type fields in the Inspection Task record, separated by a hyphen. In the
image shown at the beginning of this topic, the Inspection Task record with the
following values is selected in the list:
Task ID: Insp-1-33
Source Type: Manual
Data Entry Grid

The data entry grid displays one row for each Thickness Measurement Location record
that is linked to the Equipment or TML Group record whose node is selected in the TM
Explorer pane.
Note: While each row represents a single Thickness Measurement Location record, the
columns display values from both that Thickness Measurement Location record and the
Thickness Measurement records that are linked to that Thickness Measurement Location
record. Fields from Thickness Measurement Location records are read-only.
By default, the grid is sorted in ascending order according to the value in the TML ID
column. The TML ID column is locked into place and cannot be moved. It will remain in
view on the left side of the grid when you use the scroll bar to view fields in columns on
the right side of the grid.
Above the grid on the TM Measurement Data Entry page, the following items are
displayed:
The
button: Deletes the unsaved value in the Readings cell for the selected
The
button: Displays a drop-down menu, which you can use to access the
Thickness Measurement Location datasheet for the selected Thickness
The TML Analysis Type list: The selection in this list determines the Thickness
Measurement Location records that are displayed in the grid. The TML Analysis
Type list contains the following values:
ALL: Displays Thickness Measurement Location records of all TML

Analysis Types. This option is selected by default.
UT: Displays Thickness Measurement Location records whose TML

Analysis Type is UT.
RT: Displays Thickness Measurement Location records whose TML

Analysis Type is RT.
TML: Displays Thickness Measurement Location records whose TML

Analysis Type is TML.
The Active TMLs only check box: When this check box is selected, only Active
Thickness Measurement Location records are displayed in the grid. This check
box is selected by deafult. When this check box is cleared, Inactive and Active
Thickness Measurement Location records are displayed in the grid.
Below the grid, the [Status Indicator] filter is displayed when a filter is applied to the
grid. You can use the Edit Filter button to the right of the [Status Indicator] filter to
create other custom filters.
Note that the following grid customizations will be saved so that the next time you log in,
you will see them:
The width of the columns.

The order of the columns
Any sorting that you have applied to the grid.
Any grouping that you have applied to the grid.
Your selection in the Active TMLs only check box.
The last five custom filters that you have used.
Measurement Tasks
The Measurement Tasks menu on the TM Measurement Data Entry page contains the
following links:
Pick Another Asset: Displays the Find Items window, where you can search
for different Equipment or TML Group records and open them on the TM
Save and Analyze: Saves any changes that you have made on the TM
Measurement Data Entry page and updates calculations in the TM Analysis. This
link is enabled only if the analysis settings necessary for updating the TM
Analysis exist and if you have modified the TM Analysis since you accessed the
Clear All Data: Clears all the unsaved information that has been recorded in the
grid on the TM Measurement Data Entry page.
Note: Links on the Measurement Tasks menu are enabled only when an Equipment or
TML Group node is selected in the TM Explorer pane.
Navigation
The Navigation menu on the TM Measurement Data Entry page displays links to various
Monitoring.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the TM Measurement Data Entry page contains the
following links:
Print: This link is disabled on the TM Measurement Data Entry page.

Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the current page.
Note: Links on the Common Tasks menu are enabled only when an Equipment or TML
Group node is selected in the TM Explorer pane.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the TM Measurement Data Entry page displays links only
if Associated Pages have been configured for the entity family of the record whose node
is selected in the TM Explorer pane. If no Associated Pages have been configured for the
Entering Thickness Measurements on

the TM Measurement Data Entry Page
You can use the TM Measurement Data Entry page to create Thickness Measurement
records for all the Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to an
To create Thickness Measurement records on the TM Measurement Data Entry page:
1. On the TM Measurement Data Entry page, in the TM Explorer pane, select the
node representing the Equipment or TML Group record that is linked to the
Thickness Measurement Location record for which you want to create Thickness
2. In the Common Measurement Data section:
1. In the Measurement Taken Date box, type or select the date and time when
the readings were taken.
2.
2. In the Temperature (Degrees Fahrenheit) text box, type a value indicating
the temperature at which the readings were taken.
2.
3. In the Measurement Taken By list, select the name of the person who took
the readings.
3. In the Readings column of the data entry grid, enter reading values for the desired
Thickness Measurement Location records. To enter readings:
o
You can type values directly in the Readings cells.
Hint: If you use this option, be sure to separate each value with a semicolon.
-or1.
o
You can click the

button in the cell to access the Readings for [TML]
window, where you can enter a value in the Value cell of each available
row.
Note: The number of readings that you specify for each Thickness Measurement record
should correspond to the value in the Number of Readings field in the Thickness
Measurement Location record for which you are creating a Thickness Measurement
record.
The Measurement Value cell will be populated automatically based upon the readings that
you entered. The Measurement Taken Date, Measurement Taken By, and Temperature
cells will be populated automatically using the values in the Common Measurement Data
section. In the following image, the Thickness Measurement Location record with TML
ID TML01 is selected in the grid on the TM Measurement Data Entry page. Note that the
values entered into the Common Measurement Data section have been populated into the
corresponding fields of the data entry grid.
Note: If you do not supply a value in the Readings cell for all of Thickness Measurement
Location records displayed in the grid, a confirmation message will appear, indicating
that one or more measurement values were not populated, and would you like to continue
saving.
The Thickness Measurement records are saved to the database, the TM Analysis is
updated, and the grid is refreshed to display the values updated by the TM Analysis.
Deleting Unsaved Data on the TM

Measurement Data Entry Page
When you enter data in the grid on the TM Measurement Data Entry page, until you click
the Save and Analyze link on the Measurement Tasks menu, the data is not saved, and
Thickness Measurement records do not exist for this unsaved data. You can use the
button above the grid on the TM Measurement Data Entry page to delete the unsaved
value in the Readings cell for the selected Thickness Measurement Location record.
Additionally, you can delete ALL unsaved values that you have typed in ALL cells in the
grid for ALL Thickness Measurement Location records.
To delete all unsaved data from the grid on the TM Measurement Data Entry page:
On the Measurement Tasks menu, click the Clear All Data link.
A confirmation message appears, and all unsaved values that you typed in all cells in the
grid for all Thickness Measurement Location records are deleted.
Updating Inspection Task Records

Based Upon Thickness Measurement
Records Created on the TM
If an Inspection Task record is linked to an Equipment record for which you are creating
Thickness Measurement records on the TM Measurement Data Entry page, you can
specify that the Inspection Task record be updated based upon these Thickness
Measurement records. When you do this, the value in the Last Date field in the Inspection
Task record will be populated with the most recent value in the Measurement Taken Date
field in the Thickness Measurement records that you create via the TM Measurement
Data Entry page.
The following instructions assume that you are viewing the TM Measurement Data Entry
page, and that Equipment record whose Inspection Task record you want to update
appears at the root level in the TM Explorer pane.
To specify that an Inspection Task record be updated based upon Thickness Measurement
records created using the TM Measurement Data Entry page:
Group record that is linked to the Thickness Measurement Location records for
which you want to create Thickness Measurement records.
In the following image, the node representing the Equipment record ~#1 DEROP. O.H.
COND. ~ HXST 112 is selected in the TM Explorer pane.
2. Specify values in the fields in the Common Measurement Data section.

3. In the list in the Task section, select the Inspection Task record that you want to
update based upon the Thickness Measurement records that you will create.
In the following image, Insp_T_2 - Manual is selected in the list in the Task section.
4. Create Thickness Measurement records using the data entry grid.

The following image shows Thickness Measurement records that were created for the
Thickness Measurement Location records with the following TML IDs:
TML01
TML02
TML03
TML04
TML05
The Thickness Measurement records are saved to the database, the TM Analysis is
updated, and the grid is refreshed to display the values updated by the TM Analysis. The
value in the Last Date field in the selected Inspection Task record is populated with the
most recent value in the Measurement Taken Date field in the Thickness Measurement
records that you created. A red outline has been added to the following image to highlight
the Last Date field on the Inspection Task datasheet.
Viewing the Details of an Inspection

Task Record
You can view any Inspection Task record that is displayed in the list in the Task section
on the TM Measurement Data Entry page. The following instructions assume that you are
viewing the TM Measurement Data Entry page for the Equipment record whose related
Inspection Task record you want to view.
To view an Inspection Task record:
1. In the list in the Task section, select the Inspection Task record that you want to
view.
In the following image, INSP_T_2 - Manual is selected in the list in the Task section.
2. To the right of the list, click the View Task link.

The selected record appears in a separate window.
Accessing the TML Datasheet

The grid on the TM Measurement Data Entry page contains field from Thickness
Measurement Location records and Thickness Measurement record. If desired, you can
view the datasheet for any Thickness Measurement Location record that appears in the
grid.
To view the datasheet for a Thickness Measurement Location record on the TM
Measurement Data Entry page:
1. On the TM Measurement Data Entry page, in the TM Explorer pane, select the
node representing the Thickness Measurement Location record for which you
want to view the details. In the following image, the node TML01 UT Active is
selected.
2. In the grid, select the Thickness Measurement Location record whose datasheet
you want to view. In the following image, the Thickness Measurement Location
Record with the TML ID TML01 is selected.
3. Above the grid, click the
button, and then click TML Datasheet.
Note: When accessed from the TM Measurement Data Entry page, the TML Datasheet is
read-only. If you want to modify the values displayed in the TML Datasheet, you can do
so using the TM TMLs/Measurements page.
Aspects of the TML Datasheet

The Thickness Measurement Location window displays the details of the Thickness
Measurement Location record that you selected on the TM Measurement Data Entry
page. The Datasheet list is displayed above the datasheet area and displays a list of the
datasheets that have been configured for the Thickness Measurement Location family.
is displayed on the Thickness Measurement Location window.
About the TM Initial Measurement

Data Entry Page
The TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page can be used for recording base
measurements for multiple Thickness Measurement Location records and is the only
interface in Thickness Monitoring that facilitates the automatic creation of nominal base
measurements.
The features of the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page are the same as the TM
Measurement Data Entry page with the following exceptions:
The TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page displays only those Thickness
Measurement Location records that do not currently have a base measurement.
The default column layout in the grid on the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry
page varies slightly from that of the Measurement Data Entry page. On the TM
Initial Measurement Data Entry page, only columns related to creating the base
measurement are shown.
The TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page provides the Nominal

Measurement Date Entry dialog box, which allows you to select the date for
nominal base measurements. This dialog box appears automatically when you
select an Equipment or TML Group record that is linked to one or more Thickness
Measurement Location records that contain a value in the Nominal Thickness
field. This feature is provided to let you override the default value for the
Measurement Taken Date field, which typically is not appropriate for nominal
thickness measurements.
Note that you can select an Inspection Task record in the Task section to be updated based
upon measurements entered on the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page in the same
way that Inspection Task records can be updated based upon measurements entered on
the TM Measurement Data Entry page.
The TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page supports creating both nominal and actual
base measurements.
Measurement data for nominal base measurements will be populated

automatically. If the selected Equipment or TML Group record is linked to a
Thickness Measurement Location record that contains a value in the Nominal
Thickness field, the Readings, Uncorrected Measurement, and Measurement
Value field will be populated automatically with that value. This will occur after
you select the date on the Nominal Measurement Date Entry dialog box.
You will need to enter measurement data for actual base measurements manually
via the Readings field.
Accessing the TM Initial Measurement

Data Entry Page
You can access the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page from the following pages in
TM:
Asset Analysis Plot

T-Min Calculations
TM Analysis
TM Measurement Data Entry
TM Quick View
TM TMLs/Measurements
To access the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page:
On the Navigation menu, click the Initial Measurement Data Entry link.
The TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page appears.
If the Equipment or TML Group record whose node is selected in the TM Explorer pane
is linked to a Thickness Measurement Location record whose Nominal Readings field
contains a value, the Nominal Measurement Date Entry dialog box will appear, as shown
in the following image.
If you access the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page for multiple Equipment or
TML Group records, the first Equipment or TML Group node in the TM Explorer pane
will be selected by default. The TM Nominal Measurement Date Entry dialog box will
appear only if this Equipment or TML Group node represents a record that is linked to a
Thickness Measurement Location record whose Nominal Readings field contains a value.
Entering Measurements on the TM

Initial Measurement Data Entry Page
The TM Initial Measurement Data Entry supports the creation of both nominal and actual
base measurements. The following instructions provide details on creating base
measurements for an Equipment or TML Group record that is linked to...
Thickness Measurement Location records that are configured for nominal base
measurements.
-and
Thickness Measurement Location records that are configured for actual base
measurements.
Note: If you access the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page for an Equipment or
TML Group record that is linked to Thickness Measurement Location records configured
for one type of base measurement or the other, some of these steps will not apply to you.
To enter base measurements on the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page:
1. Access the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page for an Equipment or TML
Group record with TMLs that are configured for both nominal and actual
thickness measurements.
The Nominal Measurement Date Entry Date dialog box appears.
2. Select the date that you want to use for the nominal thickness measurements, and
click OK.
The Nominal Measurement Date Entry dialog box closes, revealing the Common
Measurement Data section of the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page, where the
Measurement Taken Date box contains the date that you selected. In the data entry grid,
the row for any Thickness Measurement Location that is configured for nominal
thickness measurements is populated automatically with the following values:
The Measurement Taken Date cell is populated with the value that you
selected on the Nominal Measurement Date Entry dialog box.
The Measurement Taken By and Temperature cells are populated with the
values in the Common Measurement Data section.
The Measurement Value (Inches), Readings, and Uncorrected

Measurement (Inches) cells are populated with the value in the Nominal
Thickness field of the Thickness Measurement Location record.
The check box in the Nominal cell is selected.
3. Record values for actual base measurements. To do so, in the Common

Measurement Data section...
a.
In the Measurement Taken Date list, select the date and time when the readings
were taken.
3.
2. In the Temperature (Degrees Fahrenheit] text box, type a value indicating
the temperature at which the readings were taken.
3.
3. In the Measurement Taken By list, select the name of the person who took
the readings.
3.
d. Enter values in any additional fields that are displayed.
d.
In the data entry grid, enter the readings for the desired Thickness Measurement
Location records.
4. On the Measurements Tasks menu, click the Save and Analyze link.
The new base measurements are saved to the database, and the TM analysis is updated.
Any Thickness Measurement Location records for which you entered a base
measurement are now removed from the grid.
Note: If you do not supply readings for all Thickness Measurement Location records that
are displayed in the grid, a confirmation message will appear, indicating that one or more
measurement values are not populated and asking if you would like to continue saving.
About the Bulk Analyze Tool
The Bulk Analyze tool lets you use a single action to update calculations for all Thickness
Measurement Location records that are linked to multiple Equipment or TML Group
records.
Using the Thickness Monitoring - Bulk Analyze window, you can:
Perform the TM Analysis for multiple Equipment or TML Group records.

Save a log of the bulk TM Analysis to a text file.
Accessing the Bulk Analyze Tool

To access the Bulk Analysis tool:
1. On the Thickness Monitoring Functions page, click the Bulk Analyze link.
The Bulk Analyze Finder window appears.
2. Perform a search to find the Equipment or TML Group records that you want to
analyze.
3. In the search results, select the Equipment or TML Group records that you want to
analyze.
4. Click the Select button.
The Thickness Monitoring - Bulk Analyze window appears, displaying the list of the
Equipment or TML Group records that you selected. From here, you can perform a TM
Analysis for each of the records that you selected.
Performing a Corrosion Analysis Using

the Bulk Analyze Tool
When you perform an analysis using the Bulk Analyze tool, the Meridium APM system
will create or update:
The Asset Corrosion Analysis records that are linked to the selected Equipment or
TML Group records. Asset Corrosion Analysis records that already exist with be
updated. Asset Corrosion Analysis records will be created for any Equipment or
TML Group record that is linked to one or more Thickness Measurement Location
record but for which an Asset Corrosion Analysis record does not already exist.
The TML Corrosion Analysis record for all of the Thickness Measurement
Location records that are linked to the selected Equipment or TML Group records.
TML Corrosion Analysis records that already exist with be updated. TML
Corrosion Analysis records will be created for any Thickness Measurement
Location record for which a TML Corrosion Analysis record does not already
exist.
To perform a TM Analysis using the Bulk Analyze tool:

1. Access the Bulk Analyze tool for the Equipment or TML Group records for which
you want to perform a analysis.
2. On the Thickness Monitoring - Bulk Analyze window, below the grid, click the
Start Bulk Analysis button.
The Meridium APM system performs an analysis of the records that are displayed on the
Thickness Monitoring - Bulk Analyze window. When the analysis has completed, the grid
in the Bulk Analyze window will change to display the results log of the bulk analysis. If
desired, you can save the log.
Saving a Bulk Analysis Log
After you have performed a bulk analysis, you can save the analysis log as a text (.TXT)
file to the location of your choice. The text in the saved log file will be the same as the
text that is displayed on the Thickness Monitoring - Bulk Analyze window.
To save the bulk analysis log:
1. Perform a bulk analysis.
2. On the Thickness Monitoring - Bulk Analyze window, click the Save to File
button.
3. Navigate to the location where you want to save the bulk analysis log.
4. If desired, in the File name text box, type a different name for the log file.
5. On the Save Bulk Analyze Output window, click the Save button.
The log is saved to the selected located.
Accessing the TM Quick View Page

The TM Quick View page provides a summary of the information that is associated with
the Thickness Measurement Location records that are involved in an Asset Corrosion
Analysis. The purpose of the TM Quick View page is to provide an overview of
information for each Thickness Measurement Location record.
To access the TM Quick View for Thickness Measurement Location records:
1. On the Thickness Monitoring Functions page, click the Quick View link.
2. Perform a search to find the Equipment or TML Group records whose Thickness
Measurement Location records you want to view.
3. In the search results, select the desired Equipment or TML Group records, and
click the Open button.
The TM Quick View page appears.
Overview of the TM Quick View Page

The TM Quick View page displays:
A list of the Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to an

- and
Various information about each Thickness Measurement Location record.
The page contains the following items:

Equipment and/or TML Group records for which you accessed the page and the
records that are linked to those Equipment or TML Group records.
Grid: Displays summary information about each active Thickness Measurement

Location record that is linked to the Equipment or TML Group record whose node
is selected in the TM Explorer pane. Note that all fields are read-only.
functions that are available on the TM Quick View page. The following task
menus are available on the TM Quick View page:
Quick View Tasks
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
TM Explorer
The TM Explorer pane on the TM Quick View page displays nodes in a tree, where each
node represents one of the following items:
accessed the page.
The TM Explorer pane on the TM Quick View page is displayed using the Quick View
configured explorer, which is stored in the following folder in the Meridium APM
The selected node determines what is displayed in the grid on the TM Quick View page:
If you select an Equipment or TML Group node in the TM Explorer pane, the grid
displays the Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to the
Equipment or TML Group record whose node is selected.
If you select a Thickness Measurement Location node in the TM Explorer pane:
The grid displays all the Thickness Measurement Location records that are
linked to the Equipment or TML Group record to which the selected
Thickness Measurement Location record is linked.
The Thickness Measurement Location record whose node is selected will

be selected in the grid.
TM Quick View Page Grid

To the right of the TM Explorer pane, a grid is displayed. You can group and sort the rows
that are displayed in the grid, but you cannot add columns to or remove columns from the
grid.
The grid on the TM Quick View page displays the following fields for each Thickness
Measurement Location record:
TML ID
TML Asset ID
Corrosion Rate
TML Analysis Type
Minimum Thickness
Quick View Tasks
The Quick View Tasks menu on the TM Quick View page contains the following links:
different Equipment or TML Group records and open them on the TM Quick View
page.
View Tasks: Displays the Task List page in Task Management, where you can view
the Thickness Monitoring Task records that are linked to an Equipment or TML
Group record in the TM Analysis. This link is enabled only if one or more
Navigation
The Navigation menu on the TM Quick View page displays links to various Thickness
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the TM Quick View page contains the following links:
Print: Displays the Preview window, from which you can print the information
displayed in the grid.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the TM Quick View page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the TM Quick View page displays links only if Associated
Pages have been configured for the entity family of the record whose node is selected in
the TM Explorer pane. If no Associated Pages have been configured for the entity family,
the Associated Pages menu will be empty.
Overview of Minimum Thickness

Minimum Thickness (T-Min) is a value that represents the minimum allowable thickness
for a TML. The Minimum Thickness value is stored in the Minimum Thickness field of
Thickness Measurement Location records. The value is used for performing various
calculations in Thickness Monitoring, such as corrosion rate, next inspection date, and
projected T-Min date calculations. Minimum Thickness values are an important
component of corrosion analyses because they help determine when pieces of equipment
and components should be inspected and replaced.
T-Min values can be defined for Thickness Measurement Location records via the T-Min
Calculations page.
From the T-Min Calculations page, you can:
Calculate the T-Min value using a formula that has been defined for the Asset
type. This may be the baseline formula provided by Meridium APM or a custom
formula.
Look up the thickness value defined by industry standards based on design codes.
Look up the default minimum thickness value that is specified in the TML
Analysis Settings record that is linked to each Thickness Measurement Location
record.
Specify a custom T-Min value based upon design specifications or your

knowledge of the codes and system.
Accessing the T-Min Calculations Page

On the T-Min Calculations page, you can calculate and define the Minimum Thickness
value for one or more Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to one or
more Equipment or TML Group records.
Note: To access the T-Min Calculations page, you must be a Super User or a member of
the MI Thickness Monitoring Inspector Security Group.
To access the T-Min Calculations page:

1. On the Thickness Monitoring Functions page, click the T-min Calculator link.
2. Perform a search to find the Equipment or TML Group records that are linked to
the Thickness Measurement Location record for which you want to perform
calculations.
3. In the search results, select the desired Equipment or TML Group records, and
click the Open button.
A disclaimer about the T-Min Calculator appears, explaining that Meridium APM is not
intended to be a comprehensive tool for calculating the T-Min value.
4. Read the message, and then click OK.
The T-Min Calculations page appears.
Overview of the T-Min Calculations

Page
The T-Min Calculations page contains the:
TM Explorer pane: Contains a tree, which displays nodes to represent Equipment

and/or TML Group records and the Thickness Measurement Location records that
are linked to those Equipment or TML Group records.
T-Min Calculations workspace: Displays a toolbar that offers various options, and
a grid that displays Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to
the Equipment or TML Group record whose node is selected in the TM Explorer
pane. If your TM Analysis includes TML Group records and you select an
Equipment node in the TM Explorer pane, the Thickness Measurement Location
records associated with all the TML Group records that are linked to the
Equipment record are displayed in the grid. The Thickness Measurement Location
records in the grid are the records for which you can calculate the T-Min value.
functions that are available on the T-Min Calculations page. The following task
menus are available on the T-Min Calculations page:
T-Min Calculator Tasks
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
TM Explorer
The TM Explorer pane on the T-Min Calculations page displays nodes in a tree, where
each node represents one of the following items:
accessed the page.
The TM Explorer pane on the T-Min Calculations page is displayed using the T-Min
Calculator configured explorer, which is stored in the following folder in the Meridium
APM Catalog: \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Thickness Monitoring\Explorers.
The selected node in the TM Explorer pane determines what is displayed in the grid in the
T-Min Calculations workspace:
If you select an Equipment or TML Group node in the TM Explorer pane, the grid
in the T-Min Calculations workspace displays all the Thickness Measurement
Location records that are linked to the Equipment or TML Group record whose
node is selected. If your TM Analysis includes TML Group records and you select
an Equipment node in the TM Explorer pane, the Thickness Measurement
Location records associated with all the TML Group records that are linked to the
Equipment record are displayed in the grid.
If you select a Thickness Measurement Location node in the TM Explorer pane,
the grid in the T-Min Calculations workspace displays all the Thickness
record to which the Thickness Measurement Location record whose node is
selected is linked.
T-Min Calculations Workspace

To the right of the TM Explorer pane, the T-Min Calculations for <Record ID> (<Record
Family>) workspace is displayed.
The header is labeled T-Min Calculations for <Record ID> (<Record Family>), where
<Record ID> displays the record ID of the record for which you accessed the page, and
<Record Family> displays the family caption of the family to which that record belongs.
For example, the preceding image displays the workspace for the record Piping Circuit
0512, which belongs to the family Piping Circuit.
Note: Throughout this documentation, we refer to the T-Min Calculations for <Record
ID> (<Record Family>) workspace simply as the T-Min Calculations workspace.
The T-Min Calculations workspace contains a grid that displays the Thickness
Measurement Location records that are linked to the Equipment or TML Group record
whose node is selected in the TM Explorer pane. Each row in the grid represents a single
Thickness Measurement Location record, and the following columns of information are
displayed for each record:
Calculation Status: Appears as the first column in the grid and displays the status
of the calculation. This column will remain empty until a calculation has been
performed for the Thickness Measurement Location record. After the T-Min
calculations and lookups have been performed, cells in this column will display
one of the following symbols:
: Indicates the calculation was successful.
: Indicates the calculation was not successful.
Note: The Calculation Status column header does not have a caption, but we use this
name to identify this column throughout this documentation.
Process T-Min: A check box that determines whether the Meridium APM system
will calculate T-Min values for the Thickness Measurement Location record.
When you click the Calculate link on the T-Min Calculator Tasks menu, T-Min
values will be calculated for each row in which this check box is selected. When
you first access the T-Min Calculations page, this check box will be selected by
default for all Thickness Measurement Location records that are displayed in the
grid.
TML ID: The value stored in the TML ID field of the Thickness Measurement
Location record.
TML Asset: The value stored in the TML Asset ID field of the Thickness
Current T-Min (<UOM>): The value stored in the Minimum Thickness field of
the Thickness Measurement Location record. The <UOM> portion of the column
header identifies the Unit of Measure associated with the T-Min value and may
vary, depending upon the UOM Conversion set associated with your Security
User account.
Current Source: A value that identifies the source of the current Minimum
Thickness value: Calculated, Nominal, Default, or User Defined. For example, if
the current Minimum Thickness value was entered manually for a Thickness
Measurement Location record on the TM TMLs/Measurements page, the value in
the Current Source cell would be User Defined.
Proposed T-Min (<UOM>): The value that will be saved to the Minimum
Thickness field in Thickness Measurement Location record when you click the
Save link on the T-Min Calculator Tasks menu. After the T-Min calculations have
been performed, the Proposed T-Min cell will be populated with the most
conservative, or largest, T-Min value by default. The <UOM> portion of the
column header identifies the Unit of Measure associated with the T-Min value and
may vary, depending upon the UOM Conversion set associated with your Security
User account.
Proposed Source: The source of the value in the Proposed T-Min cell: Calculated,
Nominal, Default, or User Defined. After the T-Min calculations have been
performed, this cell will be populated with the source of the most conservative TMin value. If you select a different value from the list in the Proposed Source cell,
the value in the Proposed T-Min cell will be updated with the value that
corresponds to your selection.
Calculated T-Min (<UOM>): The T-Min value that the Meridium APM system
returns after a calculation is performed based upon the T-Min formulas. The
<UOM> portion of the column header identifies the Unit of Measure associated
with the T-Min value and may vary, depending upon the UOM Conversion set
associated with your Security User account.
Nominal T-Min (<UOM>): The T-Min value that the Meridium APM system
returns after using a query to find the appropriate Nominal T-Min value. The
<UOM> portion of the column header identifies the Unit of Measure associated
with the T-Min value and may vary, depending upon the UOM Conversion set
associated with your Security User account.
Default T-Min (<UOM>): The T-Min value that is specified in the Default T-Min
field in the Corrosion Analysis Settings record that is linked to the Thickness
Measurement Location record. The <UOM> portion of the column header
identifies the Unit of Measure associated with the T-Min value and may vary,
depending upon the UOM Conversion set associated with your Security User
account.
User T-Min (<UOM>): The value that you can prefer to use in place of the
Calculated T-Min, Nominal T-Min, or Default T-Min. You can type the desired
value into this cell. The <UOM> portion of the column header identifies the Unit
of Measure associated with the T-Min value and may vary, depending upon the
UOM Conversion set associated with your Security User account.
Calculation History: A cell that stores the calculation history of the Thickness
Note: All of the columns in the grid, with the exception of the Calculation Status, TML
ID, and Process T-Min, can be moved. These columns will remain on the left side of the
grid when you use the scroll bar to view columns in the grid.
Above the grid, a toolbar is displayed, containing the following options:
Displays the Calculation Status dialog box, which shows the progress of the TMin calculations as they are being performed. After the calculations are complete,
the appropriate cells will be populated in the grid.
Saves the values that are displayed in the Proposed T-Min cells to the Minimum
Thickness field in all the Thickness Measurement Location records that are
displayed in the grid.
Displays a drop-down menu that allows you to select the Thickness Measurement
Location datasheet, displaying the details of the selected Thickness Measurement
Location record.
To the left of the toolbar, the All check box is displayed. You can select or clear the All
check box to select or clear the check box in the Process T-Min column for every
Thickness Measurement Location record that is displayed in the grid in the T-Min
Calculations for <Record ID> workspace.
T-Min Calculator Tasks
The T-Min Calculator Tasks menu on the T-Min Calculations page contains the following
links:
one or more Equipment or TML Group records to work with on the T-Min
Calculations page.
Calculate: Displays the Calculation Status dialog box, which shows the progress
of the T-Min calculations as they are being performed. After the calculations are
complete, the appropriate cells will be populated in the grid in the T-Min
Calculations workspace.
Save and Analyze: Saves any changes that you have made on the T-Min
Calculations page and performs a TM Analysis. This link is enabled only if the
analysis settings necessary for updating the TM Analysis exist and if you have
modified the TM Analysis since you accessed the T-Min Calculations page.
Formulas: Opens the Formulas dialog box, which displays the formula that will be
used to calculate the T-Min value for the Thickness Measurement Location record
whose node is selected in the TM Explorer pane.
Navigation
The Navigation menu on the T-Min Calculations page displays links to various Thickness
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the T-Min Calculations page contains the following links:
Print: This link is always disabled on the T-Min Calculations page.

Page.

Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the T-Min Calculations page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the T-Min Calculations page displays links only if
About the Calculated T-Min Value

The Calculated T-Min value is determined by performing calculations using T-Min
formulas and values from the Thickness Measurement Location record. This calculation
may be performed using a default formula that is provided in the baseline Thickness
Monitoring product or a custom formula that has been defined for your implementation.
If desired, you can access the Formulas dialog box to view the formula that is being used
to perform the calculation.
Calculated T-Min values are determined using the following components:
Formulas that are stored in the Rules Library.

Values that are stored in Thickness Measurement Location records that serve as
inputs to the formulas.
Note: For Calculated T-Min values to be retrieved, Thickness Measurement Location

records must contain values in certain fields. Calculations will not be successful for
Thickness Measurement Location records that do not contain these values.
Mappings that determine which formula should be used based upon the inputs that
are supplied. These mappings are stored in records belonging to the Thickness
Monitoring Rules Lookup family.
Viewing the Calculated T-Min Formula

The formula for determining the Calculated T-Min value is derived from records in the
Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup reference table. When you select a Thickness
Measurement Location record in the grid in the T-Min Calculations for <Record ID>
workspace on the on the T-Min Calculations page, the Meridium APM system compares
certain values from that Thickness Measurement Location record to the values in records
in the Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup family to find the corresponding T-Min
formula. Provided that the selected Thickness Measurement Location record contains all
the values needed for retrieving the T-Min formula, you can view the formula on the
Formulas dialog box.
To view the formula that will be used for the Calculated T-Min value:
On the T-Min Calculations page, on the T-Min Calculator Tasks menu, click the
Formulas link.
The Formulas dialog box appears, displaying the formula that has been derived from the
Rules Library for the selected Thickness Measurement Location record.
About Required Fields

Meridium APM provides a set of baseline formulas that can be used for determining the
Calculated T-Min value. For these calculations to be successful, certain inputs are needed.
These inputs come from the Thickness Measurement Location records for which the
calculations are being performed. Without the necessary inputs, Meridium APM will not
be able to determine the Calculated T-Min value for a given Thickness Measurement
Location record. If you want Meridium APM to determine Calculated T-Min values, you
will need to supply values in these required fields in the Thickness Measurement
Location records in your database.
In this section of the documentation, we list the fields that must be populated in
Thickness Measurement Location records in order for Calculated T-Min values to be
returned using the baseline T-Min formulas. The lists of required fields are organized
according to equipment type, which is derived using the value in the Design Code fields
and other fields in each the Thickness Measurement Location record.
Note: If you are using custom T-Min formulas rather than the baseline formulas, this list
of required fields may not apply to your implementation.
Piping T-Min Calculations
B31.1
B31.3 A
B31.3 B
B31.3 C
B31.3 D
B31.4
B31.8
Pressure Vessel T-Min Calculations
Conical Head (Inside)

Conical Head (Outside)
Cylindrical Shell (Inside)
Cylindrical Shell (Outside)
Ellipsoidal Head (Inside)
Ellipsoidal Head (Outside)
Hemispherical Head (Inside)
Hemispherical Head (Outside)
Pipe Nozzle (Outside)
Spherical Shell (Inside)
Spherical Shell (Outside)
Toriconical Head (Inside)
Toriconical Head (Outside)
Toriconical Head, Knuckle Portion (Inside)
Toriconical Head, Knuckle Portion (Outside)
Torispherical Head (Inside)
Torispherical Head (Outside)
Tank T-Min Calculations
Annular Ring
Floor Plate
Riveted Shell
Roof Plate
Welded Shell
B31.1
Based upon the baseline T-Min formulas, the following fields must contain a value for
Meridium APM to determine the Calculated T-Min value for Thickness Measurement
Location records with the value B31.1 in the Design Code field:
Allowable Stress
Design Pressure
Joint Factor
Outside Diameter
Temperature Factor
B31.3 A
Location records with the value B31.3 A in the Design Code field:
Allowable Stress
Design Pressure
Joint Factor
Outside Diameter
Temperature Factor
B31.3 B
Location records with the value B31.3 B in the Design Code field:
Allowable Stress
Design Pressure
Joint Factor
Outside Diameter
B31.3 C
Location records with the value B31.3 C in the Design Code field:
Allowable Stress
Design Pressure
Joint Factor
Outside Diameter
B31.3 D
Location records with the value B31.3 D in the Design Code field:
Allowable Stress
Design Pressure
Joint Factor
Mechanical Allowance
Outside Diameter
Temperature Factor
B31.4
Allowable Stress
Design Pressure
Outside Diameter
B31.8
Allowable Stress
Design Factor
Design Pressure
Joint Factor
Outside Diameter
Temperature Factor
Conical Head (Inside)

Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field, Conical
Head in the Vessel Type field, and Inside in the PV Formula field:
Allowable Stress
Apex Angle
Design Pressure
Inside Diameter
Joint Factor
Conical Head (Outside)

Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field, Conical
Head in the Vessel Type field, and Outside in the PV Formula field:
Allowable Stress
Apex Angle
Design Pressure
Joint Factor
Outside Diameter
Cylindrical Shell (Inside)

Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field, Cylindrical
Shell in the Vessel Type field, and Inside in the PV Formula field:
Allowable Stress
Design Pressure
Inside Radius
Joint Factor
Cylindrical Shell (Outside)

Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field, Cylindrical
Shell in the Vessel Type field, and Outside in the PV Formula field:
Allowable Stress
Design Pressure
Joint Factor
Outside Radius
Ellipsoidal Head (Inside)

Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field, Ellipsoidal
Allowable Stress
Design Pressure
Inside Diameter
Joint Factor
Ellipsoidal Head (Outside)

Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field, Ellipsoidal
Allowable Stress
Design Pressure
Joint Factor
Outside Diameter
Hemispherical Head (Inside)

Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field,
Hemispherical Head in the Vessel Type field, and Inside in the PV Formula field:
Allowable Stress
Design Pressure
Inside Radius
Joint Factor
Hemispherical Head (Outside)

Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field,
Hemispherical Head in the Vessel Type field, and Outside in the PV Formula field:
Allowable Stress
Design Pressure
Joint Factor
Outside Radius
Pipe Nozzle (Outside)

Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field, Pipe Nozzle
in the Vessel Type field, and Outside in the PV Formula field:
Allowable Stress
Design Pressure
Joint Factor
Outside Diameter
Spherical Shell (Inside)

Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field, Spherical
Shell in the Vessel Type field, and Inside in the PV Formula field:
Allowable Stress
Design Pressure
Inside Radius
Joint Factor
Spherical Shell (Outside)

Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field, Spherical
Shell in the Vessel Type field, and Outside in the PV Formula field:
Allowable Stress
Design Pressure
Joint Factor
Outside Radius
Toriconical Head (Inside)

Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field, Toriconical
Allowable Stress
Apex Angle
Design Pressure
Inside Diameter
Joint Factor
Toriconical Head (Outside)

Allowable Stress
Apex Angle
Design Pressure
Joint Factor
Outside Diameter
Toriconical Head, Knuckle Portion

(Inside)
Head, Knuckle Portion in the Vessel Type field, and Inside in the PV Formula field:
Allowable Stress
Apex Angle
Design Pressure
Inside Diameter
Joint Factor
Knuckle Radius
Toriconical Head, Knuckle Portion

(Outside)
Head, Knuckle Portion in the Vessel Type field, and Outside in the PV Formula field:
Allowable Stress
Apex Angle
Design Pressure
Joint Factor
Knuckle Radius
Outside Diameter
Torispherical Head (Inside)

Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field, Torispherical
Allowable Stress
Design Pressure
Dish Radius
Joint Factor
Knuckle Radius
Torispherical Head (Outside)

Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field, Torispherical
Allowable Stress
Design Pressure
Dish Radius
Joint Factor
Knuckle Radius
Annular Ring
Location records with the value API 653 in the Design Code field and Annular Ring in
the Tank Type field:
Maximum Operating Fill Height

Plate Thickness
Specific Gravity
Tank Diameter
Note: Meridium APM uses the values in the preceding fields to calculate the Allowable
Stress value for these Thickness Measurement Location record. The calculated value is
then used to retrieve the appropriate T-Min value from the Tank T-Min Annular Ring
reference table.
Floor Plate
Location records with the value API 653 in the Design Code field and Floor Plate in the
Tank Type field:
Floor Plate has Detection?

Floor Plate has Reinforced Lining?
Note: Because these are logical fields, they always contain a value (i.e., Yes or No). The
Calculated T-Min value can be determined even if the check boxes in these fields are
cleared.
Riveted Shell
Location records with the value API 653 in the Design Code field and Riveted Shell in the
Tank Type field:
Joint Factor
Specific Gravity
Tank Diameter
Note: An Allowable Stress value of 21000 is always used for determining the Calculated
T-Min value for Thickness Measurement Location records with the value API 653 in the
Design Code field and Riveted Shell in the Tank Type field. If a value other than 21000
exists in the Allowable Stress field of these records, that value will be ignored and 21000
will be used in its place.
Roof Plate
Roof Plate is a baseline value for Tank Type field using the value API 653 in the Design
Code field. However, no baseline formulas are provided to calculate the T-Min value for
Thickness Measurement Location records with the value Roof Plate in the Tank Type
field.
Welded Shell
Location records with the value API 653 in the Design Code field and Welded Shell in the
Tank Type field:
Allowable Stress
Course Number
Joint Factor
Minimum Tensile Strength
Minimum Yield Strength
Specific Gravity
Tank Diameter
Nominal T-Min
Nominal T-Min is a T-Min value that represents the minimum thickness of a pipe based
upon accepted industry standards. The Nominal T-Min value takes into account various
design specifications and determines the minimum thickness associated with that criteria.
The Nominal T-Min value is located using values from Thickness Measurement Location
records and records in the Piping Nominal T-Min reference table. For the Nominal T-Min
value to be retrieved for a given Thickness Measurement Location record, that record
must contain values in the fields that are required for the lookup to occur, as determined
by the Nominal T-Min Lookup settings.
The Nominal T-Min value applies only to TMLs on piping equipment. When you
calculate the T-Min values via the T-Min Calculations page, a Nominal T-Min value will
be retrieved only for Thickness Measurement Location records with a Design Code that
corresponds to the piping equipment type, based upon the references that exist in the
MI_ASSET_TYPE System Code Table.
Default T-Min
The Default T-Min is the minimum thickness value that is displayed in the Default T-Min
cell for each Thickness Measurement Location record in the grid in the T-Min
Calculations for <Record ID> workspace on the T-Min Calculations page. When a TMin calculation is performed, the Meridium APM system retrieves the value from the
value stored in the Default T-Min field in the Corrosion Analysis Settings record that is
linked to the Thickness Measurement Location record.
User Defined T-Min

The User Defined T-Min is the minimum thickness value that is displayed in the User TMin cell for each Thickness Measurement Location record in the grid in the T-Min
Calculations workspace on the T-Min Calculations page.
For any Thickness Measurement Location record for a User Defined T-Min, in the grid in
the T-Min Calculations workspace, the User T-Min cell will be populated with the value
in the Minimum Thickness field of that record. If the Minimum Thickness Type is
anything other than User Defined, the User T-Min cell will be empty when you access the
T-Min Calculations page. Regardless of whether the User T-Min cell contains a value
when you access the T-Min Calculations page, you can specify a User Defined T-Min
value by typing the desired value in this cell.
What Happens when a Calculation is

Performed?
On the T-Min Calculations page, when you click the Calculate link on the T-Min
Calculator Tasks menu or click the button above the grid in the T-Min Calculations
workspace, the Meridium APM system performs the following operations for each
Thickness Measurement Location record for which the Process check box is selected:
1. Determines the following values:
Calculated T-Min, which will be displayed in the Calculated T-Min cell in

the grid in the T-Min Calculations workspace.
Nominal T-Min, which will be displayed in the Nominal T-Min cell in the
grid in the T-Min Calculations workspace.
Default T-Min, which will be displayed in the Default T-Min cell in the
grid in the T-Min Calculations workspace.
2. Compares the Calculated T-Min, Nominal T-Min, Default T-Min, and User T-Min
(if one exists) and determines the most conservative (i.e., largest) of the four
values.
3. Populates the Proposed T-Min cell in the grid in the T-Min Calculations
workspace with the most conservative value determined in step 2.
Note: If you type a value in the User T-Min cell after performing a calculation, the value
in the Proposed T-Min cell will be updated with the value you typed in the User T-Min
cell, regardless of whether it is the most conservative value.
The Proposed Source cell will also be populated with one of the four values that
identifies the type of T-Min value that was selected in this step: Calculated, Nominal,
Default, or User Defined. The following image shows the grid in the T-Min Calculations
workspace on T-Min Calculations page after a calculation has been performed.
Starting the Calculation Process

Using the T-Min Calculations page, you can perform calculations to determine the
Minimum Thickness value for each Thickness Measurement Location record.
To calculate T-Min values and update Thickness Measurement Location records:
1. Access the T-Min Calculations page for the Equipment or TML Group records
that are linked to the Thickness Measurement Location records whose minimum
thickness you want to calculate.
2. In the grid in the T-Min Calculations workspace, select the check box in the
Process T-Min column for the Thickness Measurement Location records for
which you want to calculate the minimum thickness, as shown in the following
image.
3. If you want to specify a User Defined T-Min value that will be compared to the
calculated values, type the desired value in the User T-Min cell for the desired
Note: For any Thickness Measurement Location record in which the Minimum Thickness
Type is set to User Defined, when you access the T-Min Calculations page, the User TMin cell will be populated with the value in the Minimum Thickness field of that record.
You can modify the existing value as desired.
4. On the T-Min Calculator Tasks menu, click the Calculate link.
The Calculation Status dialog box appears, displaying the information for the T-Min
calculation for each Thickness Measurement Location record for which a T-Min
calculation was performed.
When the calculations are complete, you can save the information displayed in the
Calculation Status dialog box by clicking the Save Log button, if desired.
5. Click the Close button.
The results of the calculations are displayed in the grid in the T-Min Calculations
workspace. For each Thickness Measurement Location record for which the calculation
was successful, the Proposed T-Min cell will be populated with the most conservative TMin value from all Thickness Measurement Location records that were included in the
calculation. The source of this value will be populated in the Proposed Source field:
Calculated, Nominal, Default, or User Defined.
6. If you want the T-Min value in a Thickness Measurement Location record to be

determined by a different source:
o In the row containing the desired Thickness Measurement Location
record, in the Proposed Source cell, click the
button, and select the
calculation type that you want to use as the source for the T-Min value for
the Thickness Measurement Location record: Calculated, Nominal,
Default, or User Defined.
-or
o
In the row containing the desired Thickness Measurement Location

record, type the desired value in the User T-Min cell.
The value in the Proposed T-Min cell is updated as appropriate. If you modified the value
in the User T-Min cell, the value in the Proposed Source cell will be updated to User
Defined. In the following image, the User Defined calculation type has been selected
from the list in the Proposed Source cell, and the value in both the Proposed T-Min and
User T-Min cells is 0.012.
7. On the T-Min Calculator Tasks menu, click the Save and Analyze link.
For each Thickness Measurement Location in the grid:
The Current T-Min cell is updated with the value in the Proposed T-Min
cell, which is also saved as the value in the Minimum Thickness field in
the Thickness Measurement Location record.
The Current Source cell is updated with the value in the Proposed Source
cell, which is also saved as the value for the Minimum Thickness Type
field in the Thickness Measurement Location record.
All cells that contain T-Min values or T-Min value sources are cleared, with the exception
of the Current T-Min and Current Source columns.
About the Calculation Details

When you perform a T-Min calculation, the Calculation Status dialog box appears, which
shows the progress of the calculations as they are being performed. After the calculations
are complete, you can use this dialog box to interpret the calculation progress. If desired,
you can save the results that are displayed in the dialog box to an external file.
After you close the Calculation Status dialog box, you can access it again for individual
Thickness Measurement Location records from the toolbar above grid in the T-Min
Calculations workspace on the T-Min Calculations page.
Interpreting the Calculation Details

The Calculation Status dialog box displays information about the T-Min calculations that
you perform. The information that appears in the dialog box is separated into sections
representing each Thickness Measurement Location record whose T-Min value was
calculated, as determined by the selection of the Process T-Min check box in the grid in
the T-Min Calculations workspace on the T-Min Calculations page.
Each section contain specific information about that Thickness Measurement Location
record and the calculation that was performed against it.
Note: If a calculation was not successful, some sections will not contain data, or they will
contain information indicating the problem that the Meridium APM system encountered
when trying to complete the calculation.
The following image shows an example of the Calculation Status dialog box. In this
image, only one Thickness Measurement Location record was included in the calculation.
Note: The Calculation Status dialog box displays converted values rather than base, or
stored, values. Although units of measure are not displayed on the Calculation Status
dialog box, the UOM Conversion Set that is associated with your Security User account
is applied to the values displayed in the Calculation Status dialog box.
The Calculation Status dialog box is divided into the following sections for each
Thickness Measurement Location record:
TML : <TML ID>, where <TML ID> is the TML ID of the Thickness
Measurement Location whose calculation details you are viewing. This section
displays the following information:
o
o
Minimum Thickness Value: The current Minimum Thickness value.

Minimum Thickness Source: The source of the current Minimum
Thickness value.
By User: The User ID of the Security User who saved the current
Minimum Thickness value.
On Date: The date on which the current Minimum Thickness value was
last saved.
Calculated T-Min: This section displays the following information:
o
o
Value: The Calculated T-Min value.

Formula Used: The location in the Rules Library where the formula that
was used to calculate the Calculated T-Min value is stored.
Note: Below the formula that was used, the Calculated T-Min section displays the fields
that were used in the calculations and the values that those fields contained at the time of
the calculation.
Nominal T-Min value: This section displays the following information:
Nominal T-Min value: The Nominal T-Min value that was retrieved using
the Piping Nominal T-Min reference table.
Values used for the lookup: The fields in the Thickness Measurement
Location record that were used to retrieve the Nominal T-Min value.
Note: The Nominal T-Min value section appears only for calculations that have been
performed for Thickness Measurement Location records with a Design Code that
corresponds to the Piping Asset Type.
Default T-Min value: This section displays the value that is stored in the Default
T-Min field in the Corrosion Analysis Settings record that is linked to the
User Defined T-Min value: This section displays the value in the User T-Min field
in the Thickness Measurement Location record.
Saving the Calculation Details

You can save the calculation log while viewing the Calculation Status dialog box after
the calculations have been performed or for one Thickness Measurement Location record
while viewing the Details dialog box for that Thickness Measurement Location record.
To save the calculation log as a text file:
1. On the Calculation Status dialog box or the Details dialog box, click the Save
Log button.
The Save As dialog box appears.
2. Navigate to the location where you want to save the calculation log.
3. In the File name text box, enter the name that you want to give the saved
calculation log file.
4. Click the Save button.
The calculation log is saved as a text (.TXT) file.
About TML Calculation Details

Calculation details are logged for each Thickness Measurement Location record each
time you perform a T-Min calculation for it. You can view these details on the:
Current Calculation Results Details dialog box: Displays the details of the
calculation that was most recently performed for a given Thickness Measurement
Location record.
Calculation Results History dialog box: Displays the details of ALL the
calculations that were attempted for a given Thickness Measurement Location
record. The details included on this dialog box are the same as the details
displayed on the Current Calculation Results Details dialog box, but on the
Calculation Results History dialog box, the details are repeated once for each time
a calculation was performed.
The information displayed on each of these dialog boxes is similar to the data displayed
on the Calculation Results dialog box, which appears when T-Min calculations are
performed. Additionally, like the Calculation Results dialog box, the Current Calculation
Results Details and Calculation Results History dialog boxes offer an option that lets you
save the details to a file.
Viewing the Details for the Most Recent

Calculation
To view the calculation details for a single Thickness Measurement Location record:
1. On the T-Min Calculations page, in the grid in the T-Min Calculations workspace,
in the row containing the Thickness Measurement Location record whose T-Min
calculation details you want to view, click the button in the Calculation Status
cell.
The Current Calculation Results Details dialog box appears, displaying the calculation
details for the Thickness Measurement Location record.
Viewing the History of All Calculations

To view the calculation details of all calculations attempted for a given Thickness
On the T-Min Calculations page, in the grid in T-Min Calculations workspace, in

the row containing the Thickness Measurement Location record whose T-Min
calculation details you want to view, locate the Calculation History cell in the
grid, and click the
button.
The Calculation Results History dialog box appears, displaying the details of all T-Min
calculations that have been performed for the Thickness Measurement Location record.
Resetting User Grid Preferences

Various grids are displayed throughout Thickness Monitoring. For example, on the TM
TMLs/Measurements page, Thickness Measurement Location records are displayed in a
The grids within Thickness Monitoring have a set of default settings that control the
appearance of the grids when users view them the first time, including the columns that
are displayed, the column order, the sort order, and so on. If a Security User modifies the
settings for a grid, those changes will be saved for that Security User so that the next time
that user views the same grid, rather than displaying the default grid settings, the
Meridium APM system will display the user-specific settings.
The TM Administrative Tasks page offers an option that you can use to reset a Security
User's saved grid preferences so that the next time that user views the grid, the default
grid preferences will be used. Grid preferences can be reset for each Thickness
Monitoring Security User and for various pages in Thickness Monitoring.
To reset a Security User's grid preferences:
2. Click the Reset User Preferences link.
The Reset User Preferences page appears.
3. In the Reset User Preferences for the following forms list, select the page for
which you want to reset a Security User's grid preferences.
4. In the Select Users list, select the check box to the left of the User ID of the
Security User whose grid preferences you want to reset. You can clear the check
box to the left of the User ID of any Security User whose grid preferences you do
not want to reset. Note that:
1.
The User ID associated with the Security User who is currently logged in
to Meridium APM will be selected by default. Be sure to clear this check
box if you do not want to reset the grid preferences for this user.
The list of Security Users is sorted alphabetically by Last Name. The sort
order cannot be changed.
5. At the bottom right of the Select Users list, click the Reset button.
Note: The Reset button will be enabled only if at least one Security User is selected in the
Select Users list.
A message appears, indicating that the grid preferences were reset successfully.
About Devices in Thickness Monitoring

The Meridium APM Devices functionality (referred to as Datalogger in the Thickness
Monitoring module) allows for the collection and transfer of data between a Meridium
APM database and a device, which can be a physical piece of hardware, such as a
handheld data-collection tool, or a file, such as a spreadsheet or text file. The Meridium
APM Devices interface enables direct communication between supported data-collection
devices, the Meridium APM Framework machine, and the Meridium APM database. This
is done by defining a device and associating with it a mapping, which defines the data
that is to be sent to and received from the data-collection device.
In Thickness Monitoring, devices are used to collect readings that will be uploaded to
Meridium APM to create Thickness Measurement records. More specifically:
You will send to a device the TMLs for which you want to collect measurement
data.
After the readings have been collected and reside on the device, you will upload
them to a Meridium APM database via a receive operation.
The readings that are uploaded will be used to create new Thickness Measurement
records that are linked to the Thickness Measurement Location records that you
sent to the device.
The following devices are supported by Meridium APM Thickness Monitoring:
Access Database
Microsoft Excel 5.0/Excel 95
Microsoft Excel 2000
Microsoft Excel 97
GE DMS Go
GE DMS Go+
ODBC
Panametrics 37DL Plus Ultrasonic Thickness Gage
Text
Note the following details about sending data to specific devices:
The following devices do not accept Asset IDs containing lowercase characters:
The Krautkramer Branson DMS2 Instrument and the GE DMS Go/DMS Go+
device will only use the first 32 characters of any item you send. This means that
if an Asset ID is longer than 32 characters, it can be sent to the devices, but the
file created on the devices will only contain the first 32 characters of the name. If
you send items longer than 32 characters, you will receive a message indicating
the original item name and the truncated item name.
Note also that if multiple items are sent to this device, and the first 32 characters of the
items are identical, a single file will be created on the device using those 32 characters.
All items that were sent will appear in that file.
For a more expedient transfer of TM data when using a GE DMS Go/DMS Go+
device, you can remove the memory card from the GE DMS Go/DMS Go+ device
and plug the card directly into a card reader attached to your local machine.
Accessing Devices in Thickness

Monitoring
To access the Devices interface from the Thickness Monitoring Functions page:
On the Thickness Monitoring Functions page, click the Datalogger link.
The Select a Device and Properties dialog box appears.
From the Select a Device and Properties dialog box, you can:
Add a new device.

Edit an existing device.
Delete a device.
Access the Manage Device Mappings dialog box, where you can manage the
mappings for a given device.
Initiate a send operation.
Initiate a receive operation.
How Devices Handle Multiple Readings

When you send TM data to a device, you download to the device information about the
Thickness Measurement Location records for which you want to collect readings. While
the Meridium APM system supports multiple readings per measurement, devices support
only one reading per TML. Therefore, when you send data to a device:
The Meridium APM system will evaluate the value in the Number of Readings
field in each Thickness Measurement Location record that you send to the device.
On the device, one entry will be created for each reading that needs to be
collected. If multiple readings need to be collected for a given TML, multiple
entries will be created on the device for that Thickness Measurement Location
record. Each entry on the device will be identified by the value [TML ID][x]*,
where TML ID is the value in the TML ID field and x is a letter of the alphabet.
When you receive readings that have been collected on the device, the Meridium
APM system will combine all the entries for a given TML and use them to create
a single Thickness Measurement record to store ALL the collected reading values.
Consider, for example, a Thickness Measurement Location record with the TML ID
TML1 that contains the value 3 in the Number of Readings field. When this TML is sent
to the device, three entries will be created on the device:
TML1a*
TML1b*
TML1c*
Now, assume that you record the following readings for the entries.
Entry
Reading
TML1a*
0.31
TML1b*
0.315
TML1c*
0.311
When you receive the data from the device, ONE Thickness Measurement record will be
created. It will be linked to the Thickness Measurement Location record TML1 and will
contain the following values in the Readings field:
0.31
0.315
0.311
About TM Device Mappings

To use devices in TM, you must create mappings that determine what information will be
transferred to and from the device. Two types of mappings are needed:
Send Mappings: Identify the data that will be transferred from the Meridium APM
database to a device and what fields on the device should be populated with that
data.
Receive Mappings: Identify the data that will be transferred from a device to the
Meridium APM database and what fields in Meridium APM records should be
populated with that data.
The documentation provides a list of fields that are required for send and receive
mappings and the corresponding Meridium APM field. However, the documentation does
not provide detailed instructions on creating these mappings and instead assumes that you
have a general understanding of the mapping creation process and how devices are used
in TM. Keep in mind that each mapping, however, has requirements that are specific to
TM and the device for which the mapping is being created.
Fields Required for Send and Receive

Mappings
The following tables list the fields that must exist in TM send and receive mappings to
ensure successful send and receive operations for TM data. For some devices, additional
fields are supported and can also be included in the send and receive mappings. Any field
not listed in this topic, however, is not necessary for ensuring the success of send and
receive operations. If you choose to map additional device fields, you will need to
associate them with a corresponding Meridium APM field.
Note: The following mappings are supported for ALL TM devices except where
otherwise noted.
Fields Required for Send Mappings

Meridium APM Field
Device Field
TML Asset ID (Thickness Measurement

Location)
Asset ID
TML ID (Thickness Measurement Location) Datapoint ID

Unit of Measure (MI Unit of Measure)
Datapoint Unit of Measure
Number of Readings (Thickness

Measurement Location)
Number of Readings
Fields Required for Receive Mappings

Meridium APM Field
Device Field
TML Asset ID (Thickness Measurement

Location)
Asset ID
TML ID (Thickness Measurement Location) Datapoint ID

Unit of Measure (MI Unit of Measure)
Datapoint Unit of Measure
Readings (Thickness Measurement)
Reading Values
About Skipping Measurements in TM

The Meridium APM Thickness Monitoring module provides the option to skip
measurements, meaning that you want to record an inspection date for a particular TML
to satisfy inspection requirements, but not actually take a measurement at the TML.
When you skip a measurement, instead of creating a Thickness Measurement record
containing measurement values associated with that TML for a particular inspection, you
will create a Measurement Not Taken record to store the inspection data.
Some reasons that you may want to skip measurements include:
The physical location of certain TMLs on a piece of equipment or component may

be difficult to reach or require a shutdown in order to take a measurement.
Your organization may have a strategy in place that dictates that if measurements
are taken for a certain percentage of TMLs on a piece of equipment or component,
then it is acceptable not to take measurements for the remaining TMLs.
Resource limitations may make it difficult or impossible to take measurements at
all TMLs on all pieces of equipment or components.
In order to skip measurements in Thickness Monitoring, you first must enable this option
in your global preferences. Then you will need to create Measurement Not Taken records
to represent any measurement that was skipped. After you have enabled this option and
created Measurement Not Taken records, TM Analyses containing skipped measurements

will be updated to take those Measurement Not Taken records into account.
IMPORTANT: The Meridium APM Thickness Monitoring Best Practice is to record
actual readings for all inspections and not skip measurements. This section of the
documentation provides information on using this functionality if you decide to deviate
from the Thickness Monitoring Best Practice. All TM documentation outside of this
section assumes that the skip measurements feature is disabled.
Enabling the Option to Skip

Measurements
In order to skip measurements in TM, you must enable this option in the global
preferences. When you have enabled this option, the
toolbar above the grid:
button is displayed on the
In the Measurements pane on the TM TMLs/Measurements page.
On the TM Measurement Data Entry page.
If you enable this option and create Measurement Not Taken records and then later
disable this option, any Measurement Not Taken records that you created will be ignored
in the TM Analysis (i.e., all calculations will be performed as if the Measurement Not
Taken records did not exist).
To enable the option to skip measurements:
1. Access the Global Preferences page.
2. In the Measurement Preferences section, select the Allow Measurements to be
Skipped check box.
The Allow Consecutive Skipped Measurements check box becomes enabled, as shown in
the following image.
3. If you want to also enable the option to skip measurements consecutively, select
the Allow Consecutive Skipped Measurements check box.
4. On the Global Preferences task menu, click the Save link.

Your selections are saved.
About Skipping Measurements

Consecutively
If you enable the option to skip measurements in TM, you will also have the option to
enable a feature that allows you to skip measurements consecutively. When you do this,
you will be able to create back-to-back Measurement Not Taken records. This concept is
best understood through an example.
Suppose that the TML TML01 is difficult to reach. As a result, your organizational policy
dictates that while readings for all other TMLs on the associated piece of equipment must
be taken every six months, a reading for TML01 must be taken only once per year, as
illustrated in the following table.
TML
TML01
Scheduled readings
June 1, 2014
June 1, 2015
June 1, 2014
December 1, 2014
TML02
June 1, 2015
December 1, 2015
June 1, 2014
December 1, 2014
TML03
June 1, 2015
December 1, 2015
Continuing with this example, suppose that you create a Measurement Not Taken record
when a reading is skipped for TML01 on December 1, 2014. Next, suppose that due to
budget constraints at your facility, the scaffolding necessary to gain access to TML01 is
unable to be built on June 1, 2015 (the date on which an actual thickness measurement
reading is scheduled to be taken for this TML). In this case, you may want to create
another Measurement Not Taken record for TML01, assuming that an actual measurement
will be taken when possible.
Enabling the Option to Skip

Measurements Consecutively
To enable the option to skip measurements consecutively:
1. Access the Global Preferences page.
2. In the Measurement Preferences section, with the Allow Measurements to be
Skipped check box selected, select the Allow Consecutive Skipped Measurements
check box.
3. On the Global Preferences task menu, click the Save link.

Your selections are saved.
Rules for Creating Measurement Not

Taken Records
When you enable the option to skip measurements in TM, it is important to keep in mind
the following rules:
You can create a Measurement Not Taken record only for Thickness Measurement
Location records for which at least one of the following items exists:
o An active, actual thickness measurement.
-orAn active, nominal thickness measurement.

Measurement Not Taken records are not considered actual measurements with
respect to determining when nominal measurements are made inactive
measurements.
o
About Creating Measurement Not

Taken Records
You can create Measurement Not Taken records and link them to Thickness Measurement
Location records to represent measurements that you skipped during an inspection. You
can create:
A single Measurement Not Taken record using the TM TMLs/Measurements or

TM Measurement Data Entry page.
Multiple Measurement Not Taken records at one time using the TM Measurement
Data Entry page.
In order to create Measurement Not Taken records, the option to skip measurements must
be enabled on the Global Preferences page.
Creating Measurement Not Taken

Records Using the TM Measurement
Data Entry Page
If you are entering thickness measurements for ALL the Thickness Measurement
Location records that are linked to a given Equipment or TML Group record and you
want to create Measurement Not Taken records, you can use the TM Measurement Data
Entry page.
To create Measurement Not Taken records using the TM Measurement Data Entry page:
1. In the grid, select the row representing the TML for which you want to create a
Measurement Not Taken record.
2. On the toolbar above the grid, click the
button.
3. A Measurement Not Taken record is created and linked to the associated

Thickness Measurement Location record. The following cells in the selected row
in the grid are populated with values:
o
Readings: Displays the value <Not Taken>.
Measurement Taken Date: Displays the date on which the Measurement

Not Taken record was created.
Creating Measurement Not Taken

Records Using the TM
TMLs/Measurements Page
To create a Measurement Not Taken record using the TM TMLs/Measurements page:
1. In the grid in the TMLs pane, select the row representing the TML for which you
want to create a Measurement Not Taken record. In the following image, the row
containing the Thickness Measurement Location record with TML ID TML01 is
selected.
2. On the toolbar above the grid in the Measurements pane, click the
button.
3. In the Measurement Taken Date box, type or select a date that corresponds with
the inspection during which you skipped a measurement for the TML. Today's
date is displayed in this box by default.
4. Click OK.
A Measurement Not Taken record is created and linked to the Thickness Measurement
Location record. A new row containing details of the Measurement Not Taken record is
displayed in the grid in the Measurements pane. The Readings cell is populated with the
value <Not Taken>, and the other cells are populated with values stored in the
Measurement Not Taken record. A red outline has been added to the following image to
highlight the new row that is displayed in the grid.
Creating Multiple Measurement Not

Taken Records Using the TM
If you want to create Thickness Measurement records and Measurement Not Taken
records for the Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to an Equipment
or TML Group record, you can create multiple Measurement Not Taken records at one
time using the Create Skipped Measurements window. The following instructions assume
that you are viewing the TM Measurement Data Entry page for the Equipment or TML
Group record whose Thickness Measurement Location records for which you want to
create Thickness Measurement records and Measurement Not Taken records.
To create multiple Measurement Not Taken records at one time via the TM Measurement
Data Entry page:
1. In the grid, for each Thickness Measurement Location record for which you want
to create Thickness Measurement records, type a value in the Readings cell.
In the following image, the Readings cell for the Thickness Measurement Location
records with TML IDs TML01 and TML02 contains a value.
The Create Skipped Measurements window appears.
The check boxes for the Thickness Measurement Location records for which you did not
enter a value in the Readings cell and their associated Equipment or TML Group record
are selected by default.
3. If you want to create Measurement Not Taken records for:
All of the Thickness Measurement Location records for which you did not
enter a value in the Readings cell, accept the default selections.
Some of the Thickness Measurement Location records for which you did
not enter a value in the Readings cell, clear the check boxes for the
Thickness Measurement Location records for which you do not want to
create Measurement Not Taken records.
In the following image, the check box for the Thickness Measurement Location record
with TML ID TML04 is selected.
4. Click OK.
A confirmation message appears, indicating that measurements have been saved, and the
Readings cell in grid for Thickness Measurement Location records for which you created
Measurement Not Taken records is populated with the value <Not Taken>. The following
image shows an example of this confirmation message, and the value <Not Taken>
displayed in the Readings cell in the grid for the Thickness Measurement Location record
with TML ID TML04.
5. Click OK.
The TM Measurement Data Entry page returns to focus, displaying a blank grid.
Viewing the Details of a Measurement

Not Taken Record
The details of Measurement Not Taken records are displayed in the grid in the
Measurements pane on the TM TMLs/Measurements page. You can scroll to the right in
the grid to view all of the columns of information displayed for each Measurement Not
Taken record. Additionally, you can view the details of a single Measurement Not Taken
record using the Measurement Not Taken datasheet.
To view the details of a Measurement Not Taken record:
representing the Thickness Measurement Location record whose Measurement
Not Taken record you want to view.
2. In the Measurements grid, select the row containing the Measurement Not Taken
record whose details you want to view.
3. On the toolbar above the Measurements grid, click the
Thickness Measurement Datasheet.
The Measurement Not Taken window appears, displaying the Measurement Not Taken
datasheet.
Interpreting Calculations in TM
Analyses that Include Skipped
Measurements
IMPORTANT: Some terms that are used in this section of the documentation are defined
in the Glossary section of the TM documentation. Consult the topics in the Glossary
section for more information.
When active measurements and Measurement Not Taken records exist in a TM Analysis,
all calculations, with the exception of Interval Next Inspection Date, are calculated as if
Measurement Not Taken records are not included in your TM Analysis. For example,
consider the calculation for Short Term Corrosion Rate. Short Term Corrosion Rate is
calculated using the Short Term Loss and Short Term Interval, where:
Short Term Corrosion Rate = Short Term Loss / Short Term Interval
...where:
Short Term Loss = Near Measurement Value - Last Measurement Value
...and:
Short Term Interval = Last Measurement Date - Near Measurement Date
Continuing with the example, consider the following measurements.
Reading
Date
Measurement (inches)
Base
1/1/1985
.2
N/A
1/1/1987
<Measurement Not Taken>
Near
1/1/1990
.195
N/A
1/1/1993
Last
1/1/1995
.19
N/A
1/1/2000
Short Term Loss = .195 - .19

Short Term Loss = .005
Short Term Interval = 1/1/1995 - 1/1/1990
Short Term Interval = 5 years
Short Term Corrosion Rate = .005 / 5
Short Term Corrosion Rate = .001
Note that the Short Term Loss was not calculated using a Last Measurement Value of
1/1/2000, the date in the Measurement Not Taken record that is associated with the most
recent inspection of this TML. There is no value associated with this date (or the date in
ANY Measurement Not Taken record) and therefore, these records are ignored in all TM
calculations with the exception of Interval Next Inspection Date.

When Measurement Not Taken records are included in a TM Analysis, Interval Next
Inspection Date is calculated using the following equation:
Interval Next Inspection Date = Last Measurement Date + Default Inspection Interval
Where Last Measurement Date is the most recent value in the Measurement Taken Date
field of ALL the active Thickness Measurement and active Measurement Not Taken
records linked to a given Thickness Measurement Location record.
For example, consider a Default Inspection Interval of 60 months (i.e., 5 years) and a
Thickness Measurement Location record that is linked to records with the following
Measurement Taken Dates.
Record
Thickness
Measurement
1/1/2004
Measurement Not
Taken
1/1/2005
Thickness
Measurement
1/1/2006
Measurement Not
Taken
1/1/2007
In this case, the Interval Next Inspection Date would be calculated as:
Interval Next Inspection Date = 1/1/2007 + 60 months
Interval Next Inspection Date = 1/1/2012

You will know when a Measurement Not Taken record is being used to calculate the
Interval Next Inspection Date for a Thickness Measurement Location record based upon
visual cues on the TM Analysis page.
Skipped Measurements and TML

Corrosion Analysis Fields
When a TML's most recent measurement date is a date from a Measurement Not Taken
record, and when the TML's controlling corrosion rate is less than the equipment
controlling corrosion rate, the following fields in the TML Corrosion Analysis record are
populated:

Asset Average Corrosion Rate Remaining Life
Asset Average Corrosion Rate Retirement Date
Asset Average Corrosion Rate Next Inspection Date
This differs from when these fields are populated in a TM Analysis does not include
skipped measurements.
In the preceding scenario, the Asset Average Corrosion Rate field is populated with the
asset controlling corrosion rate. For example, consider a TM Analysis with:
An asset controlling corrosion rate of 123 MILS/year

A TML with a corrosion rate of 110 MILS/year whose most recent measurement
date is from a Measurement Not Taken record.
In this case, the Asset Average Corrosion Rate would be set to 123 MILS/year.
This Asset Average Corrosion Rate value could be the result of any method that is
specified to determine the asset controlling corrosion rate (Maximum, Average, or
Formula). This differs from a TM Analysis that does not include skipped measurements.
When a TM Analysis does not include skipped measurements, the Asset Average
Corrosion Rate field is populated only when certain settings are specified, and this value
can be the result only of an Average or Formula method that is specified to determine the
asset controlling corrosion rate.
Asset Average Corrosion Rate is an input to some of the calculations that are used to
populate the three remaining fields mentioned above. These calculations are performed
using the same formulas that are used when a TM Analysis does not include skipped
measurements. The results of the same calculations in a TM Analysis that includes
skipped measurements versus a TM Analysis that does not include skipped
measurements, however, may differ because of the values that can be used to populate the
Asset Average Corrosion Rate field in each of these TM Analyses.
These values are displayed in the Adjusted Corrosion Data section in the TML Corrosion
Analysis Details workspace.
Skipped Measurements and the TM

Analysis Page
When the Measurement Taken Date value in a Measurement Not Taken record is used to
calculate Interval Next Inspection Date for a TML, a red arrow is displayed to the left of
this value in the TML Corrosion Analysis Details workspace on the TM Analysis page. A
red outline has been added to the following image to highlight this arrow.
Skipped Measurements and the TML

Analysis Plot Page
You cannot view the TML Analysis Plot for a Thickness Measurement Location record
for which you have created:
Only one active Thickness Measurement record.
-and
One or more Measurement Not Taken records.
When you try to access the TML Analysis Plot page for a Thickness Measurement
Location record that meets these criteria, an error message is displayed.
Measurement Not Taken Records

Measurement Not Taken records are used in Thickness Monitoring when you have
enabled the option to skip measurements. The following table lists the fields in
Measurement Not Taken records, and the data type, description, and usage of those fields.
Field
Comment
Measurement
Status
Changed By
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
This field is used to store descriptive

information about the skipped
Additional information
measurement that is not recorded in any
Character about the skipped
other field in the Measurement Not
measurement.
Taken record. This field is not used by
the Meridium APM System.
The first and last name This field is populated automatically
of the Meridium APM when the Measurement Status Indicator
Security User who last field is populated for the first time. This
Character
changed the value in field is updated automatically when the
the Measurement
Measurement Status Indicator field is
Status Indicator field. modified.
Status
Date
Changed Date
The date that the value

in the Measurement
Status Indicator field
was first populated or
modified.
This field is populated automatically

when the value in the Measurement
Status Indicator field is populated for
the first time. This field is updated
automatically when the Measurement
Status Indicator field is modified.
This field can contain one of the

following values:
Active
Inactive
Indicates whether the When you create a Measurement Not

Measurement
Measurement Not
Taken record, the value in this field is
Status
Character
Taken Record is active Active by default.
Indicator
or inactive.
When a Measurement Not Taken
record's associated Thickness
renewed, the value in this field is set to
Inactive by default.
The first and last name
of the Meridium APM
Measurement
Security User who
Character
when a Measurement Not Taken record
Taken By
created the
is created.
Measurement Not
Taken record.
Measurement
Date
Taken Date
Historical
Sequence
Number
The date of the

When you create a Measurement Not
inspection on which
Taken record, you can specify this value
the measurement was
via the New Measurement dialog box.
skipped.
This value is populated automatically
when the associated Thickness
renewed.
For example, if a Thickness

Measurement Location record is linked
to three active Measurement Not Taken
A value that identifies records, when the Thickness
the renewal sequence Measurement Location record is
Number
of the Measurement renewed for the first time, the Historical
Not Taken record.
Sequence Number of those three
Measurement Not Taken records will be
set to 1. If the Thickness Measurement
Location record is renewed again, the
Historical Sequence Number of any
Measurement Not Taken records that
are active at the time of the renewal will
be set to 2.
A value that identifies

When a Measurement Not Taken record
the Thickness
is created, this field is populated
Measurement Location
TML Key
Number
automatically with the Entity Key of the
record to which the
Measurement Not
record to which it is linked.
Taken record is linked.
The record ID of the when you save a Measurement Not
Taken record for the first time.
Measurement Not
Taken record.
Note: If you modify the ID Template for
Measurement
Number
the Measurement Not Taken family and
ID
choose to update existing records,
values in this field in existing records
will not be updated until the records are
re-saved.
Overview of TM Calculations
A TM Analysis includes one or more Equipment records and all the TM-specific records
that are linked to them. As you conduct a TM Analysis, various calculations and
validations are performed, and the results are stored in various records involved in the
TM Analysis.
In this section of the documentation, we provide descriptions of the calculations and
validations that are performed within a TM Analysis. These descriptions are classified
according to the type of record for which the calculation or validation is performed:
Asset Corrosion Analysis: Stores summary information and calculations that are
performed using the information in the related Thickness Measurement Location
and Thickness Measurement records.
TML Corrosion Analysis: Stores summary information and calculations
performed using the information in related Thickness Measurement Location and
Thickness Measurement records.
Thickness Measurement: Stores measurement data and performs calculations. The
values calculated in Thickness Measurement records are used for calculating
values in the associated TML Corrosion Analysis record.
The Meridium APM system uses specific formulas, equations, and estimation methods to
arrive at the values that are stored in these records. In order to understand the information
that is displayed to you for a given analysis, you must understand how the values were
determined.
Hint: In addition to using the documentation provided here, you can view TM formulas
on the Formulas page, which you can access by clicking the Formulas link on the TM
Tasks menu.
Changes to Controlling Corrosion Rates

and TM Calculations
TML and equipment controlling corrosion rates are used as inputs in various TM
Calculations. As a result, changes to the controlling corrosion rate of a TML, component,
or piece of equipment will impact the output of those calculations. Additionally,
calculations that use the output of those calculations as inputs will be impacted.
The following table lists calculations to which TML or equipment controlling corrosion
rate is direct input, and the calculations to which TML or equipment controlling corrosion
rate is an indirect input (i.e., a calculation that uses a value that is determined directly by
TML or equipment controlling corrosion rate).
A change to:
TML controlling
corrosion rate
Asset controlling
corrosion rate
...Impacts
(directly):
Remaining Life
Asset Average
Corrosion Rate
...Which impacts (indirectly):
Estimated Remaining Life

from Today for a TML
Retirement Date

Remaining Life
About Asset Corrosion Analysis

Calculations
The calculations in this section are performed using values that are stored in Thickness
Measurement Location and Thickness Measurement records in your TM Analysis. The
results of these calculations are stored in the Asset Corrosion Analysis record, and some
of these values are displayed in the Corrosion Analysis Summary workspace on the TM
Analysis page.
A red outline has been added to the following image to highlight where Asset Corrosion
Analysis values are displayed in the Corrosion Analysis Summary workspace.
Types of Asset-Level Corrosion Rates

The following corrosion rates are calculated for the Asset Corrosion Analysis record:

Average Corrosion Rate
Statistical Corrosion Rate
Maximum Corrosion Rate
Three options on the Asset Analysis Settings window are used to determine how
Controlling Corrosion Rate will be calculated for the Asset Corrosion Analysis record
associated with an Equipment or TML Group record:
Average: When you select this option, the Controlling Corrosion Rate value in the
Asset Corrosion Analysis record will be populated with the Average Corrosion
Rate calculated for the piece of equipment or component.
Formula: When you select this option, the Controlling Corrosion Rate value in the
Asset Corrosion Analysis record will be populated with the Statistical Corrosion
Rate calculated for the piece of equipment or component.
Maximum: When you select this option, the Controlling Corrosion Rate value in
the in the Asset Corrosion Analysis record will be populated with the Maximum
Corrosion Rate calculated for the piece of equipment or component.
A red outline has been added to the following image of the Asset Analysis Settings
window to highlight these options.
Additionally, the option that you select will be reflected in the Corrosion Analysis
Summary workspace on the TM Analysis page for the associated Equipment or TML
Group record. A red outline has been added to the following image to highlight where
your selection for this option is displayed on the Corrosion Analysis Summary
workspace. The following image indicates that the Maximum option was selected on the
Asset Analysis Settings window.
Average Corrosion Rate

The Average Corrosion Rate for a piece of equipment or component is calculated using
the following equation:
Average Corrosion Rate = (( TML CCRs) / # of TMLs) x Safety Factor
For example, consider a piece of equipment or component whose TMLs that have the
following controlling corrosion rates:
14.98 Mils/year
13.91 Mils/year
14.5 Mils/year
If the Safety Factor is 1, the Average Corrosion Rate would be calculated using the
following equation:
Average Corrosion Rate = ((14.98 + 13.91 + 14.5)/3) x 1
Average Corrosion Rate = 14.46 Mils/year
The Asset Analysis Settings, however, provide three options that may affect how the
value of the Average Corrosion Rate is calculated:
Safety Factor
Minimum Number of TMLs
Percentile
By default, these options are configured in such a way that all Active Thickness
Measurement Location records included in a TM Analysis will be used with a Safety
Factor of 1. In other words, if you want the Average Corrosion Rate to be calculated as
described here, you do not need to modify these options. If you do want the average to be
adjusted, click one of the links in the preceding list for information on how the average
calculation can be modified.
window to highlight these options.
Safety Factor
The Safety Factor is a value that can be configured in the Asset Analysis Settings and
represents the value by which the calculated average will be multiplied in order to
determine the Average Corrosion Rate. The Safety Factor allows you to factor in to the
Average Corrosion Rate a specified degree of conservativeness. The Safety Factor is
applied using the following calculation:
Average Corrosion Rate = Actual Average x Safety Factor

For example, if the Safety Factor is 1.5, and the actual average is 8.5 Mils/year, the
Average Corrosion Rate would be calculated as:
Average Corrosion Rate = 8.5 Mils/year x 1.5
Average Corrosion Rate = 12.75 Mils/year
Note that the actual average for the piece of equipment or component may be the average
that is calculated using the standard averaging method, or it may be the average that is
determined after applying the Percentile setting to the Thickness Measurement Location
records. A Safety Factor of 1, which is the default setting for new analyses, specifies that
you want to use the actual average instead of an adjusted average. Typically, if you
modify the default Safety Factor, you will typically want to set it to a value greater than 1
to indicate that the adjusted average will be greater than the actual average.
Percentile
The standard averaging method takes the sum of TML controlling corrosion rates and
divides it by the number of all Active TMLs included in the TM Analysis to determine
the average corrosion rate. If you want the average to be a more conservative (i.e.,
higher) value, you can eliminate TMLs with the lowest controlling corrosion rates using
the Percentile option in the Asset Analysis Settings.
The Percentile option lets you specify that you want to use the highest X percent of
Thickness Measurement Location records for calculating the Average Corrosion Rate. For
example, assume that a piece of equipment or component that has 5 TMLs with the
following controlling corrosion rates.
Thickness
Measurement Controlling
Location
corrosion rate
record
Percentage ranking
10.001
20% and below
9.921
40% or greater
8.999
60% or greater
7.643
80% or greater
7.001
100%
The percentile ranking indicates the value that you would need to define in order to
include that controlling corrosion rate in the average calculation. The Percentile value is
factored in as:
(# of TMLs x Percentile)/100 = # of TMLs to Use
For example, if you set the Percentile to 80, the # of TMLs to use would be calculated as:
(5 x 80)/100 = 4
In this case, the Average Corrosion Rate would be calculated using the 4 highest TML
controlling corrosion rates, or 10.001, 9.921, 8.999, and 7.643.
The default value for the Percentile setting is 100, which means that by default, the
Average Corrosion Rate will be calculated using ALL Active Thickness Measurement
Location records included in the TM Analysis. If you want to exclude Thickness
Measurement Location records with the lowest controlling corrosion rates, you will need
to modify this setting.
Minimum Number of TMLs

The Minimum Number of TMLs setting is used in conjunction with the Percentile setting.
It ensures that the number of Thickness Measurement Location records used for
calculating the Average Corrosion Rate will not drop below a specified number.
For example, consider the following:
An Equipment or TML Group record that is linked to 50 Thickness Measurement

Location records.
The Percentile setting is set to 20.
The Minimum Number of TMLs setting is set to 20.
Using the Percentile setting and the number of TMLs, the number of Thickness
Measurement Location records to use for the Average Corrosion Rate would be
calculated as:
(50 x 20)/100 = 10
Because the Minimum Number of TMLs setting is set to 20, however, the Meridium
APM system will use the 20 highest corrosion rates for calculating the Average Corrosion
Rate instead of using only the 10 highest values.
By default, the Minimum Number of TMLs setting is set to 1, meaning that the Meridium
APM system will calculate the Average Corrosion Rate using as little as one TML
corrosion rate. We recommend that you set this value to 1 or greater.
Statistical Corrosion Rate

The Statistical Corrosion Rate is determined by performing a statistical analysis on the
TML controlling corrosion rates, eliminating outliers, and determining the average
corrosion rate from the remaining TMLs. Several calculations are performed to calculate
the Statistical Corrosion Rate.
First, the mean corrosion rate is calculated for the piece of equipment or component using
the controlling corrosion rates from ALL available TMLs:
Mean CR = All TML controlling corrosion rates / # of TMLs
Then, the standard deviation of the TML controlling corrosion rates is calculated using
the following equation:
Next, the following calculations are performed to determine the upper and lower outlier
limits:
Upper Outlier Limit = (Standard Deviation Factor x TML CR SD) + Mean CR
Lower Outlier Limit = (Standard Deviation Factor x TML CR SD) - Mean CR
The Standard Deviation Factor is defined in the analysis settings for the Equipment or
TML Group record (via the Std Deviation factor text box on the Asset Analysis Settings
window).
Any TML controlling corrosion rate that is greater than the upper outlier limit or less than
the lower the outlier limit is considered an outlier and will be excluded from the
Statistical Corrosion Rate calculation.
Finally, the Statistical Corrosion Rate is calculated as the average corrosion rate of the
Thickness Measurement Location records that remain after the outliers have been
eliminated.
Statistical Corrosion Rate = TML controlling corrosion rates / # of TMLs
Consider, for example, a piece of equipment or component that has five TMLs with the
10.001 Mils/year
9.921 Mils/year
8.999 Mils/year
8.001 Mils/year
6.999 Mils/year
For this analysis, the mean corrosion rate would be calculated as:
Mean CR = (10.001 + 9.921 + 8.999 + 8.001 + 6.999) / 5
Mean CR = 8.7842 Mils/year
The TML CR SD is then calculated as:
TML CR SD = 1.2865
Next, the calculated mean and standard deviation are used with the Standard Deviation
Factor to calculate the upper and lower outlier limits. For our example, we will assume a
Standard Deviation Factor of 0.9.
Upper Outlier Limit = (Standard Deviation Factor x TML CR SD) + Mean CR
Upper Outlier Limit = (.9 x 1.2865) + 8.7842
Upper Outlier Limit = 9.9421
Lower Outlier Limit = (Standard Deviation Factor x TML CR SD) - Mean CR
Lower Outlier Limit = (.9 x 1.286) - 8.7842

Lower Outlier Limit = -7.6268
Remember that a TML is considered an outlier if its controlling corrosion rate is greater
than the calculated upper outlier limit or less than the calculated lower outlier limit.
Consider these TML controlling corrosion rates as compared to the calculated outlier
limits:
10.001 > 9.9421
10.001 > -7.6268
9.921 < 9.9421
9.921 > -7.6268
8.999 < 9.9421
8.999 > -7.6268
8.001 < 9.9421
8.001 > -7.6268
6.999 < 9.9421
6.999 > -7.6268
You can see from this comparison that the only TML controlling corrosion rate that is
greater than the upper outlier limit is 10.001. There are no TML controlling corrosion
rates that are less than the lower outlier limit. Therefore, the TML controlling corrosion
rate of 10.001 will be excluded from the Statistical Corrosion Rate calculation. So, the
Statistical Corrosion Rate will be calculated as:
Statistical Corrosion Rate = (9.921 + 8.999 + 8.001 + 6.999) / 4
Statistical Corrosion Rate = 8.48 Mils/year
Maximum Corrosion Rate

The Maximum Corrosion Rate for the piece of equipment or component is determined by
evaluating the controlling corrosion rates of all Active TMLs included in the TM
Analysis. The Maximum Corrosion Rate in the Asset Corrosion Analysis record will be
set to the highest (or fastest) corrosion rate of these TMLs.
For example, consider a piece of equipment or component that has three TMLs with the
12.3 Mils/year
11.2 Mils/year
11 Mils/year
In this case, the Maximum Corrosion Rate would be set to the highest corrosion rate, or
12.3 Mils/year.

The Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate is determined by evaluating the Maximum
Historical Corrosion Rates that exist for all the Active and Inactive TMLs included in the
TM Analysis. The Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate is set to the highest Maximum
Historical Corrosion Rate of these TMLs.
For example, consider an Equipment or TML Group record that is linked to three
Thickness Measurement Location records that have the following Maximum Historical
Corrosion Rates values:
12.3 MILS/year
11.2 MILS/year
11 MILS/year
In this case, the Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate in the Asset Corrosion Analysis
record would be set to 12.3 MILS/year. If the Maximum Historical Corrosion Rates later
changed to:
12.3 MILS/year
14 MILS/year
13.5 MILS/year
Then the Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate fin the Asset Corrosion Analysis record
would be reset to 14 MILS/year. As Thickness Measurement Location records are
updated, the Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate in the Asset Corrosion Analysis record
is updated.
Asset Controlling Next Insp Date

The Asset Controlling Next Insp Date is set to the Asset Calculated Next Inspection Date
or the Asset Calc Adjusted Next Insp Date, depending upon how the analysis settings for
the associated Equipment or TML Group record have been configured via the Asset
Analysis Settings window.
If the Apply CCR to TML Rem Life Next Insp Date Calc check box is selected,
the Asset Controlling Next Insp Date will be set to the Asset Calc Adjusted Next
Insp Date.
If the Apply CCR to TML Rem Life Next Insp Date Calc check box is not
selected, the Asset Controlling Next Insp Date will be set to the Asset Calculated
Next Inspection Date.
window to highlight the Apply CCR to TML Rem Life Next Insp Date Calc check box.
Note: The field labeled Scheduled Next Inspection Date on the TM Analysis page
displays the Asset Controlling Next Insp Date. This may or may not correspond to a
Scheduled Next Inspection Date in a Thickness Measurement Location record.
Asset Calculated Next Insp Date
The Asset Calculated Next Insp Date is determined by evaluating the Scheduled Next
Inspection Dates that have been calculated for all the Active TMLs included in the TM
Analysis. The Asset Calculated Next Insp Date is set to the most conservative (i.e.,
soonest) of the Scheduled Next Inspection Dates of these TMLs.
For example, if a piece of equipment or component has three TMLs with the following
Scheduled Next Inspection Dates:
1/1/2008
1/1/2010
1/1/2007
The Asset Calculated Next Insp Date would be set to 1/1/2007.
Asset Calc Adjusted Next Insp Date

The Asset Calc Adjusted Next Insp Date is determined by evaluating the Asset Average
Corrosion Rate Next Inspection Dates that have been calculated for all the associated
TMLs. The Asset Calc Adjusted Next Insp Date is set to the most conservative (i.e.,
soonest) of the Asset Average Corrosion Rate Next Inspection Dates of these TMLs.
For example, consider a piece of equipment or component that has three TMLs with the
following Asset Average Corrosion Rate Next Inspection Dates:
1/1/2008
1/1/2010
1/1/2007
The Asset Calc Adjusted Next Insp Date would be set to 1/1/2007.
Asset Controlling Remaining Life
Asset Controlling Remaining Life is set to the Asset Calc Adjusted Remaining Life or the
Asset Calculated Remaining Life, depending upon how the analysis settings for the
associated Equipment or TML Group record have been configured via the Asset Analysis
Settings window.
If the Apply CCR to TML Rem Life Next Insp Date Calc check box is selected,
the Asset Controlling Remaining Life will be set to the Asset Calc Adjusted
Remaining Life.
If the Apply CCR to TML Rem Life Next Insp Date Calc check box is not
selected, the Asset Controlling Remaining Life will be set to the Asset Calculated
Remaining Life.
Estimated Remaining Life from Today

Estimated Remaining Life from Today is calculated when you access the TM Analysis
page.
This value is calculated for viewing purposes only and is not stored in the database.
Estimated Remaining Life from Today is calculated by determining the amount of time
between the Asset Controlling Retire Date and the current date (i.e., the date the analysis
is being viewed). Estimated Remaining Life from Today represents how much longer the
piece of equipment will be in service and is displayed in years.
Estimated Remaining Life from Today = Asset Controlling Retire Date - Current Date
For example, consider the following values:
Asset Controlling Retire Date = 1/1/2010
Current Date = 1/1/2005
In this case:
Estimated Remaining Life from Today = 1/1/2010 - 1/1/2005
Estimated Remaining Life from Today = 5 years

A red outline has been added to the following image where Estimated Remaining Life
from Today is displayed in the Corrosion Analysis Summary workspace on the TM
Analysis page.
Asset Calculated Remaining Life

The Asset Calculated Remaining Life is determined in one of two ways:
If the Remaining Life Critical Number of TMLs setting in the Asset Analysis
Settings is set to 1, the Meridium APM system will use the most conservative
(i.e., shortest) Remaining Life value from all Thickness Measurement Location
records.
If Remaining Life Critical Number of TMLs setting is set to more than one, the
Meridium APM system will calculate the average of the most conservative TML
Remaining Life values. For example, if the Remaining Life Critical Number of
TMLs setting is set to 3, the Meridium APM system will find the three most
conservative Remaining Life values from all Active TMLs included in the TM
Analysis, and the Asset Calculated Remaining Life will be set to the average of
those three values.
Note that the Asset Calculated Remaining Life is calculated and stored in the Asset
Corrosion Analysis record. It is not displayed on the TM Analysis page. In addition, the
Estimated Remaining Life from Today is always calculated using the Asset Controlling
Retire Date. In other words, the Asset Calculated Remaining Life is visible only if you
access the Asset Corrosion Analysis record outside of Thickness Monitoring, and it does
not affect any other calculations.
Asset Calc Adjusted Remaining Life
The Asset Calc Adjusted Remaining Life is determined by evaluating the Asset Average
Corrosion Rate Remaining Life values that have been calculated for all Active TMLs
included in the TM Analysis. The Asset Calc Adjusted Remaining Life is set to the most
conservative (i.e., shortest) of the Asset Average Corrosion Rate Remaining Life values
of these TMLs.
For example, if an Equipment or TML Group record is linked to three Thickness
Measurement Location records whose associated TML Corrosion Analysis records have
the following Asset Average Corrosion Rate Remaining Life values:
5 months
12 months
14 months
The Asset Calc Adjusted Remaining Life in the Asset Corrosion Analysis would be set to
5 months.
Asset Controlling Retire Date

The Asset Controlling Retire Date is set to the Asset Calculated Retire Date or the Asset
Calc Adjusted Retire Date, depending upon how the analysis settings have been
configured for the Equipment or TML Group record via the Asset Analysis Settings
window.
If the Apply CCR to TML Rem Life Next Insp Date Calc check box is selected, the
Asset Controlling Retire Date will be set to the Asset Calc Adjusted Retire Date.
If the Apply CCR to TML Rem Life Next Insp Date Calc check box is not selected,
the Asset Controlling Retire Date will be set to the Asset Calculated Retire Date.
The Projected T-Min Date value that is displayed in the Corrosion Analysis Summary
workspace on the TM Analysis page is the Asset Controlling Retire Date in the Asset
Corrosion Analysis record. A red outline has been added to the following image to
highlight this value.
Asset Calculated Retire Date

The Asset Calculated Retire Date is determined by evaluating the Retirement Dates that
have been calculated for all the Active TMLs included in the TM Analysis. The Asset
Calculated Retire Date is set to the most conservative (i.e., soonest) of the Retirement
Dates of these TMLs.
Retirement Dates:
1/1/2008
1/1/2010
1/1/2007
The Asset Calculated Retire Date would be set to 1/1/2007.
Asset Calc Adjusted Retire Date

The Asset Calc Adjusted Retire Date is determined by evaluating the Asset Average
Corrosion Rate Retirement Dates that have been calculated for all the Active TMLs
included in the TM Analysis. The Asset Calc Adjusted Retire Date is set to the most
conservative (i.e., soonest) of the Asset Average Corrosion Rate Retirement Dates of
these TMLs.
Asset Average Corrosion Rate Retirement Dates:
1/1/2008
1/1/2010
1/1/2007
The Asset Calc Adjusted Retire Date would be set to 1/1/2007.

The equipment or component-level Projected T-Min Date is determined by evaluating the
Projected T-Min Dates that have been calculated for all the Active TMLs included in the
TM Analysis. The Projected T-Min Date is set to the most conservative (i.e., soonest)
Projected T-Min Date of these TMLs.
Projected T-Min Dates are:
1/1/2008
1/1/2010
1/1/2007
The Projected T-Min Date would be set to 1/1/2007 because it represents the date when
the first location on the piece of equipment or component will reach its minimum
thickness.
About TML Corrosion Analysis

Calculations
The calculations in this section are performed using values that are stored in Thickness
Measurement Location and Thickness Measurement records in your TM Analysis. The
results of these calculations are stored in the TML Corrosion Analysis record, and some
of these values are displayed in the Corrosion Data section of the TML Corrosion
Analysis Details workspace on the TM Analysis page.
The following image shows the TML Corrosion Analysis values that are displayed in the
TML Corrosion Analysis Details workspace.
Types of TML Corrosion Rates

The following corrosion rates can be calculated for a given TML, in addition to the TML
controlling corrosion rate. These values are stored in the TML Corrosion Analysis record:

TML Controlling Corrosion Rate

The TML controlling corrosion rate is determined by evaluating the following corrosion
rates that have been calculated for the TML: Short Term, Long Term, and Least Squares.
The TML controlling corrosion rate is set to the highest (i.e., fastest) of these corrosion
rates.
Short Term Corrosion Rate = 123 MILS/year

Long Term Corrosion Rate = 112 MILS/year
Least Squares Corrosion Rate = 110 MILS/year
In this case, the TML controlling corrosion rate would be set to 123 MILS/year. If
additional Thickness Measurements were later added to the TML, causing the corrosion
rates to be calculated as:
Short Term Corrosion Rate = 150 MILS/year

The TML controlling corrosion rate would be reset to 150 MILS/year.

If a corrosion rate cannot be calculated, either because the TML does not have enough
measurement data or because other criteria dictate that the corrosion rate should not be
calculated, the TML controlling corrosion rate will be set to the Minimum Corrosion Rate
defined in the Analysis Settings.
If all of the calculated corrosion rates are is less than the specified minimum value and
the Use Minimum Corrosion Rate check box is selected in the Asset Analysis Settings,
the TML controlling corrosion rate will be set to the Minimum Corrosion Rate defined in
the Analysis Settings.
Note: The Minimum Corrosion Rate can be defined in the Asset Analysis Settings and
applied to one or more Thickness Measurement Location records in an analysis, or it can
be defined for individual Thickness Measurement Location records via the TML Analysis
Settings.

Long Term Corrosion Rate is a calculation that is performed to indicate the rate of
corrosion over the full duration of time for which measurements have been recorded. The
Long Term Corrosion Rate will be calculated for a given TML only if the analysis
settings for the related Equipment or TML Group record specify that Long Term
Corrosion Rate should be used.
The Long Term Corrosion Rate is calculated using the Long Term Loss and Long Term
Interval, where:
Long Term Corrosion Rate = Long Term Loss/Long Term Interval
...where:
Long Term Loss = Base Measurement Value - Last Measurement Value

...and:
Long Term Interval = Base Measurement Date - Last Measurement Date
For example, consider the following readings.
Reading
Date
Base
1/1/1985
.2
Near
1/1/1990
.195
Last
1/1/1995
.19
In this case:
Long Term Corrosion Rate = .01 inches / 10 years = 1 MILS/year
Note: The Meridium APM system automatically converts the corrosion rate from inches
per year to MILS per year.
Because the Long Term Corrosion Rate is based upon the base measurement and the last
measurement, if only one measurement has been recorded, the Long Term Corrosion Rate
cannot be calculated. If two or more measurements have been recorded, the Long Term
Corrosion Rate can be calculated. If only two measurements have been recorded, the
Long Term Corrosion Rate can be calculated but the Short Term Corrosion Rate cannot.
The following diagram shows a graphical representation of the Long-Term Corrosion
Rate.
Note: The Long Term Loss can be calculated whenever two or more Thickness
Measurements have been recorded for a TML.

Short Term Corrosion Rate is the rate of corrosion as determined by the most-recentlyrecorded values. The Short Term Corrosion Rate will be calculated for a given Thickness
Measurement Location record only if the Analysis Settings for the related Asset specify
that Short Term Corrosion Rate should be used and there are three or more Thickness
Measurements for the Thickness Measurement Location record.
The Short Term Corrosion Rate is calculated using the Short Term Loss and Short Term
Interval, where:
Short Term Corrosion Rate = Short Term Loss / Short Term Interval
...where:
Short Term Loss = Near Measurement Value - Last Measurement Value
...and:
Short Term Interval = Last Measurement Date - Near Measurement Date
For example, consider the following readings.
Reading
Date
Base
1/1/1985
.2
Near
1/1/1990
.195
Last
1/1/1995
.19
In this case:
Short Term Corrosion Rate = .005 inches / 5 years
Short Term Corrosion Rate = .001 inches/year = 1 MILS/year
Note: The Meridium APM system automatically converts the corrosion rate from inches
per year to MILS per year.
Because the Short Term Corrosion Rate is based upon the near measurement and the last
measurement, it can be calculated only when three or more measurements have been
recorded for a given Thickness Measurement Location record. If only two measurements
have been recorded, only the Long Term Corrosion Rate can be calculated.

The Least Squares Corrosion Rate is determined using the least squares linear regression
method, which is a mathematical method of finding the best-fit line for a set of datapoints
by minimizing the squares of the offsets. Consider the following example TML data.
Date
Measurement
(inches)
7/19/1990 (Time = 0)
0.165
7/1/1992 (Time = 1.95

years)
0.16
9/1/1994 (Time = 4.12

years)
0.165
3/1/1997 (Time = 4.67

years)
0.14
1/1/2000 (Time = 6.62

years)
0.1
1/1/2005 (Time = 7.5

years)
0.08
Reading
Represented graphically, the datapoints would look like this:
The line on the plot has been drawn to minimize the distance between the line and each
of the datapoints. The slope of the line represents the Least Squares Corrosion Rate and
can be determined using the standard linear expression y = ax + b, or in this specific case:
y = -0.0113x + 0.1819
Solving for y, the slope of the line is 11.313. This means that the Least Squares Corrosion
Rate is 11.313 MILS/year.
Note: The Least Squares Corrosion Rate will be calculated for a given TML only if the
analysis settings for the related Equipment or TML Group record specify that Least
Squares Corrosion Rate should be used.

The Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate is determined based upon the values that are
calculated for the three calculated TML corrosion rates: Short Term, Long Term, and
Least Squares. The Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate is set to the highest corrosion
rate that has been calculated for any of the three corrosion rates over the life of the TML.
Short Term Corrosion Rate = 12.3 MILS/year

Long Term Corrosion Rate = 11.2 MILS/year
In this case, the Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate would be set to 12.3 MILS/year. If
additional Thickness Measurements were later added to the TML, causing the corrosion
rates to be calculated as:

Least Squares Corrosion Rate = 13.5 MILS/year
Then the Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate would be reset to 14 MILS/year. If

additional adjustments were made to Thickness Measurements that caused the
calculations to be reset to:

Then the Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate would remain at 14 MILS/year.

Note: The Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate can be calculated as long as at least one
corrosion rate has already been calculated for the TML. It is based upon any of the three
corrosion rates that have ever been calculated for the TML, according to the Asset
Analysis Settings.

The Asset Average Corrosion Rate field in the TML Corrosion Analysis record is
populated with the equipment controlling corrosion rate if, in the analysis settings for the
associated Equipment or TML Group record:
-and-
be used.
These specifications are defined via the Asset Analysis Settings window. A red outline
has been added to the following image of the Asset Analysis Settings window to highlight
these specifications.
Types of TML Next Inspection Dates

The following Next Inspection Dates will be calculated for the TML Corrosion Analysis:

Asset Average Corrosion Rate Next Inspection Date

The Interval Next Inspection Date is useful for creating an inspection schedule if you
want Thickness Measurements to be recorded at regular intervals, such as every five
years.
The Interval Next Inspection Date is calculated using the Default Inspection Interval
specified in the analysis settings for the associated Thickness Measurement Location
record via the TML Analysis Settings window.
Using the Default Inspection Interval, the Interval Next Inspection Date is calculated as:
Interval Next Inspection Date = Last Measurement Date + Default Inspection Interval
For example, if the Last Measurement Date is 1/1/2005 and the Default Inspection
Interval is 60 months (i.e., 5 years), then the Next Inspection Date would be calculated
as:
Interval Next Inspection Date = 1/1/2000 + 60 months
Interval Next Inspection Date = 1/1/2005
Note: The Interval Next Inspection Date will be calculated for TMLs only when the
Inspection Interval check box is selected on the Asset Analysis Settings window.

The Factor Remaining Life Date represents an inspection date that is calculated using the
Remaining Life Factor. The Remaining Life Factor is defined in the analysis settings that
are associated with an Equipment or TML Group record for the purpose of calculating the
Scheduled Next Inspection Date depending upon the Remaining Life.
If a TML is below t-min (i.e., the Last Measurement Value for the TML Corrosion
Analysis record is less than or equal to the Minimum Thickness value in the associated
Thickness Measurement Location record), the Remaining Life for that TML will be less
than or equal to 0 (zero). In this case:
Factor Remaining Life Date = Last Measurement Date
If the Remaining Life value for the associated TML Corrosion Analysis record is greater
than 0 (zero), however, the Factor Remaining Life Date is calculated using the following
equation:
Factor Remaining Life Date = (Remaining Life x Remaining Life Factor) + Current Date
For example, assume that you want the Scheduled Next Inspection Date always to be one
half the Remaining Life of the TML. In other words, if the Remaining Life is 20 years,
you want to perform the next inspection in 10 years. If the Remaining Life is 10 years,
you want to perform the next inspection in 5 years. In other words, you want the
inspection date to be recalculated as the Remaining Life is updated. To do this, you would
set the Remaining Life Factor to 0.5. Consider the following values:
Remaining Life = 36 months

Remaining Life Factor = 0.5
Using these values, the Factor Remaining Life Date would be calculated as:
Factor Remaining Life Date = (36 x .5) + 1/1/2000
Factor Remaining Life Date = 7/1/2001
Note: The Factor Remaining Life date will be calculated for TMLs only if the Factor
Remaining Life check box is selected on the Asset Analysis Settings window.

The Scheduled Next Inspection Date is determined by the analysis settings that have been
defined for the Equipment or TML Group record.
If the analysis settings specify that both the Interval Next Inspection Date and the
Factor Remaining Life Date should be calculated, the Scheduled Next Inspection
Date will be set to the earliest of:
If the analysis settings specify that only the Interval Next Inspection Date should
be calculated, the Scheduled Next Inspection Date will be set to the Interval Next
Inspection Date.
If the analysis settings specify that only the Factor Remaining Life Date should be
calculated, the Scheduled Next Inspection Date will be set to the Factor
Remaining Life Date.
If the analysis settings specify that neither the Interval Next Inspection Date nor
the Factor Remaining Life Date should be calculated, then the Scheduled Next
Inspection Date will be set to the Projected T-Min Date.
A red outline has been added to the following image to highlight these settings on the
Asset Analysis Settings window.
Asset Average Corrosion Rate Next

Inspection Date
The Asset Average Corrosion Rate Next Inspection Date is calculated when, in the
analysis settings for the associated Equipment or TML Group record:
be calculated.
-and
The Asset Average Corrosion Rate Next Inspection Date is determined in the same way
that the Scheduled Next Inspection Date is derived, except that equipment or component
averages are used in place of TML values in the calculations of the various values that
can be used to populate Scheduled Next Inspection Date.
The specifications listed above are defined via the Asset Analysis Settings window. A red
outline has been added to the following image of the Asset Analysis Settings window to
highlight these specifications.
Remaining Life
Remaining Life represents how long after the Last Measurement Date a piece of
equipment or component can be in service, based upon the T-Min value and the current
rate of corrosion. Remaining Life is stored in the TML Corrosion Analysis record and is
calculated using the following equation:
Remaining Life = (Last Measurement Value - T-Min Value) / TML controlling corrosion
rate
Last Measurement = .19 inches

T-Min = .18 inches
TML controlling corrosion rate = .001 inches per year
Given these values, Remaining Life would be calculated as:
Remaining Life = (.19 - .18) / .001

Remaining Life = .01/.001
Remaining Life = 10 years (120 months)
Note that the Remaining Life, which is stored in the TML Corrosion Analysis record, is
not the same as the Estimated Remaining Life from Today, which is displayed in the
TML Corrosion Analysis Details workspace.
Note: If a T-Min value does not exist for a TML, the value 0 (zero) will be used for
performing this calculation.
Estimated Remaining Life from Today

Estimated Remaining Life from Today is calculated when you select a Thickness
Measurement Location node in the TM Explorer pane on the TM Analysis page.
This value is calculated for viewing purposes only and is not stored in the database.
Estimated Remaining Life from Today takes the Remaining Life that was calculated for
the Last Measurement Date and compares it to the current date to indicate how long
beyond today the piece of equipment or component will be in service.
Estimated Remaining Life from Today = Remaining Life - (Current Date - Last
Measurement Date)
Last Measurement Date = 1/1/2003

Remaining Life (from Last Measurement Date) = 7 years
In this case:
Estimated Remaining Life from Today = 7 years - (1/1/2005 - 1/1/2003)
Estimated Remaining Life from Today = 7 years - 2 years
Estimated Remaining Life from Today = 5 years
A red outline has been added to the following image to highlight where Estimated
Remaining Life from Today is displayed in the TML Corrosion Analysis Details
workspace on the TML Analysis page.

Remaining Life
The Asset Average Corrosion Rate Remaining Life is calculated when, in the analysis
settings for the associated Equipment or TML Group record:
be calculated.
-and
The Asset Average Corrosion Rate Remaining Life is calculated like TML Remaining
Life, except that instead of using the TML controlling corrosion rate, it uses the Asset
Average Corrosion Rate. In other words:
Asset Average Corrosion Rate Remaining Life = (Last Measurement Value - T-Min
Value) / Asset Average Corrosion Rate
The Asset Average Corrosion Rate Remaining Life value is used in the Asset Average
Corrosion Rate Retirement Date and the Asset Average Corrosion Rate Next Inspection
Date calculations for the TML.
The specifications listed at the beginning of this topic are defined via the Asset Analysis
Settings window. A red outline has been added to the following image of the Asset
Analysis Settings window to highlight these specifications.
Retirement Date
The Retirement Date for a TML indicates the date on which a given piece of equipment
or component should be taken out of service, based upon the rate of corrosion for the
TML and the T-Min value, which are represented together as Remaining Life. In other
words:
Retirement Date = Last Measurement Date + Remaining Life
In this case:
Retirement Date = 1/1/2000 + 36 months
Retirement Date = 1/1/2003

Retirement Date
The Asset Average Corrosion Rate Next Inspection date is calculated when, in the
analysis settings for the associated Equipment or TML Group record:
be calculated.
-and
The Asset Average Corrosion Rate Retirement Date is calculated like TML Retirement
Date, except that instead of using the TML Remaining Life, it uses the Asset Average
Corrosion Rate Remaining Life. In other words:
Asset Average Corrosion Rate Retirement Date = Last Measurement Date + Asset
Average Corrosion Rate Remaining Life
The Asset Average Corrosion Rate Remaining Life value is used in the Asset Average
Corrosion Rate Retirement Date and the Asset Average Corrosion Rate Next Inspection
Date calculations for the TML.
The specifications listed at the beginning of this topic are defined via the Asset Analysis
Settings window. A red outline has been added to the following image of the Asset
Analysis Settings window to highlight these specifications.

The Projected T-Min Date is the date on which a TML will reach its minimum thickness,
based upon the current rate of corrosion and the current T-Min value. In other words:
Projected T-Min Date = Remaining Life + Last Measurement Date
In this case:
Projected T-Min Date = 36 months + 1/1/2005
Projected T-Min Date = 1/1/2008
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure

Calculation
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure is calculated for piping TMLs. Maximum
Allowable Working Pressure is not calculated for pressure vessel TMLs or tank TMLs.
The formulas for calculating Maximum Allowable Working Pressure are defined in the
Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup reference table, which determine the formula that
will be used based upon certain attributes of the Thickness Measurement Location record.
In this topic, we describe the baseline Maximum Allowable Working Pressure formula
that is used by default for ALL piping TMLs. If desired, you can define custom formulas
by creating custom rules and modifying the Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup records.
The Maximum Allowable Working Pressure is calculated for the TML Corrosion
Analysis using the following baseline formula:
Max. Pressure = (2 x Allowable Stress x Joint Factor x (Minimum Thickness - Additional
Thickness)) / Outside Diameter - (2 x Temperature Factor x (Minimum Thickness Additional Thickness))
Note: The Maximum Allowable Working Pressure calculation always uses the Allowable
Stress value from the Thickness Measurement Location record, regardless of its source
(i.e., looked up or user-defined).
Consider the following example, where the following values are defined in the Thickness
Allowable Stress = 21300 Pounds Force Per Square Inch

Joint Factor = 1
Minimum Thickness = .1 Inches
Additional Thickness = 0
Outside Diameter = 5 inches
Temperature Factor = 1
Based on these values, the Maximum Allowable Working Pressure would be calculated
as:
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure = (2 x 21300 x 1 x ( .1 - 0 )) / (5 - (2 x 1 x ( .1 - 0
))
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure = 887.5 Pounds Force Per Square Inch
For the Meridium APM system to calculate the Maximum Allowable Working Pressure,
the following values must be populated in the Thickness Measurement Location record:
Material Grade
Design Code
Joint Factor
Minimum Thickness
Outside Diameter
Temperature Factor
Mean
The Mean represents the average for all Thickness Measurement values that have been
recorded for a TML, calculated by dividing the sum of the Thickness Measurement
values by the number of Thickness Measurements that exist. In other words:
Mean =
Thickness Measurements / # of Thickness Measurements
For example, consider the following three Thickness Measurements:
.3 Inches
.27 Inches
.22 Inches
In this case, the Mean Thickness Measurement value would be calculated as:
Mean = (.3 + .27 + .22) / 3
Mean = .2633 Inches
Mean Absolute Deviation

Mean Absolute Deviation is a value that is calculated for TMLs to represent the average
difference (i.e., deviation) of the Thickness Measurements from the Mean measurement
value. This value is calculated by summing the difference between all measurement
values and the mean measurement value and dividing that value by the number of
measurements.
Mean Absolute Deviation = (|Mean - Thickness Measurements|) / # of Measurements
Mean = .2633 inches

Measurement 1 = .3 inches
Using these values, the Mean Absolute Deviation would be calculated as:
Mean Absolute Deviation = (|.2633 - .3| + |.2633 - .27| + |.2633 - .22|) / 3
Mean Absolute Deviation = .0289
Variance
Variance allows you to evaluate how spread out a TML's Thickness Measurements are,
and it is used to calculate the standard deviation. Variance is calculated using the
following equation:
Variance = (Mean - Measurement Values)2/ (Number of Measurements - 1)
Mean = .2633 inches

Using these values, variance would be calculated as:

Variance = ((.2633 - .3)2 + (.2633 - .27)2+ (.2633 - .22)2) / (3-1)
Variance = (.00134689 + .00004489 + .00187489) / 2
Variance = .001633335
Standard Deviation
Standard deviation serves as an indicator of how spread out Thickness Measurement
values are. It is calculated as the square root of the variance, or:
Standard Deviation =
Consider an example where the variance value is .0016335, the standard deviation would
be calculated as:
Standard Deviation =
Standard Deviation = 0.04041658
Reading Tolerance
The Reading Tolerance setting determines how much variation is allowed between values
in the Readings field. When values are entered in the Readings field, they are averaged.
Then, the Reading Tolerance value is used to determine which values fall within an
acceptable range of the average value. If any of the values fall outside of the acceptable
range, the value in the Readings Pass/Fail field will be set to Fail.
Note: Reading Tolerance is not a value that is stored within Thickness Measurement
records themselves. Rather, it is defined in the TM Global Preferences and applies to
ALL Thickness Measurement records. It is described in detail here because the global
setting is used for performing validation within individual Thickness Measurement
records and setting the Readings Pass/Fail field in those records.
For instance, consider an example where the Reading Tolerance value is 0.03 inches, and
a Thickness Measurement record contains the following values in the Readings field:
0.3
0.31
0.36
The average of these three values is 0.3233. So, the Meridium APM system will evaluate
each individual Reading value and determine whether it falls within 0.03 inches of
0.3233. Readings will either pass or fail the evaluation. Pass conditions are as follows:
For Reading values that are less than the average Reading value, if you add the
Reading Tolerance value to the Reading value, the result is greater than or equal
to the average value.
For Reading values that are greater than the average Reading value, if you
subtract the Reading Tolerance value from the Reading value, the result is less
than or equal to the average value.
The following table summarizes how this evaluation is performed for our example
readings, keeping in mind that the average of the three readings is 0.3233.
Tolerance
Calculation
Reading
Result of Tolerance
Reading Value
Calculation Compared to
Value
Compared to (Reading + Reading
Average
Average
Tolerance)
Pass/Fail
Result
0.3
0.300 <
0.3233
0.3 + 0.03 = 0.33
0.33 is greater than 0.323
Pass
0.31
0.310 <
0.3233
0.31 + 0.03 = 0.34
0.34 is greater than 0.323
Pass
0.36
0.360 >
0.3233
0.36 - 0.03 = 0.33
0.33 is not less than or equal

Fail
to 0.3233
Since one of the readings failed the Reading Tolerance evaluation, the value in the
Reading Pass/Fail field will be set to Fail.
Measurement Calculations
Measurement data is stored in three fields in Thickness Measurement records:
Readings: Stores one or more values representing thickness measurement data

collected at a specific TML.
Uncorrected Measurement: Stores the unadjusted measurement value.
Measurement Value: Stores the final, adjusted measurement value.
Measurement data is recorded in these fields using the following workflow:

1. When a Thickness Measurement record is created, users enter data into the
Readings field.
2. A calculation is performed against the values in the Readings field, and the result
is used to populate the Uncorrected Measurement field automatically.
3. The Measurement Value field is populated automatically with the value in the
Uncorrected Measurement field.
Note: The Uncorrected Measurement field is meant to serve as an intermediate storage
location between the Readings field and the Measurement Value field. In the baseline TM
product, the Measurement Value is simply populated with the value in the Uncorrected
Measurement field. If desired, however, you can create custom rules to perform
additional adjustment or correction calculations.
The type of calculation that is performed in step 2 is determined by the settings defined
for measurement readings in the TM Global Preferences. The baseline TM product offers
three calculation options: Average, Minimum, and Maximum.
Note: Alternatively, you can define a custom formula that will be used to calculate
measurement data. In this topic, however, we describe only the baseline options.
For example, consider a Thickness Measurement record that contains the following
values in the Readings field:
0.3
0.31
0.312
In this case:
Using the Average calculation method, the Uncorrected Measurement value

would be calculated as:
Uncorrected Measurement = Readings / n

Uncorrected Measurement = (0.3 + 0.31 + 0.312) / 3
Uncorrected Measurement = 0.3073
Using the Minimum calculation method, the Uncorrected Measurement value

would be set to 0.31.
Using the Maximum calculation method, the Uncorrected Measurement value
would be set to 0.312.
About Measurement and Corrosion

Rate Variance Validation
Measurement variance is the difference between the Measurement Value for a new
Thickness Measurement record and the Measurement Value for the previous Thickness
Measurement record. Using the assumption that only a certain amount variation should
occur between measurements within a given amount of time, you can use measurement
variance as a means for validating measurement data that falls outside of the expected
range.
Note: The previous Measurement Value may or may not be the same as the Last
Measurement Value for the TML Corrosion Analysis record. If the last Thickness
Measurement record has been saved, the two will be the same. If data for the last
Thickness Measurement record has been entered but not saved, that data will be used as
the previous Measurement Value instead of the stored Last Measurement Value. The
comparison is always performed using the most recent data.
Similarly, corrosion rate variance is the amount of variation that is allowed between the
Short Term Corrosion Rate for a given TML and the expected corrosion rate. Using the
assumption that corrosion should occur at a somewhat predictable rate, you can use
corrosion rate variance as a means for validating measurement data with corrosion rate is
not consistent with the expected rate. In Thickness Monitoring, the expected corrosion
rate is equal to the Minimum Corrosion Rate value defined in the analysis settings for the
associated Thickness Measurement Location record via the TML Analysis Settings
window.
Via the Allowable Measurement Variance and Corrosion Rate Variance settings on the
TML Analysis Settings window, you have the option of defining how much measurement
and corrosion rate variation is allowed.
When values have been defined for the Allowable Measurement Variance and Corrosion
Rate Variance settings, the Meridium APM system will evaluate the measurement values
that you enter and validate whether they fall within the acceptable range. Measurement
values that fall outside of the acceptable range will be flagged via the Verify
Measurement field as requiring manual validation.
Note that:
Two or more Thickness Measurement records must exist before validation will
occur. In other words, even if the variance values are defined in the TML Analysis
Settings, no measurement variance validation will be performed against the first
Thickness Measurement record that is created for a Thickness Measurement
Location record.
Measurement and corrosion rate variance validation is performed against unsaved
data. In other words, when you create new Thickness Measurement records,
validation is performed whenever the Measurement Value field is populated with
a value. The Verify Measurement field will be populated with a value based upon
the validation that has been performed on the newly entered data.
Measurement and corrosion rate variance validation are performed only on actual
measurements. This validation is not performed against nominal measurements.
Measurement and corrosion rate variance validation will be performed only if the
Corrosion Rate Variance setting is greater than 0 (zero).
A red outline has been added to the following image of the TML Analysis Settings
window to highlight the Allowable Measurement Variance and Corrosion Rate Variance
settings.
How Validation is Performed

Measurement and corrosion rate variance evaluations serve as a mechanism for validating
measurement data as it is entered. Using the assumption that only a certain amount of
growth or loss should occur over a certain amount of time or at a certain rate,
measurement and corrosion rate variance allow you to evaluate the measurement data that
has been entered to ensure that it falls within the expected range. If it fails evaluation, the
value in the Verify Measurement field will be set to Yes as an indication that you need to
validate the measurement data.
Three values in the analysis settings for the associated Thickness Measurement Location
record are used for evaluating measurement and corrosion rate variance:
Minimum Corrosion Rate

Allowable Measurement Variance
Corrosion Rate Variance
Together, these values, combined with the measurement data that has been entered, allow
the Meridium APM system to perform measurement variance evaluations.
A red outline has been added to the following image of the TML Analysis Settings
window to highlight these settings.
Assumptions
Measurement Variation = | Previous Measurement Value - New Measurement Value |
Temporary Short Term Corrosion Rate = Measurement Variation / (New Measurement
Value Date - Previous Measurement Value Date)
Measurement Ratio = Temporary Short Term Corrosion Rate / Minimum Corrosion Rate
Note: The Temporary Short Term Corrosion Rate used here is calculated using the same
equation that is used for calculating the Short Term Corrosion Rate in TML Corrosion
Analysis records. The difference here is that this Short Term Corrosion Rate is a
temporary value that exists for the purposes of the measurement variance evaluation. This
value will not exist in the TML Corrosion Analysis record until the analysis is saved.
Loss Evaluation
The following table describes the measurement variance evaluation that is performed on
new Measurement Values that are less than the previous Measurement Value.
...then in the
Thickness
Measurement
If the
...and the
record, the
Measurement Measurement
value in the
Variation is: Ratio is:
Verify
Measurement
field is set to:
Less than the
Allowable
Less than or
Measurement equal to 1
Variance
(one)
value
...and in the ...and in the

TML
TML
...and the
Corrosion
Corrosion
value in the
Analysis
Analysis
Allowable
record,1 the record,1 the Measurement
value in the Short Term
Variance
Verify
Corrosion
Applied field
Measurements Rate field will will be set to:
field will be be populated
set to:2
with the:2
No
No
The
Temporary
Short Term
Corrosion
Rate value
Less than the

Allowable
Greater than 1
Measurement
Yes
(one)
Variance
value
Yes
0 (zero)
Yes
Greater than
No
The
No
Less than or
No
No
the Allowable
Measurement
Variance
value
equal to the
Corrosion
Rate Variance
value
Temporary
Short Term
Corrosion
Rate value
Greater than
the Allowable
Measurement
Variance
value
Greater than
the Corrosion
Yes
Rate Variance
value
The
Temporary
Short Term
Corrosion
Rate value
Yes
No
1.
The TML Corrosion Analysis that is linked to the Thickness Measurement Location
record to which the Thickness Measurement record is linked.
2.
Occurs when the analysis is saved.
Growth Evaluation
The following table describes the measurement variance evaluation that is performed on
new Measurement Values that are greater than the previous Measurement Value.
if the
Measurement
Variation is:
Less than or
equal to the
Allowable
Measurement
Variance value
Greater than or
equal to the
Allowable
Measurement
Variance value
...then in the
Thickness
Measurement
record, the value
in the Verify
Measurement
field is set to:
No
Yes
...and in the TML ...and in the TML

Corrosion
Corrosion
...and the value
Analysis record,1 Analysis record,1 in the Allowable
the value in the the Short Term Measurement
Verify
Corrosion Rate Variance Applied
Measurements field will be
field will be set
field will be set populated with to:
to:2
the:2
No
The Temporary
Short Term
Corrosion Rate
value
No
Yes
The Temporary
Short Term
Corrosion Rate
value
No
Example of Measurement and

Corrosion Rate Validation
Consider an example where the following TML Analysis Settings are defined:
Minimum Corrosion Rate: 5 Mils/Year

Allowable Measurement Variance: 0.04 Inches
Corrosion Rate Variance: 2
And assume that the following measurement data already exists for the TML:
Measurement Value
(Inches)
0.3
3/1/1995
0.29
3/1/2000
0.275
3/1/2005
Measurement
Now, assume that you take a fourth measurement reading on 3/1/2010 with the value
0.220 Inches.
Calculations
Based upon the data shown in this example, the following calculations will be performed
when the new measurement data is entered:
Measurement Variation
Measurement Variation = | Previous Measurement Value - New Measurement Value

|
Measurement Variation = | 0.275 - 0.22 |
Measurement Variation = | 0.275 - 0.22 |
Measurement Variation = 0.055 Inches
Temporary Short Term Corrosion Rate
Temporary Short Term Corrosion Rate = Measurement Variation / (New

Measurement Value Date - Previous Measurement Value Date)
Temporary Short Term Corrosion Rate = 0.055 / (3/1/2010 - 3/1/2005)
Temporary Short Term Corrosion Rate = 0.055 / (5 years)
Temporary Short Term Corrosion Rate = 0.011 Inches/Year
Temporary Short Term Corrosion Rate = 0.011 Inches/Year
Temporary Short Term Corrosion Rate = 11 Mils/Year
Measurement Ratio
Measurement Ratio = Temporary Short Term Corrosion Rate / Minimum Corrosion

Rate
Measurement Ratio = 11 / 5
Measurement Ratio = 2.2
Loss Evaluation
Because the new measurement value is less than the previously recorded measurement
value, a loss evaluation is performed using the new measurement data and the
calculations shown above. As a result of the evaluation, the following conclusions can be
drawn:
The Measurement Variation (0.055) is greater than the Allowable Measurement

Variance (0.04).
The Measurement Ratio (2.2) is greater than the Corrosion Rate Variance (2).
Therefore:
-and-
In the Thickness Measurement record, the value in the Verify Measurement field
will be set to Yes.
in the TML Corrosion Analysis record, the value in the Verify Measurements field
will be set to Yes.
-and
In the TML Corrosion Analysis record, the Short Term Corrosion Rate field will
be populated with the Temporary Short Term Corrosion Rate (11 Mils/Year).
-and
In the TML Corrosion Analysis record, the value in the Allowable Measurement
Variance Applied field will be set to No.
Asset Corrosion Analysis

Each Asset Corrosion Analysis record contains fields that store calculations and summary
information derived from data stored in the TML Corrosion Analysis records that are
linked to the Thickness Measurement Location records for the Equipment or TML Group
record. The TM Analysis page displays only some of the fields that are stored in the Asset
Corrosion Analysis record. Other fields can be viewed by opening the Asset Corrosion
Analysis record in the Meridium APM Record Manager or by building a query on the
Asset Corrosion Analysis family.
The following table provides a complete list of the fields that exist in each Asset
Corrosion Analysis record. Note that only a subset of these fields appear on the TM
Analysis page.
Field
Description
A unique alphanumeric string that identifies the Asset Corrosion
Analysis within the system. The Analysis ID consists of the ID from
the related Equipment or TML Group records, the text Corrosion
Analysis, and the TML Analysis Type: UT, RT, or TML.
Analysis ID
For example, if the Asset ID is Piping Circuit 123 and the TML
Analysis Type is UT, the Analysis ID would be: Piping Circuit 123 Corrosion Analysis UT.
Controlling
Corrosion Rate
The current corrosion rate of the piece of equipment or component,

determined using the corrosion rates that exist for the associated
Thickness Measurement Location records and the Asset Analysis

Settings.
Asset Calculated
Next Insp Date
The most conservative (i.e., soonest) Scheduled Next Inspection

Date, taken from the Thickness Measurement Location records that
are linked to the Asset Corrosion Analysis.
The Asset Calculated Next Insp Date or, if Apply CCR to TML Rem
Asset Controlling
Life Next Insp Date Calc check box is selected in the Analysis
Next Insp Date
Settings, the Asset Calc Adjusted Next Insp Date.
Asset Calculated
Remaining Life
The most conservative (i.e., shortest) Remaining Life value, taken

from the Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to
the Asset Corrosion Analysis.
The Asset Calculated Remaining Life or, if Apply CCR to TML Rem
Asset Controlling
Life Next Insp Date Calc check box is selected in the Analysis
Remaining Life
Settings, the Asset Calc Adjusted Remaining Life.
Asset Calculated
Retire Date
The most conservative (i.e., soonest) Retirement Date, taken from the
Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to the Asset
Corrosion Analysis.
The Asset Calculated Retire Date or, if Apply CCR to TML Rem Life
Asset Controlling
Next Insp Date Calc check box is selected in the Analysis Settings,
Retire Date
the Asset Calc Adjusted Retire Date.
A value that indicates the average rate at which the piece of
equipment or component is corroding, calculated by taking the sum
Average Corrosion
of the Controlling Corrosion Rates of the Thickness Measurement
Rate
Location records and dividing it by the number of Thickness
A text field that stores a list of Thickness Measurement Location
records that were used for calculating the Average Corrosion Rate for
Average Corrosion
the Asset Corrosion Analysis. This list is used to construct the Based
Rate TML's Used
On list of Thickness Measurement Location records that appear as
hyperlinks on the TM Analysis page.
Maximum
Corrosion Rate
A value that represents the fastest rate at which the piece of

equipment or component is corroding, determined by evaluating the
Controlling Corrosion Rates of all Thickness Measurement Location
records and using the highest value.
Statistical
Corrosion Rate
A corrosion rate that is calculated by first eliminating Thickness

Measurement Location records corrosion rates that are identified as
statistical outliers and then calculating the piece of equipment or
component-level corrosion rate as the average of the remaining
Thickness Measurement Location records corrosion rates.
Statistical
Corrosion Rate
TMLs Used
A text field that stores a list of Thickness Measurement Location

records that were used for calculating the Statistical Corrosion Rate
for the Asset Corrosion Analysis. This list is used to construct the
Based On list of Thickness Measurement Location records that
appear as hyperlinks on the TM Analysis page.
Asset Calc
Adjusted Next
Insp Date
The most conservative Asset Average Corrosion Rate Next Inspection

Date. This field is populated only if the Controlling Corrosion Rate
setting in the Asset Analysis Settings has been set to Average or
Formula at some point and the Apply CCR to TML Rem Life Next
Insp Date Calc check box was selected at the same time.
Asset Calc
Adjusted
Remaining Life
The most conservative Asset Average Corrosion Rate Remaining Life.

This field is populated only if the Controlling Corrosion Rate setting
in the Asset Analysis Settings has been set to Average or Formula at
some point and the Apply CCR to TML Rem Life Next Insp Date Calc
check box was selected at the same time.
Asset Calc
Adjusted Retire
Date
The most conservative Asset Average Corrosion Rate Retirement

Date. This field is populated only if the Controlling Corrosion Rate
setting in the Asset Analysis Settings has been set to Average or
Formula at some point and the Apply CCR to TML Rem Life Next
Insp Date Calc check box was selected at the same time.
Average Corrosion
Rate Standard
This field is not populated in the Asset Corrosion Analysis record.
Deviation
Calculated Date
Corrosion
Inspection Type
The date on which values in the Asset Corrosion Analysis record

were last updated.
A value that indicates the TML Analysis Type (UT, RT, or TML) of
Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to a given
Asset Corrosion Analysis. This field is populated automatically when
you create the first Thickness Measurement Location of a given type
and link it to an Equipment or TML Group record. An Asset
Corrosion Analysis is created at the same time and populated with the
value in the TML Analysis Type field that is selected in the Thickness
Maximum
The most conservative (i.e., the lowest value) from the Maximum
Allowable
Allowable Working Pressure values calculated for related Thickness
Working Pressure Measurement Location records.
Maximum
Historical
Corrosion Rate
The highest corrosion rate that has ever been calculated for any
Thickness Measurement Location record that is linked to the Asset
Corrosion Analysis.
TML Corrosion Analysis

For each Thickness Measurement Location record that is linked to an Equipment or TML
Group record, the Meridium APM system performs various automatic calculations using
the related Thickness Measurement records and settings defined for the analysis. These
calculations are stored in a TML Corrosion Analysis record, which is created and linked
to each Thickness Measurement Location record when it is first saved. Fields in the TML
Corrosion Analysis record are read-only and are updated automatically based upon
changes made to the Thickness Measurement Location record and any related Thickness
Measurement record.
Click any hyperlink in the table to access more information about how specific values are
calculated for the TML Corrosion Analysis.
Field
Description
Notes
Allowable
Measurement
Variance
Applied
A value that indicates whether the

Allowable Measurement Variance
None
has been used to determine the Short
Term Corrosion Rate.
Analysis ID
An alphanumeric ID that uniquely

identifies the TML Corrosion
Analysis record within the system.
The Analysis ID includes values

from the TML ID and TML Analysis
Type fields in the related Thickness
This field exists in TML Corrosion

Analysis records but is not used by
Analysis State
None
Thickness Monitoring and should
never contain a value.
This field is populated in the TML
The average corrosion rate for the Corrosion Analysis record only if
piece of equipment or component, the Controlling Corrosion Rate
calculated using the Corrosion Rate setting in the Asset Analysis
Asset Average
from all the Thickness Measurement Settings has been set to Average or
Corrosion Rate
Location records that are linked to Formula at some point and the
the Equipment or TML Group
Apply CCR to TML Rem Life Next
record.
Insp Date Calc check box was
selected at the same time.
Corrosion Analysis record only if
The Next Inspection Date,
Asset Average
the Controlling Corrosion Rate
calculated using the Asset Average
Corrosion Rate
setting in the Asset Analysis
Corrosion Rate Remaining Life
Next
Settings has been set to Average or
instead of the Controlling Corrosion
Inspection
Formula at some point and the
Rate for the Thickness Measurement
Date
Location record.
The Remaining Life for the
Asset Average
record, calculated using the Asset
Corrosion Rate
Average Corrosion Rate instead of
Remaining
the Controlling Corrosion Rate for
Life
the Thickness Measurement
Location record.

The Retirement Date for the

Asset Average record, calculated using the Asset
Corrosion Rate Average Corrosion Rate Remaining
Retirement
Life instead of the Remaining Life
Date
calculated using the Controlling
Corrosion Rate for the Thickness

Of the Thickness Measurements that

are linked to the Thickness
Measurement Location record, the The Base Measurement Value field
Base
Measurement Value from the
is populated only when at least one
Measurement Thickness Measurement record that Thickness Measurement record has
Value
represents the measurement that was been created for the Thickness
recorded first chronologically, based Measurement Location record.
upon the value in the Measurement
Taken Date field.
The Measurement Taken Date
Base
stored in the Thickness
Measurement
Measurement record that is used for
Date
the Base Measurement Value.
The Base Measurement Date field is

populated only when the Base
Measurement Value field is also
populated.
Base Model
Value
A value stored in the TML

Corrosion Analysis record but is not
displayed by default on the TML
Analysis page or on the TML
Analysis Datasheet.
This value can be viewed for a

record by accessing the statistical
details from the TML Analysis Plot
page.
Chi-square

Analysis Datasheet.

page.
If Thickness Measurement records
are not available and corrosion rates
cannot be calculated, the Corrosion
Rate will be set to the Minimum
Corrosion Rate defined in the TML
Analysis Settings.
The current corrosion rate for the

Controlling
record, which is the maximum
Note that this field is labeled
Corrosion Rate corrosion rate of the three calculated Corrosion Rate by default on the
corrosion rates: Short Term, Long TML Analysis Section tab of the
Term, and Least Squares.
TML with Analysis Details page. It
is labeled Controlling Corrosion
Rate on the TML Analysis page.
These are the same fields, and they
display the same value.
Corrosion
Inspection
Type
The type of TM Analysis, which is Using a baseline configuration, the

based upon the value in the TML
possible Corrosion Inspection Type
Analysis Type field in the related
values are UT, RT, and TML.

record.
The values in this table correspond
to the baseline field and datasheet
captions that exist for these fields.
These captions are not dynamic
based upon the label specified for
Custom
The corrosion rate determined by
the corrosion rates in the global
Calculation A custom corrosion rate A, as defined
preferences. If you want these
Corrosion Rate in the global preferences.
captions to match the custom labels
that you have defined for these
calculations, you will need to
customize the captions via the
Configuration Manager application.
Custom
The loss value calculated by custom
Calculation A corrosion rate A, as defined in the
Loss
global preferences.
Custom
The corrosion rate determined by
Calculation B custom corrosion rate B, as defined
Corrosion Rate in the global preferences.
Custom
The loss value calculated by custom The values in this table correspond
Calculation B corrosion rate B, as defined in the to the baseline field and datasheet
Loss
global preferences.

Descriptive
Statistics Is
Valid

Analysis Datasheet.
Factor
Remaining
Life Date
A date calculated using the

Remaining Life Factor.
The date that the next inspection

Interval Next
would need to be performed on a
Inspection
TML, according to the Default
Date
Inspection Interval.

page.
When the associated TML is below
t-min, this field is populated with
the value in the Last Measurement
Date field.
When the associated TML is not
below t-min, a calculation is used to
determine the value with which this
field is populated.
None

Analysis page or the TML Analysis
Datasheet.

page.

Last
Measurement
Date
the Last Measurement Value.
The Last Measurement Date field is

populated only when the Last
populated.
Kurtosis
Last
Of the Thickness Measurements that The Last Measurement Value is
Measurement are linked to the Thickness
populated only when two or more
Value
Measurement Location record, the Thickness Measurements exist for
Thickness Measurement record that

represents the measurement that was
recorded last chronologically, based Location record.
upon the value in the Measurement
Taken Date field.
A value that represents the corrosion
rate that was determined using the
Least Squares linear regression
method. The Least Squares method
The Least Squares Corrosion Rate
plots the thickness measurements
will be calculated for Thickness
Least Squares for the Thickness Measurement
Measurement Location records only
Corrosion Rate Location record and then draws a
if the Asset Analysis Settings
line that minimizes the sum of the
specify that it should be used.
squares of the offsets of the
datapoints. The Least Squares
Corrosion Rate represents the slope
of the line on the plot.
Linear
Regression Is displayed by default on the TML
Valid
Analysis Datasheet.

page.
For the Thickness Measurement
Location record, the rate of
corrosion between the Base
Measurement Value and the Last
The Long Term Corrosion Rate will Measurement Value, calculated
using the equation:
be calculated for Thickness
Long Term
Corrosion Rate
Long Term Corrosion Rate =
Long Term Loss/Long Term
Interval
Location record, the amount of
Long Term
The Long Term Loss will be
Loss
calculated only if the Asset Analysis material lost between the Base
Settings specify that the Long Term Measurement Value and the Last
Measurement Value, calculated
using the equation:
Long Term Loss = Base

Measurement Value - Last
Measurement Value
Maximum
Allowable
Working
Pressure
The maximum pressure at which the

associated piece of equipment is
This value is calculated only for
designed to operate. This value will
Equipment or TML Group records
be calculated only if the Thickness
that represent pipes or components
Measurement Location record
that make up pipes.
contains the data necessary to
perform the calculation.
Maximum
Bound

Analysis Datasheet.

page.
Maximum
(Inches)

Analysis Datasheet.

page.
The highest value calculated as the

corrosion rate for this Thickness
Measurement Location record, for
Because this field contains an
Maximum
the life of the Thickness
historical value, the Maximum
Historical
Measurement Location record. The
Historical Corrosion Rate may differ
Corrosion Rate Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate
from all current corrosion rates.
may come from any of the three
possible corrosion rates: Short Term,
Long Term, or Least Squares.
Mean

Analysis Datasheet.

page.
Mean Absolute A value stored in the TML

Deviation
Corrosion Analysis record but is not Thickness Measurement Location

Analysis Datasheet.

page.
Minimum

Analysis Datasheet.

page.
Minimum
Bound

Analysis Datasheet.

page.
A setting that indicates whether the

value in the Corrosion Rate field has
If the Minimum Corrosion Rate
Minimum
been calculated from the available
from the TML Analysis Settings has
Corrosion Rate Thickness Measurement records or
been used, this check box will be
Used
set to the Minimum Corrosion Rate
selected.
value defined in the TML Analysis
Settings.
Model

Analysis Datasheet.

page.
Of the Thickness Measurements that

are linked to the Thickness
Measurement Location record, the
The Near Measurement Value field
Near
is populated only when two or more
Thickness Measurement record that
Measurement
Thickness Measurements exist for
represents the measurement that was
Value
recorded next-to-last
Location record.
chronologically, based upon the
value in the Measurement Taken
Date field.
Near
Measurement
Date
the Near Measurement Value.
The Near Measurement Date field is

populated only when the Near
populated.
Projected TMin Date
The date when the TML will reach

its minimum thickness, taking into
account the current rate of corrosion
None
and the T-Min value for the
record.
R Squared

Analysis Datasheet.

page.
Range

Analysis Datasheet.

page.
Remaining
Life
Scheduled
Next
Inspection
Date
A value that represents how long

after the Last Measurement Date a
piece of equipment or component
None
will be in service, based upon the TMin value and the current rate of
corrosion.
This may be one of the following
values, depending upon which dates
have been calculated according to
the TML analysis settings:
The date on which the TML should
be inspected next.

Interval Next Inspection
Date
Projected T-min Date

Location record, the amount of
The Short Term Loss will be
calculated only if the Asset Analysis material lost between the Near
Settings specify that the Short Term Measurement Value and the Last
Measurement Value, calculated
using the equation:
Short Term
Loss
Short Term Loss = Near
Measurement Value - Last

Measurement Value
Location record, the rate of
corrosion between the Near
Measurement Value and the Last
The Short Term Corrosion Rate will Measurement Value, calculated
using the equation:
be calculated for Thickness
Short Term
Corrosion Rate
Short Term Corrosion Rate =
Short Term Loss/Short Term
Interval
Skewness

Analysis Datasheet.

page.
Standard
Deviation

Analysis Datasheet.

page.
TML
Thickness
Analysis
Settings Key
This field is not used by Thickness

Monitoring and will never contain a None
value.
Variance

Analysis Datasheet.
Verify
A value that indicates whether the
Measurements TML Corrosion Analysis is
associated with Thickness

page.
This field is populated with a list of
System Codes in the MI_YES_NO
System Code Table.
Measurement records where the

value in the Measurement Value
field requires manual verification
based upon the Allowable
Measurement Variance and/or
Corrosion Rate Variance validation.

Thickness Measurement Location records contain various fields that store information to
identify a TML. When you create a new Thickness Measurement Location record, you
will need to supply information in some of these fields. The values in other fields will be
populated or calculated automatically based upon other values in the Thickness
Measurement Location record and values in related records.
The following table provides a list of various fields that are defined for the Thickness
Measurement Location family in the baseline Meridium APM database. Depending upon
how your system has been configured, additional fields may be available in your
Thickness Measurement Location records, and some fields may not behave exactly as
described in the table. Note that fields are listed in alphabetical order in the table; they
may appear in a different order on each screen. Note also that this list is not
comprehensive; some baseline fields have been omitted.
Field
Description
Notes
Access
Any special requirements for

how a location must be
accessed. By default, three
options are available in this
field: Man Lift, Ladder, and
Scaffold.
A value should be selected in this field

when the Thickness Measurement Location
record is created but can be modified after
the Thickness Measurement Location
record has been created, if necessary.
Allowable
Stress
You cannot type a value in the Allowable

Stress field. Meridium APM provides an
A value that represents the
interface that allows you to look up the
maximum amount of pressure
Allowable Stress value for a Thickness
that can safely be withstood at
Measurement Location record based upon
a given TML.
other values that are stored in the same
record.
A logical field that is still used

by the Meridium APM system
Analysis
to determine when a given TM
Required - Analysis needs to be updated.
Deprecated This field is set by the
as of 3.4.5 Meridium APM system as
changes are made in Thickness
Monitoring.
Certain changes that are made to the

Thickness Measurement Location record
and its associated Thickness Measurement
records and analysis settings cause this
field to be set to True. Whenever this field
is set to True, the Meridium APM system
knows that an analysis must be performed
and performs it automatically when you
save your changes.
This field is not on the Thickness

Measurement Location datasheet.
Code Year
(Allowable The year in which the design
Stress
code was defined.
Lookup)
The Code Year (Allowable Stress Lookup)

field is populated with a list of values that
come from the Piping Stress, PV Stress, or
Tank Stress reference table and correspond
to the value selected in the Design Code
field. This value is used for looking up the
Allowable Stress value for the Thickness
Code Year
(T-Min
Formula)
The year in which the design

code was defined.
The Code Year (T-Min Formula) field is

populated with a list of years that exist in
Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup
records and correspond to the value in the
Design Code field in the Thickness
Measurement Location record. The value in
the Code Year (T-Min Formula) field is
used for determining which formula will be
used for calculating the T-Min and
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure
values.
Corroded
Area
Columns
The number of cells in the corroded area

grid, as determined by the number of rows
The number of columns in the
and columns, determines how many
corroded area grid.
measurement values will be recorded for
the area.
A value that indicates the

Corroded
length of the corroded area in
Area Length
inches.
Together, the Corroded Area Length and the

Corroded Area Width represent the overall
size of the corroded area.
Corroded
The number of rows in the
Area Rows corroded area grid.
The number of cells in the corroded area

grid, as determined by the number of rows
and columns, determines how many
measurement values will be recorded for
the area.
Together, the Corroded Area Length and the

Corroded
A value that indicates the width
Corroded Area Width represent the overall
Area Width of the corroded area in inches.
size of the corroded area.
This field applies only to Thickness
A numeric value that indicates Measurement Location records that are
Distance
how far the TML is from the linked to Equipment or TML Group records
from Bottom
bottom of the tank.
that represent tanks or components that
make up a tank.
The Design Code field contains a list of
System Codes that exist in the DSCD
System Code Table. The value in the
Design Code field is used to determine the
The design code associated
equipment type of a given Thickness
with the TML that is used for Measurement Location record. The
Design Code
calculating the minimum
MI_ASSET_TYPE System Code Table
thickness value.
contains references to System Codes in the
DSCD System Code Table. Meridium APM
is able to use these references to derive the
equipment type associated with each design
code.
A field that specifies whether This field is read-only in the Thickness
or not the Thickness
Measurement Location record and displays
Exclude
Measurement Location record the value that is defined via the Exclude
from
will be excluded from the TM TMLs feature.
Analysis
Analysis. If this check box is
selected, the Thickness
will not be used when
Only members of the MI Thickness
performing asset corrosion
Monitoring Inspector Security Group can
calculations, and the Scheduled exclude Thickness Measurement Location
Next Inspection Date,
records from an analysis.
Projected T-Min Date, and
Estimated Remaining Life for
the TML will be set to null.
In addition, for excluded
Thickness Measurement
Location records, the Thickness

corrosion rates will be
calculated for the TML
Corrosion Analysis but will not
impact the Asset Corrosion
Analysis.
Inspection
Sequence
Number
A numeric value that indicates

the order in which a given
This value is meant to facilitate TMLTML will be inspected with
inspection workflows and is not used in any
respect to the other TMLs for
calculations.
the same piece of equipment or
component.
Insulated
Flag
Indicates whether the piece of

equipment or component is
insulated at the location
represented by the Thickness
This check box should be selected if the

equipment is insulated. Note that this field
serves as a visual indicator only; it does not
control or affect any function in TM.
Indicates whether the

Location record represents a
corroded area rather than a
Is Corroded specific, corroded location.
Area?
When this check box is
selected, measurement values
will represent the thickness of
the entire area rather than the
thickness of a specific location.
When this check box is selected, the values

in the Corroded Area Columns and
Corroded Area Rows fields will create a
corroded area "grid" that you will use for
recording measurement values.
Location
This field is meant to provide a textual

description of the TMLs location on the
piece of equipment or component. When
The location of the TML on the
creating a new Thickness Measurement
piece of equipment or
Location record, you should type a
component.
description that will help you and others
locate this TML on the piece of equipment
or component.
Minimum
Thickness
Minimum
Thickness
Type
The T-Min value for the TML,

The minimum thickness can be entered
which is the minimum wall
manually by typing the desired value in this
thickness allowed at the
field, or it can be calculated on the T-Min
specific location. Typically, you
Calculations page. If this field does not
will want to replace a piece of
contain a value, a value of 0 (zero) will be
equipment or component
used in any calculations that use the T-Min
before any of its TMLs reach
value.
the minimum thickness.
A value that indicates how the
T-Min value was obtained. This
field is populated with one of
the following values:
This field is populated automatically only
after the T-Min value for the Thickness
Calculated
Measurement Location record has been
Nominal
saved.
Nominal
Thickness
User-Defined
If a value exists in the Nominal Thickness

A value that is meant to
field in a Thickness Measurement Location
represent the value of the first record that is not linked to any Thickness
measurement recorded for a
Measurement records, when you access the
TML if the base measurement TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page,
is to be recorded from a design the Measurement Value cell for that
specification or other published Thickness Measurement Location record
standard.
will be populated with the Nominal
Thickness value.

number of values that can be
entered in the Readings field in
records that are linked to a
given Thickness Measurement
Number of Location record. The data entry This field accepts only whole number,
Readings
grid that is available in the
numeric values between 1 (one) and 26.
Readings field will be
constructed based upon the
value in this field (i.e., the
number of rows it contains will
correspond to the value in this
field).
Renew
Historical
Sequence
Number

number of times a given
Location record has been
renewed.
This field is read-only and contains no

value if the Thickness Measurement
Location record has never been renewed.
This field is read-only and is populated

automatically whenever the Status Indicator
The name of the Meridium
is changed. When a Thickness
Status
APM Security User who last
Measurement Location record is first
Changed By changed the value in the Status
created, this field is populated with the
Indicator field.
name of the Security User who created the
Status
Changed
Date
Status
Indicator
This field is read-only and is populated

automatically whenever the Status Indicator
The date on which the value in
is changed. When a Thickness
the Status Indicator field was
Measurement Location record is first
last changed.
created, this field is populated with the
current date.
On the datasheet, this field contains a list of
A value that indicates the status values from the
of the Thickness Measurement MI_STATUS_INDICATOR System Code
Location record, either Active Table. In the baseline Meridium APM
or Inactive. Inactive Thickness database, the list contains the following
Measurement Location records values:
or measurements are not
included in calculations.
Active
Inactive
Whenever this value is modified, the Status

Changed By and Status Changed Date will
be updated automatically.
When the value in this field is changed

from Active to Inactive, values will be
deleted from the following fields in the
associated TML Corrosion Analysis record:
Remaining Life
Tank
Diameter
TML
Analysis
Type
For a TML on a tank, a value

that indicates the diameter of
the tank.
The value used by the Asset

Corrosion Analysis to
determine how to group the
analysis results. A value must
be selected in this field when
Location record is created.

This value is only used for Thickness
Measurement Location records that are
linked to Equipment or TML Group records
that represent tanks or components that
make up a tank.
If this field contains a value that is greater

than 200 feet, T-Min cannot be calculated
for the Thickness Measurement Location
record.
A baseline rule populates this field with a
list of values that are stored in the
Corrosion Inspection Type field in all
Corrosion Analysis Settings records that are
associated with the Equipment or TML
Group record to which the Thickness
Measurement Location record is linked. In
the baseline database, these values are
stored as System Codes in the System Code
Table CITP (Corrosion Inspection Type).
By default, this System Code Table
contains three System Codes: UT, RT, and
TML.
UT (ultrasonic thickness) and RT

(radiographic thickness) are
provided for customers who want to
classify Thickness Measurement
Location records according to
inspection type and then perform
calculations on each set of
records.
TML is provided for customers who
do not wish to classify Thickness
according to inspection type and
instead prefer to analyze them all
together.
You can modify the System Codes in this
System Code Table if you want to use

custom TML Analysis Types.
The Record ID of the

Equipment or TML Group
TML Asset
record for which the Thickness
ID
is created.
This field is populated automatically after

record is first saved based upon the
Component ID Field setting for the
Equipment or TML Group family. This
field is disabled throughout TM so that this
value cannot be modified.
TML
Comment
Additional information about

the TML. This field is meant to
store descriptive information
that is not recorded in another
field in the Thickness
You should type in this field any additional

information that is necessary to record
about the TML. This field is used for
informational purposes only.
TML ID
A value must be entered in this field when a

The alphanumeric ID that
Thickness Measurement Location record is
uniquely identifies a Thickness
created. Note that the TML ID field will be
color-coded if one of the associated
within a given TM Analysis.
measurements meets certain conditions.
Thickness Measurement records contain various fields that store information to identify a
specific thickness reading at a TML. When you create a new Thickness Measurement
record, you will need to supply information in some of these fields. The values in other
fields will be populated automatically based upon other values in the Thickness
Measurement and Thickness Measurement Location records. Thickness Measurement
fields can be viewed and modified on:
The TM TMLs/Measurements page.

The TM Measurement Data Entry page.
The TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page.
The following table provides a list of various fields that are defined for the Thickness
Measurement family in the baseline Meridium APM database. Depending upon how your
system has been configured, additional fields may be available in your Thickness
Measurement records, and some fields may not behave exactly as described in the table.
Note that fields are listed in alphabetical order in the table; they may appear in a different
order on each screen in Meridium APM.
Field
Description
Notes
This field should contain values that have

A field that displays a string of
Corroded Area
been entered using the corroded area grid
values representing the
Measurement
only. You should not add or modify
corroded area thickness
Values
values in this field by typing in the field
measurements.
itself.
Historical
Sequence
Number
Instrument
Probe
A value that identifies the

renewal sequence of the
record.
For example, if a Thickness

Measurement Location record has three
Active Thickness Measurement records,
when the Thickness Measurement
Location record is renewed for the first
time, the Historical Sequence Number of
those three Thickness Measurements will
be set to 1 (one). If the Thickness
Measurement Location record is renewed
again, the Historical Sequence Number
of any Thickness Measurement records
that are Active at the time of the renewal
will be set to 2 (two).
A value that uniquely identifies None

the specific probe that was used
to collect the measurement
value. This field is populated
only when a measurement is
recorded using a handheld
device.
Additional information about

the measurement. This field is
You should type in this field any
meant to store descriptive
Measurement
additional information about the
information that is not recorded
Comment
measurement. This field is used for
in another field in the
informational purposes only.
record.
The Record ID of the

Measurement
ID
record.
Measurement The person who recorded the

Taken By
measurement value.
The value from the Record ID field is

copied to the Measurement ID field when
the Thickness Measurement record is
saved. Note that if you modify the ID
Template of the Thickness Measurement
family and update existing Record IDs,
values in the Measurement ID field will
not be updated in existing Thickness
Measurement records until those records
are saved.
This list in this field contains the names
of individual(s) who have been granted
the TM Technician role.
When you create a Thickness
Measurement record, if you have been
granted the TM Technician role, the
value is set by default to your name. You
can change the value by selecting another
name in the list.
The default rule on the Measurement
Taken By field specifies that the list is
restricted, meaning that you cannot type
your own value in the list. If the default
rule has been modified to make the list
unrestricted, you will be able to type a
value in this field, and save it with the
Measurement The date that the measurement This may be the date that the Thickness
Taken Date
value was recorded.
Measurement record was created, or it
may be a different date, particularly if the

Thickness Measurement record was
created some time after the measurement
was physically recorded.
The first and last name of the
Measurement Meridium APM Security User
Status
who last changed the value in
Changed By the Measurement Status
Indicator field.
This value is updated whenever the value

in the Measurement Status Indicator field
is changed, either manually or
automatically (e.g., when the root
Thickness Measurement Location record
is renewed).
Thickness Measurement records that are

Measurement A field that indicates whether
flagged as Inactive are not used for
Status
the Thickness Measurement is
performing TML Corrosion Analysis
Indicator
Active or Inactive.
calculations.
The value, in inches, for a
given thickness measurement.
The Measurement Value
Measurement
represents the thickness of the
Value
piece of equipment or
component at the TML on the
Measurement Taken Date.
The Measurement Value can be a reading

that was taken physically or that was
recorded based upon a design code or
specification. In the baseline TM
product, the Measurement Value field is
populated automatically with the value in
the Uncorrected Measurement field.
An indication of whether or not

the Measurement Value has
been manually verified. After
the value in the Verify
Measurement Measurement field has been set
System Codes in the MI_YES System
Verified
to Yes, this field should be set
Code Table.
to Yes to indicate that the
measurement data in question
has been validated and
corrected if needed.
Nominal
A check box that indicates

All Nominal Thickness Measurements
whether the measurement was will be set automatically to Inactive after
taken physically (the check box two, subsequent Actual Thickness
is not selected) or recorded
Measurement records have been created.
from another source, such as a Thickness Measurement records that are
published design specification marked as Inactive will not be used for
(the check box is selected).
performing TML Corrosion Analysis
calculations. This means that after two or
more Actual Thickness Measurements
exist, Nominal Thickness Measurements

will no longer be used in calculations.
The Instrument ID field is labeled Probe

ID on the default Thickness
The unique ID of the device
Measurement datasheet, which you can
Probe
that was used to record the
access on the TM TMLs/Measurements
ID/Instrument measurement. This field is
page. The Probe ID field on the datasheet
ID
populated when a measurement should not be confused with the
is recorded using a datalogger. Instrument Probe field, which identifies
the actual probe that was used to record
the measurement.
Values that represent the
readings that were collected for
a given thickness measurement.
The Readings field provides
access to an editable grid that
contains one row per reading
value that can be entered.
The number of values that can be
After values have been entered recorded in the Readings field
in to the Readings field in a
corresponds to the value in the Number
Readings
given Thickness Measurement of Readings field in the Thickness
record, a calculation will be
Measurement Location record to which
performed to populate the
the Thickness Measurement record is
value in the Uncorrected
linked.
Measurement field in that same
record. The calculation that is
performed is determined by the
Global Preferences that have
been defined for measurement
readings.
Readings
Pass/Fail
A value that indicates whether

the values in the Readings field
passed or failed evaluation
based upon the Reading
Tolerance setting.
The date that the value in the

Status
Status Indicator field was last
Changed Date
changed.

System Codes in the
MI_PASS_FAIL_ONLY System Code
Table.
This field is updated automatically
whenever the value in the Status
Indicator field changes.
Temperature
The temperature at which the

measurement value was
recorded.
A numeric value that is the

Uncorrected result of the calculation that
Measurement was performed against values
in the Readings field.
This is an optional field that, by default,

stores the value entered by the user. This
field is provided so that custom rules can
be developed, if desired, to allow for a
calculation that will adjust the
measurement value based upon the
temperature at which the reading was
taken.
The Uncorrected Measurement field is
meant to serve as an intermediate storage
location between the Readings and
Measurement Value fields. If desired,
you can create custom rules for the
Measurement Value field so that the
Uncorrected Measurement value is
adjusted based upon additional factors
and the result of that calculation becomes
the value in the Measurement Value field.
A value that indicates whether

the value in the Measurement
Value field requires manual
Verify
verification based upon the
System Codes in the MI_YES_NO
Measurement
Allowable Measurement
System Code Table.
Variance and/or Corrosion Rate
Variance validation.
About Thickness Monitoring Task

Records
Thickness Monitoring Task records can be used to manage the inspection schedules for
pieces of equipment that you analyze in TM. Thickness Monitoring Task records will be
created automatically when you create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for an
Equipment or TML Group record in a TM Analysis. If you select the Auto Manage Tasks
check box on the Global Preferences page, when you update a Thickness Measurement
Location record, the corresponding Thickness Monitoring Task record will be updated
automatically.
The Auto Manage Tasks setting is disabled by default. If the Risk Based Inspection
license is active, you should accept the default setting because you will use the Task
records generated from RBI, rather than TM, to determine your inspection intervals. If
the Risk Based Inspection license is not active, you should enable the Auto Manage Tasks
setting.
In the following image, the Auto Manage Tasks check box is selected, indicating that
Thickness Monitoring Task records will be created and updated automatically. A red
outline to the Tasks Settings pane has been added to the image to highlight the Auto
Manage Tasks check box.
Note: The Meridium APM system will create and update Thickness Monitoring Task
records automatically only if the Component ID setting is defined for the Equipment or
TML Group family.
Accessing Thickness Monitoring Task

Records from TM
You can access Thickness Monitoring Task records from either the TM Analysis page or
the TM TMLs/Measurements page. In either case, the Meridium APM system displays a
list of all Thickness Monitoring Task records that are linked to any Equipment or TML
Group record that is included in the analysis.
Note that when you access the Thickness Monitoring Task records, the Meridium APM
system displays them on the Task List page in Task Management, where the grid displays
the results of the AvailableTMTasks query, which is stored in the following folder in the
Meridium APM Catalog: \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Thickness Monitoring\Queries.
The following instructions explain how to access the Thickness Monitoring Task records
from the TM Analysis page.
To access Thickness Monitoring Task records from the TM Analysis page:
On the TM Analysis page, on the Analysis Tasks menu, click the View Tasks link.
The Task List page in Task Management appears.
The grid displays a list of Thickness Monitoring Task records that are linked to any
Equipment or TML Group record that is included in the TM Analysis from which you
accessed the page. Each row represents a single Thickness Monitoring Task record. You
can click any hyperlinked Task ID to open the Task record in the Record Manager.
Thickness Monitoring Task Fields

The following table lists the Thickness Monitoring Task fields that are populated
automatically when a Thickness Monitoring Task record is created.
Field
Value
Coverage
0 (zero)
Desired
Interval
0 (zero)
Max Date
The value in the Calculated Date field in the associated Asset Corrosion
Analysis record.
Max
Interval
0 (zero)
Min Date
The value in the Calculated Date field in the associated Asset Corrosion
Analysis record.
Min Interval 0 (zero)

Null
Next Date
Related
Entity ID
Note: When the analysis is saved, this field is populated with the value in
the Asset Controlling Next Insp Date field in the associated Asset Corrosion
Analysis record.
The Record ID of the Equipment or TML Group record to which the
Thickness Monitoring Task record is linked.
Source Type Thickness Monitoring Analysis

Task
Task Description
Description
<Task Type> - <Component ID Field>
...where:
Task ID
Task Type
<Task Type> is the value in the Task Type field in the Task record.
<Component ID Field> is the value in the Component ID Field list

on the Asset Family Preferences page.
The value in the Corrosion Inspection Type field in the associated Asset
Note: All fields on the datasheet are disabled.
About Thickness Monitoring Reference

Tables
Various reference tables are used throughout Thickness Monitoring. Thickness
Monitoring Rules Lookup records are delivered in the Meridium APM baseline database,
but other types of records must be created manually or imported. The following table lists
the Meridium Reference Table records that are used in Thickness Monitoring, how they
are used, and notes about creating or importing these records. This section of the
documentation provides details on each of these records.
Meridium
Reference
Use
Table record
Thickness
Identify formulas that should be used to
Monitoring
determine each of the following values
for a Thickness Measurement Location
Notes
You can use the Thickness
Monitoring Rules Lookup
records as they are delivered in
record:
Rules Lookup
Calculated T-Min
Maximum Allowable Working

Pressure
Piping Nominal
Locate the appropriate Nominal T-Min
T-Min
value for each Thickness Measurement
Location record when you calculate Tmin values.
Piping Stress
PV Stress
Tank Stress
Tank T-Min
Annular Ring
Locate the appropriate Allowable Stress

value for Thickness Measurement
Location records that contain a value in
the Design Code field that corresponds
with the value Piping in the Asset Type
field.
the baseline Meridium APM

database, or you can modify
these records to suit your
specific needs.
For Nominal T-Min values to

be determined, you must create
Piping Nominal T-Min records
manually using values from
industry standards.
For Allowable Stress values to
be retrieved, you must create
Piping Stress records manually
using values from industry
standards.

Meridium, Inc. provides PV
Location records that contain a value in
Stress records that you can
the Design Code field that corresponds
import.
with the value Pressure Vessel in the
Asset Type field.
Meridium, Inc. provides Tank
Location records that contain the value Stress records that you can
API 653 in the Design Code and Welded import.
Shell in the Tank Type field.
Locate the appropriate Calculated T-Min
value for each Thickness Measurement
For Calculated T-Min values to
Location record with the value API 653
be determined, you must create
in the Design Code field and Annular
Tank T-Min Annular Ring
Ring in the Tank Type field.
records manually using values
from industry standards.

Records in the Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup family make up the Thickness
Monitoring Rules Lookup reference table. Meridium APM provides a set of baseline
Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup records and the associated Rules Library projects.
You can use the baseline records as they are delivered, or you can modify them to suit
your specific needs. Like all reference table records, Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup
records are best viewed in the Bulk Data Form or through a query.
Hint: The TM Administrative Tasks page contains a link that lets you view these records
in the Bulk Data Form.
The following table provides a list of the fields that exist in the Thickness Monitoring
Rules Lookup family, descriptions of these fields, and information about any
corresponding TML fields.
Field
Name
Asset Type
Field Description
Corresponding TML Field
Contains a value that identifies the

type of equipment to which a
None. This field exists simply to
record is linked. The value in this
facilitate the creation of new
field determines which values are
available in the Design Code field.
records by filtering values in the
For example, when Piping is
Design Code field.
selected in the Asset Type field, only
piping design codes will appear in
the Design Code field.
Contains a list of design codes that

Design Code are appropriate for the equipment
Design Code
type selected in the Asset Type field.
Code Year
Contains a list of years associated

with the selected Design Code.
Component
Type
Determined by the equipment type,

Contains a list of component types. which is derived from the value in
the Design Type field, and can be
any of the following fields:
Code Year (T-Min Formula)
Vessel Type for Pressure

Vessel TMLs.
Tank Type for Tank TMLs.
No mapping for Tank TMLs.
Determined by the equipment type,

which is derived from the value in
the Design Type field, and can be
any of the following fields:
Formula
Contains a list of formula
Classification classifications.
Piping Formula for Piping

TMLs.
PV Formula for Pressure
Vessel TMLs.
No mapping for Tank TMLs.
T-Min
Contains a reference to a project in
Formula Rule the Rules Library.
None. This value is derived for each

record based upon values in other
fields. Although the derived value is
not stored in the Thickness
Measurement Location record itself,
it identifies the formula that will be
used to determine the Calculated TMin value for a Thickness
MAWP
Contains a reference to a project in
Formula Rule the Rules Library.
None. This value is derived for each

record based upon values in other
fields. Although the derived value is
not stored in the Thickness
Measurement Location record itself,
it is used to determine the Maximum
Allowable Working Pressure value
for a Thickness Measurement
Location record.
How Thickness Monitoring Rules

Lookup Records Are Used
Meridium APM determines which formula to use for calculating the Calculated T-Min
value by matching values in the Thickness Measurement Location record to values in the
Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup reference table. For example, consider the following
Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup records.
Asset Design Component Code Formula

T-Min Formula Rule
Type Code Type
Year Classification
Record
Piping B31.3 N/A
1
1995 A
Rules Library\Meridium\Thickness Monitoring\T-Min

Calculator\TMinCalculator\CalculateTMinASME_B31
Record
Piping B31.3 N/A
2
1995 B

Record
Piping B31.3 N/A
3
1995 C

Record
Piping B31.3 N/A
4
1995 D

Now, consider a Thickness Measurement Location record that contains the following
values:
Design Code: B31.3

Code Year (T-Min Formula): 1995
Piping Formula: A
Based upon the values in the Thickness Measurement Location record:
The following function will be used to determine the Calculated T-Min value:
Calculator\TMinCalculator\CalculateTMinASME_B31_3A_1995.
The following function will be used to calculate the Maximum Allowable

Working Pressure: Rules Library\Meridium\Thickness
Monitoring\MAWP\MAWPPiping\CalculateMAWP.
Because Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup records determine which formulas will be
used for performing certain calculations, you will need to modify the existing records or
create your own records if you want to perform custom calculations. You can define
custom calculations by:
Creating custom rules in the Rules Library.

Modifying Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup records or creating new ones to
reference those rules in the T-Min Formula Rule or MAWP Formula Rule field, as
appropriate.
Piping Nominal T-Min

Records in the Piping Nominal T-Min family make up the Piping Nominal T-Min
reference table, which the Meridium APM system uses to locate the appropriate Nominal
T-Min value for each Thickness Measurement Location record when you calculate T-Min
values. Since the baseline Meridium APM product does not include any records in the
Piping Nominal T-Min family, you must create these records manually using values from
industry standards. After these records exist, when you calculate T-Min values, the
Meridium APM system will map values from fields in the Thickness Measurement
Location records to values in the corresponding fields in Piping Nominal T-Min records
to find the associated Nominal T-Min value.
Note: Only the fields that are selected in the Nominal T-Min Lookup settings will be used
for retrieving Nominal T-Min values for Equipment and TML Group records that
represent piping equipment.
The following table lists the default fields in the Piping Nominal T-Min family and the
corresponding fields in the Thickness Measurement Location family. The table provides
the full list of mappings for all fields in the Piping Nominal T-Min family. Each mapping
with be used only if that field is selected to be used for Nominal T-Min retrieval
according to the settings on the Global Preferences page.
Piping
Nominal TMin Field
Corresponding Thickness Measurement Location Field
Design Code
Design Code
Material Grade
Material Grade
Material
Specification
Material Type
Material Type
Nominal Pipe
Diameter
Piping Nominal Diameter
None. Values from input fields are used to find the corresponding
Nominal T-Min Nominal T-Min value, which is used to populate the Nominal T-Min
cell on the T-Min Calculations page.
Pipe Type
None. This field cannot be selected in the Fields for Nominal T-Min
Lookup list on the Global Preferences page and has no corresponding
Thickness Measurement Location field. Therefore, it will never be used
for looking up Nominal T-Min values.
Piping Stress
Records in the Piping Stress family make up the Piping Stress reference table, which the
Meridium APM system uses to locate the appropriate Allowable Stress value for
Thickness Measurement Location records that contain a value in the Design Code field
that corresponds with the value Piping in the Asset Type field.
Since the baseline Meridium APM product does not include any records in the Piping
Stress family, you must create these records manually using values from industry
standards. After these records exist, when you look up Allowable Stress values, Meridium
APM will map values from fields in the Thickness Measurement Location records to
values in the corresponding fields in Piping Stress records to find the associated
Allowable Stress value.
The following table lists the fields that exist in the Piping Stress family in the baseline
Meridium APM database and indicates how each one corresponds to a field in the
Thickness Measurement Location family.
Piping
Corresponding
Notes
Stress Field TML Field
Allowable
Stress
The Lookup Value on the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog

box will become the Allowable Stress value from the
Piping Stress record that corresponds to other values
mapped from the Thickness Measurement Location
Allowable Stress
record. This value can be used to populate the
Allowable Stress field in the Thickness Measurement
Location record, or it can be overridden by a userdefined value.
Code Year
The Code Year (Allowable Stress Lookup) must be

Code Year
specified in the Thickness Measurement Location
(Allowable Stress
record for Meridium APM to retrieve the Allowable
Lookup)
Stress value from the Piping Stress reference table.
Design Code Design Code
The Design Code must be specified in the Thickness

Measurement Location record for Meridium APM to
retrieve the Allowable Stress value from the Piping
Stress reference table.
Material
Grade
The Material Grade must be specified in the Thickness

Measurement Location record for Meridium APM to
retrieve the Allowable Stress value from the Piping
Stress reference table.
Material Grade
Material
Material
Specification Specification
The Material Specification must be specified in the

Thickness Measurement Location record for Meridium
APM to retrieve the Allowable Stress value from the
Piping Stress reference table.
Material Type Material Type
Not used for retrieving Allowable Stress.
Metal
Temperature
Design
Temperature
The Design Temperature must be specified in the

Thickness Measurement Location record for Meridium
APM to retrieve the Allowable Stress value from the
Piping Stress reference table.
Minimum
Tensile
Strength
Minimum Tensile
Strength
Minimum
Minimum Yield
Yield Strength Strength
PV Stress
Records in the PV Stress family make up the PV Stress reference table, which Meridium
APM uses to locate the appropriate Allowable Stress value for Thickness Measurement
Location records that contain a value in the Design Code field that corresponds with the
value Pressure Vessel in the Asset Type field.
The baseline Meridium APM product does not include any records in the PV Stress
family, but Meridium, Inc. provides PV Stress records that you can import. Regardless of
whether this reference table is populated with custom data or the records that Meridium,
Inc. provides, when you look up Allowable Stress values, the Meridium APM system will
map values from fields in the Thickness Measurement Location records to values in the
corresponding fields in PV Stress records to find the associated Allowable Stress value.
The following table lists the fields that exist in the PV Stress family in the baseline
PV Stress Field
Corresponding
TML Field
Notes
Allowable Stress
The Lookup Value on the Allowable Stress Lookup

dialog box will become the Allowable Stress
value from the PV Stress record that corresponds
to other values mapped from the Thickness
Allowable Stress
Measurement Location record. This value can be
used to populate the Allowable Stress field in the
Thickness Measurement Location record, or it
can be overridden by a user-defined value.
Code Year
Code Year
(Allowable
Stress Lookup)
Design Code
Design Code
The Code Year (Allowable Stress Lookup) must

be specified in the Thickness Measurement
Location record for Meridium APM to retrieve
the Allowable Stress value from the PV Stress
reference table.
The Design Code must be specified in the
Thickness Measurement Location record for
Meridium APM to retrieve the Allowable Stress
value from the PV Stress reference table.
Material Grade
Material Grade
The Material Grade must be specified in the

Material
Specification
Material
Specification
The Material Specification must be specified in

the Thickness Measurement Location record for
Material Type
Material Type
Metal Temperature
Design
Temperature

Minimum Tensile
Strength
Minimum
Tensile Strength
Minimum Yield
Strength
Minimum Yield
Strength
Tank Stress
Records in the Tank Stress family make up the Tank Stress reference table, which
Meridium APM uses to locate the appropriate Allowable Stress value for Thickness
Measurement Location records that contain the value API 653 in the Design Code field
and Welded Shell in the Tank Type field.
The baseline Meridium APM product does not include any records in the Tank Stress
family, but Meridium, Inc. provides Tank Stress records that you can import. Regardless
of whether this reference table is populated with custom data or the records that
Meridium, Inc. provides, when you look up Allowable Stress values, the Meridium APM
system will map values from fields in the Thickness Measurement Location records to
values in the corresponding fields in Tank Stress records to find the associated Allowable
Stress value.
The following table lists the fields that exist in the Tank Stress family in the baseline
Tank Stress Field
Allowable Stress
Code Year
Design Code
Material Grade
Material
Specification
Corresponding
TML Field
Notes
The Allowable Stress value is calculated using

the Minimum Tensile Strength and Minimum
Yield Strength values that are retrieved from the
Tank Stress reference table and is used to
Allowable Stress populate the Lookup Value text box on the
Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box. This value can
be used to populate the Allowable Stress field in
the Thickness Measurement Location record, or
it can be overridden by a user-defined value.
Code Year
(Allowable
Stress Lookup)
The Code Year (Allowable Stress Lookup) must

be specified in the Thickness Measurement
Location record for Meridium APM to retrieve
the Minimum Tensile Strength value and the
Minimum Yield Strength value, which are used
to calculate the Allowable Stress value.
Design Code
The Design Code must be specified in the

Meridium APM to retrieve the Minimum Tensile
Strength value and the Minimum Yield Strength
value, which are used to calculate the Allowable
Stress value.
Material Grade
The Material Grade must be specified in the

Stress value.
Material
Specification
The Material Specification must be specified in

the Thickness Measurement Location record for
Stress value.
Material Type
Material Type
Not used for calculating Allowable Stress.
Metal Temperature
Design
Temperature

Stress value.
Minimum Tensile
Strength
The Minimum Tensile Strength is retrieved from

the Tank Stress reference table using the value
mapped from the Thickness Measurement
Minimum
Location record. The value that is retrieved is
Tensile Strength
used to populate the corresponding field in the
Thickness Measurement Location record and to
calculate the Allowable Stress value.
Minimum Yield
Strength
The Minimum Yield Strength is retrieved from

the Tank Stress reference table using the value
mapped from the Thickness Measurement
Minimum Yield
Location record. The value that is retrieved is
Strength
used to populate the corresponding field in the
Thickness Measurement Location record and to
calculate the Allowable Stress value.
About Interpolation
Meridium APM can determine which Allowable Stress value to use for calculating T-Min
and Maximum Allowable Working Pressure by looking in the Piping Stress reference
table or the PV Stress reference table, as appropriate, and finding a record where the
Material Specification, Material Grade, and Design Code match exactly the values in the
Thickness Measurement Location record. Multiple records with varying temperatures and
stress values may exist for a given combination of Material Specification, Material
Grade, and Design Code values. So, after a match is found on Material Specification,
Material Grade, and Design Code, Meridium APM then evaluates Design Temperature.
If the Design Temperature in the Thickness Measurement Location record is an exact
match to a temperature value in a Piping Stress or PV Stress record, Meridium APM will
simply use the corresponding Allowable Stress value. For example, consider a Thickness
Measurement Location record that contains the following values:
Material Specification = SA-216

Material Grade = B
Design Code = ASME B31.3
Design Temperature = 100
Now, consider a Piping Stress record that contains the following values:

Material Grade = B
Allowable Stress = 20000
In this case, the values in the Thickness Measurement Location record are an exact match
to the values in the Piping Stress record. Therefore, Meridium APM will use the
Allowable Stress value of 20000 to calculate Maximum Allowable Working Pressure and
T-Min.
If the Piping Stress or PV Stress reference table does not contain an exact match on the
Design Temperature defined in the Thickness Measurement Location record, Meridium
APM will use one of two methods for determining Allowable Stress, depending upon
whether or not the Global Preferences specify that interpolation should be used.
If interpolation should not be used, Meridium APM will use the Allowable Stress
value for the lower bound temperature value.
If interpolation should be used, Meridium APM will determine the interpolated
stress value using the values that exist in the Piping Stress table.
When Interpolation Is Used

If Meridium APM cannot find an exact match in the Piping Stress or PV Stress reference
table, and the Global Preferences specify that interpolation should be used, Meridium
APM will calculate the interpolated Allowable Stress value using the temperature and
stress values that make up a range that includes the TML Design Temperature.
For example, consider a Piping Stress reference table that contains the following two
records.
Record #1
Record #2
SA-403
SA-403
Material Grade
WP316
WP316
Design Code
ASME B31.3
ASME B31.3
Design Temperature
100
200
Allowable Stress
20000
18000
values:

Material Grade = WP316
The TML Design Temperature falls within the range established by the two Piping Stress
records in the table. Linear interpolation assumes that stress varies linearly as a function
of temperature within the defined range. Using this assumption, the Allowable Stress at
150 degrees can be calculated using the following formula:
Sx = S1 - (T1 - Tx) / (T1 - T2) * (S1 - S2)
Where:
Sx = Allowable Stress for Thickness Measurement Location record (unknown)

S1 = Allowable Stress at Lower Boundary
S2 = Allowable Stress at Upper Boundary
T1 = Temperature at Lower Boundary
Tx = Temperature defined for TML
T2 = Temperature at Upper Boundary
Given the values from our example, we would solve for Sx as:
Sx = 20000 - ((100 - 150) / (100 - 200) * (20000 - 18000))
Sx = 19000
This interpolated Allowable Stress value will then be used to populate the Allowable
Stress field in the Thickness Measurement Location record.
Note: For Meridium APM to determine Allowable Stress in this way, the Piping Stress
and PV Stress reference tables must contain records that establish the range that includes
the TML Design Temperature.
When Interpolation Is Not Used

If Meridium APM cannot find an exact match in the Piping Stress or PV Stress reference
table, and the Global Preferences specify that interpolation should not be used, Meridium
APM will use an Allowable Stress value that corresponds to the lowest temperature value
in the temperature range that includes the TML Design Temperature.
For example, consider a Piping Stress reference table that contains the following two
records.
Record #1
Record #2
SA-403
SA-403
Material Grade
WP316
WP316
Design Code
ASME B31.3
ASME B31.3
Design Temperature
100
200
Allowable Stress
20000
18000
values:

Material Grade = B
In this case, the Design Temperature in the TML is not an exact match to a Piping Stress
record. The TML Design Temperature, however, does fall within the temperature range
established by the two Piping Stress records in the table. So, in this case, Meridium APM
will use the record that contains the most conservative, or lowest, Allowable Stress value.
Therefore, in this case, an Allowable Stress value of 18,000 will be used in the Thickness
Note: For Meridium APM to determine Allowable Stress in this way, the Piping Stress
and PV Stress reference tables must contain records that establish the range that includes
the TML Design Temperature.
Tank T-Min Annular Ring

Records in the Tank T-Min Annular Ring family make up the Tank T-Min Annular Ring
reference table, which Meridium APM uses to locate the appropriate Calculated T-Min
value for each Thickness Measurement Location record with the value API 653 in the
Design Code field and Annular Ring in the Tank Type field.
The baseline Meridium APM product does not include any records in the Tank T-Min
Annular Ring family. For Calculated T-Min values to be determined, you must create
Tank T-Min Annular Ring records manually using values from industry standards. After
these records exist, when you calculate T-Min values, Meridium APM will use these
records to return Calculated T-Min values for Thickness Measurement Location records
with the value API 653 in the Design Code field and Annular Ring in the Tank Type field.
The following table lists the default fields in the Tank T-Min Annular Ring family and the
corresponding fields in the Thickness Measurement Location family.
Tank T-Min
Annular Ring
Field
Corresponding
TML Field
Notes
The Hydrostatic Test Stress Lower Bound field

establishes the lower boundary of a stress range.
Hydrostatic Test
Allowable Stress An Allowable Stress value from a Thickness
Stress Lower Bound
Measurement Location record that falls within
the established range is considered a match.
The Hydrostatic Test Stress Upper Bound field
establishes the upper boundary of a stress range.
Hydrostatic Test
Allowable Stress An Allowable Stress value from a Thickness
Stress Upper Bound
Measurement Location record that falls within
the established range is considered a match.
Plate Thickness
Lower Bound
The Plate Thickness Lower Bound field

establishes the lower boundary of a plate
thickness range. A Plate Thickness value from a
Plate Thickness
Thickness Measurement Location record that
falls within the established range is considered a
match.
Plate Thickness
Upper Bound
The Plate Thickness Upper Bound field

establishes the upper boundary of a plate
thickness range. A Plate Thickness value from a
Plate Thickness
Thickness Measurement Location record that
falls within the established range is considered a
match.
T-Min
Minimum
Thickness
The T-Min value that corresponds to the stress

range and plate thickness range identified by the
Allowable Stress and Plate Thickness values in
the Thickness Measurement Location record
becomes the Calculated T-Min value for that
record. This value can be used to populate the
Minimum Thickness field in the Thickness
Measurement Location record, or a user-defined
value can be specified instead.
System Code Tables Used by Thickness

Monitoring
The following System Code Tables are used in Thickness Monitoring. The Used By
column explains how the System Code Table is used by any baseline rules that are
provided by Meridium APM. You may want to add or modify rules to customize your
implementation.
Table ID
Table Description
Used in Thickness Monitoring
CRAM
Corrosion Analysis
Methods
Unknown
CITP
To populate the Corrosion Inspection

Corrosion Inspection
Type field in Corrosion Analysis
Type
Settings records.
DPAC
Datapoint Access
DPCN
Datapoint Condition Unknown
DPCR
Datapoint Corrosion
Unknown
Analysis Methods
DPIN
Datapoint Insulation Unknown
DPTP
Datapoint Type
Unknown
DSCD
Design Code
To populate the Design Code list in

records.
INST
Inspection Status
Code
Unknown
INSM
Inspection Interval
Types
Unknown
MI_ASSET_TYPE
Asset Type
To populate the Asset Type list in

records.
MI_RESOURCE_ROLE
List of user roles
To populate the Role list in Resource

Role records.
Unknown
MI_STATUS_INDICATOR TML Status Indicator To populate the Status Indicator list in

records.
PIPFMU
Pipe Formula
To populate the Formula

Classification list in Thickness
Monitoring Rules Lookup records.
PVFMU
Pressure Vessel
Formula
To populate the Formula

Classification list in Thickness
Monitoring Rules Lookup records.
SLCR
Straight Line
Corrosion Methods
Unknown
STCR
Statistical Corrosion
Unknown
Methods
TNKT
Tank Type
To populate the Component Type list

in Thickness Monitoring Rules
Lookup records.
VSTP
Vessel Type
To populate the Component Type list

in Thickness Monitoring Rules
Lookup records.
T_MIN_CUSTOM
EQUATIONS
T-Min Calculator
Custom Equations
Unknown
Other standard System Code Tables such as UOME, MATG and MATL are also used in
Thickness Monitoring.
URL Paths for Thickness Monitoring

Features
The following table lists and describes the paths for accessing features in Meridium APM
Thickness Monitoring. Note that to construct a valid URL, you must prepend meridium://
to the paths listed in the following table. In some cases, you must define parameters
following the path.
Feature
Path
TM Start Page ThicknessMonitoring
TM
Administrative
Tasks
TM Analysis
Archived
Analyses
ThicknessMonitoring/Admintask
Description
Displays the Thickness
Monitoring Functions
page. This path does
not accept any
parameters.
Displays the TM
Administrative Tasks
page. This path does
not accept any
parameters.
ThicknessMonitoring/Analysis
Displays the Find Items

window, where you can
perform a search to
locate the Equipment or
TML Group record you
want to open on the TM
Analysis page. In
addition, this path
accepts parameters that
let you access the TM
analysis for a specific
entity.
ThicknessMonitoring/Analysis/Archive

perform a search to
TML Group record for
which to open the
associated archived
analysis. In addition,
this path accepts
parameters that let you
access the archived
analyses for a specific
entity.
Analysis Plots ThicknessMonitoring/AnalysisPlots
Serves as the path for

accessing analysis
plots. This path accepts
customize the URL.
Bulk Analyze
ThicknessMonitoring/BulkAnalyze

perform a search to
TML Group record for
which to perform a bulk
analysis. This path
let you customize the
URL.
Datalogger
ThicknessMonitoring/Datalogger
Launches the Select a

Device and Properties
dialog box.
TMLs/
ThicknessMonitoring/Datapoint
Measurements

accessing the TM
TMLs/ Measurements
page. This path accepts
customize the URL.
Exclude TMLs ThicknessMonitoring/ExcludeTML
Launches the Find

Items window, where
you can find an
Equipment or TML
Group record for which
to display the Exclude
TMLs dialog box. In
addition, this path
let you access the
Exclude TMLs dialog
box for a specific piece
of equipment.
Measurement ThicknessMonitoring/Measurement/ BulkEntry Displays the Find Items

Data Entry
perform a search to
TML Group record that
you want to open on the
TM Measurement Data
Entry page. The path

accepts parameters to
URL.
Preferences
TM Quick
View
T-Min
Calculator
ThicknessMonitoring/Preferences

accessing pages where
you can set TM
preferences. This path
URL.
ThicknessMonitoring/QuickView

perform a search to
TML Group record you
want to open on the TM
Quick View page. This
path accepts parameters
that let you access the
TM Quick View page
for a specific
Equipment or TML
Group record.
ThicknessMonitoring/TMinCalculator

accessing the T-Min
Calculator. The path
URL.
Parameters for the TM Analysis URL

The URL for accessing a TM Analysis, meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/Analysis,
accepts the parameters described in the following table. Note that if you construct a link
from this URL with no parameter, the Find Items window will appear, where you can
perform a search to locate the Equipment or TML Group record whose analysis summary
you want to view. Click here for examples of using these parameters.
Parameter
Name
Description
Accepted
Value(s)
Notes
This parameter is optional and must be
used only if you want to access the TM
analysis for one or more specific
Equipment or TML Group records.
EntyKey
FamilyKey
You can specify multiple

FamilyKey/EntyKey pairs to open more
than one Equipment or TML Group
record. For every FamilyKey value, there
must be a corresponding EntyKey value,
and vice versa, even if the FamilyKey is
the same for all records. For example,
FamilyKey=1,2,3&EntyKey=1,2,3
(records 1,2, and 3 belong to different
families, 1,2, and 3, respectively) or
(entities 1,2, and 3 belong to the same
family, 1).
This parameter is required only if you
Specifies the
A numeric specify more than one value for the
EntyKey parameter. If you specify a single
family associated Family
Entity Key, Meridium APM can determine
with the
Key.
the Family Key automatically.
Equipment or
TML Group
record(s)
identified by the
EntyKey
parameter.
FamilyKey/EntyKey pairs to open more
than one Equipment or TML Group
record. For every FamilyKey value, there
must be a corresponding EntyKey value,
and vice versa, even if the FamilyKey is
the same for all records. For example,
Specifies the
Equipment or
TML Group
A numeric
record(s) whose Entity Key.
analysis summary
you want to view.
family, 1).
Specifies the
configured
explorer that will
ExplorerPat be used to display
h
the content of the
TM Explorer pane
on the TM
Analysis page.
Selected
The
Catalog
path and
This parameter is optional. The Summary
item name Analysis configured explorer will be used
of a
even if this parameter is omitted.
configured
explorer.
This parameter is optional and is needed

only when more than one root Equipment
In a URL that will
record is displayed in the TM Explorer
be used to access
pane. If multiple root Equipment records
the TM Analysis
are displayed and this parameter is
page for more than
omitted, the first Equipment record will be
one root
Equipment record, A numeric selected.
specifies the
Entity Key.
This parameter cannot be used to
Equipment record
determine the selection of TML Group
that will be
records.
selected by default
in the TM
Explorer pane.
Examples of the TM Analysis URL
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/Analysis
Launches the Find Items window, where you can search for an Equipment or TML Group
record for which to access the TM Analysis page.
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/Analysis?EntyKey=2808497
Opens the TM Analysis page, which displays the corrosion analysis for the Equipment or
TML Group record with the Entity Key 2808497.
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/Analysis?
EntyKey=2808497&FamilyKey=150460
TML Group record with the Entity Key 2808497, which belongs to the family with the
Family Key 150460.
EntyKey=2808497&FamilyKey=150460&ExplorerPath=Public\Meridium\Modul
es\Thickness Monitoring\Explorers\Summary Analysis
TML Group record with the Entity Key 2808497 and builds the content of the TM
Explorer pane using the Summary Analysis configured explorer.
EntyKey=2808497,2457987&FamilyKey=150460,150460&Selected=2457987
Opens the TM Analysis page for the Equipment records with the Entity Keys 2808497
and 2457987. The Equipment record with the Entity Key 2457987 is selected in the TM
Explorer pane.
Parameters for the Archived Analyses

URL
The URL for accessing Archived Corrosion Analyses,
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/Analysis/Archive, accepts the parameters described in
the following table. Click here for examples of using these parameters.
Parameter
Description
Name
EntyKey
Accepted
Notes
Value(s)
This parameter is optional.
Specifies the
A
Equipment or
numeric
TML Group
Entity
record(s) whose Key.
You can specify multiple FamilyKey/EntyKey
archived analyses
pairs to open more than one Equipment or
that you want to
TML Group record. For every FamilyKey
access.
value, there must be a corresponding EntyKey
value, and vice versa, even if the FamilyKey
is the same for all records. For example,
FamilyKey=1,2,3&EntyKey=1,2,3 (records
1,2, and 3 belong to different families, 1,2,
and 3, respectively) or
FamilyKey=1,1,1&EntyKey=1,2,3 (entities
1,2, and 3 belong to the same family, 1).
This parameter is required only if you specify
more than one value for the EntyKey
parameter. If you specify a single Entity Key,
Meridium APM can determine the Family
Key automatically.
Specifies the
family associated
with the
Equipment or
FamilyKey TML Group
record(s)
identified by the
EntyKey
parameter.
Selected
A
numeric
Family
Key.
In a URL that will

be used to access
the TM Analysis
page for more
than one root
A
Equipment record, numeric
specifies the
Entity
Equipment record Key.
that will be
selected by
default in the TM
Explorer pane.
You can specify multiple FamilyKey/EntyKey

pairs to open more than one Equipment or
TML Group record. For every FamilyKey
value, there must be a corresponding EntyKey
value, and vice versa, even if the FamilyKey
is the same for all records. For example,
FamilyKey=1,2,3&EntyKey=1,2,3 (records
1,2, and 3 belong to different families, 1,2,
and 3, respectively) or
FamilyKey=1,1,1&EntyKey=1,2,3 (entities
This parameter is optional and is needed only
when more than one root Equipment record is
displayed in the TM Explorer pane. If
multiple root Equipment records are displayed
and this parameter is omitted, the first
Equipment or TML Group record will be
selected.
Examples of the Archived Analyses URL
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/Analysis/Archive
Launches the Find Items window, which you can use to find an Equipment or TML
Group record for which to view archived corrosion analyses.
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/Analysis/Archive?
Displays the TM Analysis Archive page, where you can view the archived TM analysis
for the Equipment or TML Group record with the Entity Key 2806775, which belongs to
the family identified by the Family Key 6425148.
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/Analysis/Archive?
EntyKey=2806775,2657848&FamilyKey=6425148,6425148&Selected=2806775
Displays the TM Analysis Archive page, where you can view the archived TM analysis
for the Equipment records with the Entity Keys 2806775 and 2657848. The Equipment
record with the Entity Key 2806775 is selected in the TM Explorer pane.
Parameters for the Analysis Plots URL

The URL for accessing the Asset Analysis Plot page,
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/AnalysisPlots, accepts the parameters described in the
following table. Click here for examples of using these parameters.
Note: The parameter values for the Analysis Plots URL are case sensitive. When
constructing URLs to access Analysis Plots, use the exact case that appears in the
following table.
Parameter
Name
Accepted
Value(s)
Specifies the analysis type for UT
AnalysisType which you want to view the
analysis plots.
RT
Description
Notes
This parameter is
required when
Plot=EntityAnalysis.
TML
EntityKey
For the analysis plot that you

want to access, specifies the
A numeric
Entity Key.
This parameter is
required when
Equipment or TML Group

record with which the analysis
is associated.
FamilyKey
Plot
Specifies the family associated

with the Equipment or TML A numeric
Group record that you define Family Key.
via the EntityKey parameter.
Specifies which plot you want
EntityAnalysis
to view.
This parameter is
required when
This parameter is
required.
TMLAnalysis
TMLKey
Specifies the Thickness

Measurement Location record A numeric
for which to display the TML Entity Key.
plot.
This parameter is
required when
Plot=TMLAnalysis.
Examples of Analysis Plots URLs
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/AnalysisPlots?
Plot=EntityAnalysis&EntityKey=2806775&FamilyKey=6425148&AnalysisType
=UT
Displays the Asset Analysis Plot page for the Equipment or TML Group record with the
Entity Key 2806775.
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/AnalysisPlots?
Plot=TMLAnalysis&TMLKey=2806778
Displays the TML Analysis Plot page for the Thickness Measurement Location record
with the Entity Key 2806778.
Parameters for the Bulk Analyze URL
The URL for accessing the Bulk Analyze dialog box,

meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/BulkAnalyze, accepts the parameters described in the
following table. Note that both of these parameters are optional. If you use one parameter,
however, you must also use the other. In other words, the URL should contain no
parameters or both parameters listed in the following table. Click here for examples of
using these parameters.
Parameter
Name
EntyKey
FamilyKey
Description
Accepted
Notes
Value(s)
Specifies the Equipment

or TML Group record(s) A numeric The entity should belong to the
for which you want to Entity
family specified by the FamilyKey
perform a bulk analysis. Key.
parameter.
Specifies the family
associated with the
Equipment or TML
Group record(s)
identified by the
EntyKey parameter.
This parameter is required only if

you specify more than one value for
A numeric
the EntyKey parameter. If you
Family
specify a single Entity Key,
Key.
Meridium APM can determine the
Family Key automatically.
Note the following details about the parameters listed here:
You can specify multiple FamilyKey/EntyKey pairs to open more than one
For every FamilyKey value, there must be a corresponding EntyKey value, and
vice versa, even if the FamilyKey is the same for all records. For example,
FamilyKey=1,2,3&EntyKey=1,2,3 (records 1,2, and 3 belong to different
families, 1,2, and 3, respectively) or FamilyKey=1,1,1&EntyKey=1,2,3 (entities
Examples of the Bulk Analyze URL
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/BulkAnalyze
Launches the Find Items window, which you can use to search for an Equipment or TML
Group record for which to perform a bulk analysis.
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/BulkAnalyze?
Launches the Bulk Analyze dialog box, where you can perform a bulk analysis for the
Equipment or TML Group record whose Entity ID is 2806775, which belongs to family
whose Family ID is 6425148.
Parameters for the Preferences URL

The URL for accessing a TM Preferences, meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/Preferences,
accepts the parameters described in the following table. Click here for examples of using
these parameters.
Note: The parameter values for the TM Preferences URL are case sensitive. When
constructing URLs to access any of the Thickness Monitoring Preferences pages, use the
exact case that appears in the following table.
Parameter
Name
Description
Accepted Value(s) Notes

The FamilyKey parameter is
associated with the entity A numeric Family
required when
for which you want to
Key.
View=EquipmentFamily.
FamilyKey perform a bulk analysis.
View
EquipmentFamily
Specifies which page to
access. whether you want FieldMappings
to access the Global
Preferences page, the
Global
Asset Family Preferences
page, or the TM Color- ResetUP

Coding Preferences page.
SetColor
EquipmentFamily:
Displays the Asset
Family Preferences
page.
FieldMappings:
Displays the Common
Data Field Mappings
page.
Global: Displays the
Global Preferences
page.
ResetUP: Displays
the Reset User
Preferences page.
SetColor: Displays
the TM Color-Coding
Preferences page.
Examples of the Preferences URL
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/Preferences?View=Global
Displays the Global Preferences page.
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/Preferences?
View=EquipmentFamily&FamilyKey=104560
Launches the Equipment Family Preferences page for the family with the Family Key
104560.
Parameters for the TM

TMLs/Measurements URL
The URL for accessing the TM TMLs/Measurements page,
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/Datapoint, accepts the parameters described in the
following table. For examples of using these parameters, click here.
Parameter
Name
View
Description
Accepted
Value(s)
Notes
Specifies that you

MasterDetail This parameter is required. Note that
want to access the TM
the parameter value is case sensitive
TMLs/Measurements
and must be used exactly as shown:
page.
Specifies the
configured explorer
that will be used to
ExplorerPat display the content of
h
the TM Explorer pane
on the TM
TMLs/Measurements
page.
MasterDetail.
The Catalog This parameter is optional. This

path and
parameter is optional. The TMLs and
item name of Measurements configured explorer
a configured will be used even if this parameter is
explorer.
omitted.
This parameter is optional. If you
define this parameter, however, you
must also define the FamilyKey
parameter.
EntyKey

FamilyKey/EntyKey pairs to open
more than one Equipment or TML
Group record. For every FamilyKey
value, there must be a corresponding
EntyKey value, and vice versa, even
if the FamilyKey is the same for all
records. For example,
family, 1).
Family Key. EntyKey parameter. If you specify a
single Entity Key, Meridium APM
can determine the Family Key
automatically.
Specifies the
A numeric
Equipment or TML
Entity Key.
Group record(s) for
which to open the TM
TMLs/Measurements
page.
FamilyKey
associated with the
Equipment or TML
Group record(s)
identified by the
EntyKey parameter.

Selected
EntyKey value, and vice versa, even

if the FamilyKey is the same for all
family, 1).
This parameter is optional and is
needed only when more than one
root Equipment record is displayed in
the TM Explorer pane. If multiple
root Equipment records are displayed
and this parameter is omitted, the first
Equipment record will be selected.
In a URL that will be

used to access the TM
TMLs/Measurements
page for more than
one root Equipment A numeric
record, specifies the Entity Key.
Equipment record that
determine the selection of TML
will be selected by
Group records.
default in the TM
Explorer pane.
Examples of the TM
TMLs/Measurements URL
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/DataPoint?View=MasterDetail
Displays the Find Items window, where you can search for an Equipment or TML Group
record for which to open the TM TMLs/Measurements page.
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/DataPoint?
View=MasterDetail&EntyKey=2806775&FamilyKey=6425148
Opens the TM TMLs/Measurements page for the Equipment or TML Group record
identified by the Entity Key 2806775, which belongs to the family with the Family Key
6425148.
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/DataPoint?
View=MasterDetail&EntyKey=2808497&FamilyKey=150460&ExplorerPath=Pu
blic\Meridium\Modules\Thickness Monitoring\Explorers\TMLs and
Measurements
Opens the TM TMLs/Measurements page for the Equipment or TML Group record with
the Entity Key 2808497 and builds the content of the TM Explorer pane using the TMLs
and Measurements configured explorer.
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/DataPoint?EntyKey=2808497,
2457987&FamilyKey=150460, 150460&Selected=2457987
Opens the TM TMLs/Measurements page for the Equipment records with the Entity Keys
2808497 and 2457987. The Equipment record with the Entity Key 2457987 is selected in
Parameters for the Exclude TMLs URL

The URL for accessing the Exclude TMLs feature,
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/ExcludeTML, accepts the parameters described in the
Parameter
Name
Description
Accepted
Value(s)
Notes
EntityKey
Specifies the entity for

which you want to access A numeric
the Exclude TMLs dialog Entity Key.
box.
FamilyKey

associated with the entity A numeric
for which you want to
Family
access the Exclude TMLs Key.
dialog box.
This parameter is required if you

also define the EntityKey
parameter. The FamilyKey that you
specify should be for the family to
which the specified entity belongs.
Note the following details about the parameters listed here:
You can specify multiple FamilyKey/EntyKey pairs to open more than one
For every FamilyKey value, there must be a corresponding EntyKey value, and
vice versa, even if the FamilyKey is the same for all records. For example,
FamilyKey=1,2,3&EntyKey=1,2,3 (records 1,2, and 3 belong to different
families, 1,2, and 3, respectively) or FamilyKey=1,1,1&EntyKey=1,2,3 (entities
Examples of the Exclude TMLs URL
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/ExcludeTML
record for which to display the Exclude TMLs dialog box.
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/ExcludeTML?
Opens the Exclude TMLs dialog box, displaying a list of TMLs that exist for the
Equipment or TML Group record with the Entity Key 2806775.
Parameters for the Measurement Data

Entry URL
The URL for accessing the Measurement Data Entry page,
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/Measurement/BulkEntry, accepts the parameters
described in the following table. For examples of using these parameters, click here.
Parameter Name
View
Description
Accepted
Notes
Value(s)
Specifies to
DataEntry This parameter is required. Note that
display the
Measurement
Data Entry
page.
the parameter value is case sensitive

and must be used exactly as shown:
DataEntry.
This parameter is optional. If you
define this parameter, however, you
must also define the FamilyKey
parameter.
EntyKey
FamilyKey
Specifies the
Equipment or
TML Group
record(s) for
which to open
the
Measurement
Data Entry
page.

A numeric Group record. For every FamilyKey
Entity Key. value, there must be a corresponding
EntyKey value, and vice versa, even if
the FamilyKey is the same for all
family, 1).
Specifies the
family
Entity Key. EntyKey parameter. If you specify a
single Entity Key, Meridium APM can
associated with
determine the Family Key
the Equipment
automatically.
or TML Group
record(s)
identified by the
EntyKey
parameter.
EntyKey value, and vice versa, even if
the FamilyKey is the same for all
family, 1).
ExplorerPath
Specifies the
configured
explorer that
will be used to
display the
content of the
TM
Explorer pane
on the TM
Measurement
Data Entry
page.
Selected
This parameter is optional and is

In a URL that
needed only when more than one root
will be used to
Equipment record is displayed in the
access the TM
TM Explorer pane. If multiple root
Measurement
Equipment records are displayed and
Data Entry page
this parameter is omitted, the first
for more than
Equipment or TML Group record will
one root
A numeric
be selected.
Equipment
Entity Key.
record, specifies
the Equipment
record that will
records.
be selected by
default in the
TM Explorer
pane.
The
Catalog
path and
item name
of a
configured
explorer.
Specifies if
Meridium APM
Y
should display
SHOW_NOMINAL the TM Initial
N
Measurement
Data Entry
page.
This parameter is optional. The

Measurement Data Entry configured
explorer will be used even if this
parameter is omitted.
Examples of the Measurement Data

Entry URL
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/Measurement/BulkEntry?View=DataEntry
record to open in the TM Measurement Data Entry page.
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/Measurement/BulkEntry?
View=DataEntry&FamilyKey=6425148&EntyKey=2012352
Opens the Measurement Data Entry page for the Equipment or TML Group record with
the Entity Key 2806775, which belongs to the family identified by the Family Key
6425148.
View=DataEntry&FamilyKey=6425148&EntyKey=2012352&ExplorerPath=Publ
ic\Meridium\Modules\Thickness Monitoring\Explorers\Measurement Data Entry
Opens the Measurement Data Entry page for the Equipment or TML Group record with
Entity Key 2012352 and builds the content of the TM Explorer pane using the
Measurement Data Entry configured explorer.
View=DataEntry&SHOW_NOMINAL=Y
record to open in the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page.
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/Analysis?EntyKey=2808497,
Opens the TM Analysis page for the Equipment records with the Entity Keys 2808497
Explorer pane.
Parameters for the Quick View URL
The URL for accessing the TM Quick View page,

meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/QuickView, accepts the parameters described in the
Parameter
Name
Description
Accepted
Value(s)
Notes
EntityKey
FamilyKey

FamilyKey/EntityKey pairs to open more
Specifies the
than one Equipment or TML Group record.
Equipment or
For every FamilyKey value, there must be
TML Group
A numeric a corresponding EntityKey value, and vice
record(s) for
Entity Key. versa, even if the FamilyKey is the same
which you want to
for all records. For example,
access the TM
FamilyKey=1,2,3&EntityKey=1,2,3
Quick View.
family, 1).
specify more than one value for the
Specifies the
family associated
with the
Equipment or
A numeric
TML Group
Family
record(s)
Key.
identified by the
EntityKey
parameter.

a corresponding EntityKey value, and vice
versa, even if the FamilyKey is the same
family, 1).
Specifies the
The
configured
Catalog
explorer that will
path and
This parameter is optional. The Quick
be used to display
ExplorerPath
item name View configured explorer will be used
the content of the
of a
even if this parameter is omitted.
TM Explorer pane
configured
on the TM Quick
explorer.
View page.
only when more than one root Equipment
In a URL that will
record is displayed in the TM Explorer
be used to access
the TM Quick
View page for
more than one
root Equipment A numeric selected.
Selected
record, specifies Entity Key.
the Equipment
record that will be
records.
selected by
default in the TM
Explorer pane.
Examples of Quick View URLs
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/QuickView
Launches the Find Items window, which lets you search for an Equipment or TML Group
record and open the associated TM Quick View page.
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/QuickView?
Opens the TM Quick View for the Equipment or TML Group record with the Entity Key
2806775.
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/QuickView?
EntyKey=2806775&FamilyKey=64251484090&ExplorerPath=Public\Meridium\
Modules\Thickness Monitoring\Explorers\Quick View
Opens the TM Quick View page for the Equipment or TML Group record with the Entity
Key 2806775 and builds the content of the TM Explorer pane using the Quick View
configured explorer.
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/QuickView?EntyKey=2808497,
Opens the TM Quick View page for the Equipment records with the Entity Keys 2808497
Explorer pane.
Parameters for the T-Min Calculator

URL
The URL for accessing the T-Min Calculator,
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/TMinCalculator, accepts the parameters described in
the following table. For examples of using these parameters, click here.
Note: The parameter values for the T-Min Calculator URL are case sensitive. When
constructing URLs for the T-Min Calculator, use the exact case that appears in the
following table.
Parameter
Name
View
EntityKey
Description
Accepted
Value(s)
Notes
Specifies that you

want to view the
T-Min
Calculator This parameter is required.
Calculations
page.
Specifies the
A numeric
Equipment or
Entity Key.
TML Group
record(s) for
which to open the
T-Min
Calculations
page.
FamilyKey
Specifies the
family associated
with the
Equipment or
A numeric
TML Group
Family
record(s)
Key.
identified by the
EntityKey
parameter.

family, 1).
specify more than one value for the

family, 1).
Specifies the
configured
The
explorer that will Catalog
ExplorerPath
be used to display path and This parameter is optional. The T-Min
the content of the item name Calculator configured explorer will be
TM Explorer pane of a
used even if this parameter is omitted.
on the T-Min
configured
Calculations
explorer.
page.
SELECTED In a URL that will A numeric only when more than one root Equipment
be used to access Entity Key. record is displayed in the TM Explorer
the T-Min
Calculations page
for more than one

root Equipment
record, specifies
the Equipment
record that will be
selected by
default in the TM
Explorer pane.

selected.
records.
Examples of T-Min Calculator URLs
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/TMinCalculator?View=Calculator
record for which to access the T-Min Calculator.
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/TMinCalculator?
View=Calculator&FamilyKey=6425148&EntityKey=2012352
Opens the T-Min Calculator page for the Equipment or TML Group record with the
Entity Key 2012352, which belongs to the family identified by the Family Key 6425148.
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/TMinCalculator?
View=Calculator&FamilyKey=6425148&EntityKey=2012352&ExplorerPath=Pu
blic\Meridium\Modules\Thickness Monitoring\Explorers\T-Min Calculator
Opens the T-Min Calculations page for the Equipment or TML Group record with the
Entity Key 2012352 and builds the content of the TM Explorer pane using the T-Min
Calculator configured explorer.
meridium://ThicknessMonitoring/TMinCalculator?EntyKey=2808497,
2457987&FamilyKey=150460, 150460&SELECTED=2457987
Opens the T-Min Caluclations page for the Equipment records with the Entity Keys
2808497 and 2457987. The Equipment record with the Entity Key 2457987 is selected in
Active Measurement
A Thickness Measurement record whose Measurement Status Indicator field is set to
Active. Active measurements are used to perform calculations in your TM Analyses.
Actual Measurement
A Thickness Measurement record whose Nominal field is set to False. An actual
measurement represents a reading that is taken manually at a TML on a piece of
equipment.
Component
A part that makes up a piece of equipment or any further subdivision of that part. For
example, a shell and tube heat exchanger could be made up of the following components:
Shell
Tube
The shell component could be further subdivided into the following components:
Tube bundles
Baffles
Nozzles
If you follow the Thickness Monitoring Best Practice, TML Group records can be used to
store information about components. If you do not follow the TM Best Practice, you may
use other records to store information about components.

The pertinent corrosion rate for a given piece of equipment, component, or TML that will
be used for predicting inspection and retirement dates in your TM Analysis.
For a TML, this value is stored in the Corrosion Rate field in the TML Corrosion
Analysis record that is linked to the Thickness Measurement Location record.
When referring to the pertinent corrosion rate for a given TML, the term TML
controlling corrosion rate is used.
For a piece of equipment, this value is stored in the Controlling Corrosion Rate
field in the Asset Corrosion Analysis record that is linked to the Equipment. When
referring to the pertinent corrosion rate for a given piece of equipment, the term
equipment controlling corrosion rate is used.
This term is used in the TM Calculations documentation.
Inactive Measurement
A Thickness Measurement record whose Measurement Status Indicator field is set to
Inactive. Inactive measurements are not used to perform calculations in your TM
Analyses.
Nominal Measurement
A Thickness Measurement record whose Nominal field is set to True. A nominal
measurement represents a reading that is not taken physically, but is recorded from some
other source, such as a design specification.
Piping TML
A Thickness Measurement Location record whose Design Code value is associated with
an Equipment record that represents a pipe. This term is used in the TM Calculations
documentation.
Pressure Vessel TML

an Equipment record that represents a pressure vessel. This term is used in the TM
Calculations documentation.
Tank TML
an Equipment record that represents a tank. This term is used in the TM Calculations
documentation.
TM Analysis
The combination of Thickness Monitoring records, created by you and the Meridium
APM system, and the links between these records that allow you to manage and analyze
corrosion data for pieces of equipment and/or components.
TML Analysis Type

The combination of the following elements that determine the types of Thickness
Measurement Location records that can be created in a TM Analysis and how they are
classified:
System Codes in the CITP (Corrosion Inspection Type) System Code Table.
The value specified in the Corrosion Inspection Type field in a given Corrosion
Analysis Settings record in your TM Analysis.
TML CR SD
The standard deviation of the TML controlling corrosion rate. This term is used in the
TM Calculations documentation.
TML Group
A group of TMLs on a piece of equipment and/or component. TML Group records are
used to organize a group of TMLs for an entire piece of equipment or one or more
components that make up a piece of equipment.
# of TMLs
The number of Active Thickness Measurement Location records included in a TM
Analysis. This term is used in the TM Calculations documentation.

TM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Introduction to Thickness Monitoring

The Minimum Thickness (T-Min) Calculator, which is designed to calculate the

IMPORTANT: With the exception of the section of the documentation on configuring

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

About Equipment and Locations in TM

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

TM Analyses That Include TML Group Records

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

TM Analyses That Include TML Group

Automatically for Equipment and

Automatically (when a Corrosion

Analysis Settings record is created).

Automatically (when a Thickness

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

TM Analyses That Exclude TML Group

Automatically (when a Corrosion

Automatically (when a Corrosion

Automatically (when a Thickness

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Equipment and TML Groups

If you set your TM Analyses up in this way:

You must configure preferences for the Equipment family.

All Thickness Measurement Location records that you create should be

If you set your TM Analyses up in this way:

All Thickness Measurement Location records that you create should be

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Overview of TML Groups

For a given piece of equipment, a TML Group record can represent:

TML Group - Shell Side

TML Group - Tube Side

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

About Managing TML Group Records

Modify TML Group records.

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Thickness Measurement Locations

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Overview of Thickness Measurements

Base Measurement: The first measurement taken for a TML.

Last Measurement: The most-recently-recorded measurement for a TML.

TM TMLs/Measurements page: Lets you view all the Thickness Measurement

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

How Measurement Values are

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Nominal Versus Actual Thickness

A nominal measurement represents a reading that is not taken physically but is

An actual measurement represents a reading that is taken manually at the physical

Measurement data will be populated automatically for Thickness Measurement

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

TML Corrosion Analyses

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

About Asset Analysis Settings

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

About TML Analysis Settings

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Overview of Asset Corrosion Analyses

An Equipment or TML Group record.

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

How Equipment-Level Analysis

Equipment A - Piping Circuit

TML Group 2 - Piping Line 2

TML Group 3 - Piping Line 3

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.